l
Oracle Financials Cloud: Financials Implementation for R11
Activity Guide D000PTGC10
Edition 1.0 | June 2016
Learn more from Oracle University at oracle.com/education/
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. Disclaimer
This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. You may copy and print this document solely for your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or altered in any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display, perform, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part without the express authorization of Oracle.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the document, please report them in writing to: Oracle University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This document is not warranted to be error-free.
Restricted Rights Notice
If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using the documentation on behalf of the United States Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
The U.S. Government’s rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or disclose these training materials are restricted by the terms of the applicable Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.
Trademark Notice
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Author
Kathryn Wohnoutka
This book was published using: oracletutor
Copyright © 2016. Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Oracle Financials Cloud: Financials Implementation for R11 Table of Contents
i
Table of Contents
Practices for Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Cloud Financials Implementation .....................................1-1
Practices for Lesson 1.................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation ................................................................... 2-1
Practices for Lesson 2: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 2-2
Practice 2-1: Getting Started in Oracle Fusion Applications ........................................................................... 2-6
Practice 2-2: Exploring Infolets and Infotiles...................................................................................................2-12
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup ........................................................ 3-1
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 3-2
Practice 3-1: Browsing Offerings .................................................................................................................... 3-3
Practice 3-2: Configure Offerings Demonstration ........................................................................................... 3-4
Practice 3-3: Creating an Implementation Project .......................................................................................... 3-6
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview .................................................................................................... 4-1
Practices for Lesson 4: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 4-2
Practice 4-1: Defining Role Mapping .............................................................................................................. 4-3
Practice 4-2: Creating a User ............................................................................................................................... 4-5
Practice 4-3: Creating an Employee .................................................................................................................... 4-7
Practice 4-4: Using the Security Console .......................................................................................................4-10
Practices for Lesson 5: Discussing the Vision Story and Common Applications......................................5-1
Practices for Lesson 5.................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures ............................................................................. 6-1
Practices for Lesson 6: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 6-2
Practice 6-1: Reviewing Shared Components ................................................................................................ 6-3
Practice 6-2: Entering Data in the Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet ............................................................. 6-5
Practice 6-3: Uploading the Chart of Accounts File ........................................................................................6-10
Practice 6-4: Verifying Deployment Was Successful Demonstration .............................................................. 6-11
Practice 6-5: Uploading the Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File ...................................................... 6-12
Practice 6-6: Reviewing an Existing Legal Jurisdictions .................................................................................6-13
Practice 6-7: Reviewing Legal Addresses for Legal Entities and Reporting Units ..........................................6-14
Practice 6-8: Creating a Legal Authority .........................................................................................................6-15
Practice 6-9: Searching for Your Legal Entity .................................................................................................6-16
Practice 6-10: Viewing a Legal Reporting Unit ............................................................................................... 6-18
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components ............................................................. 7-1
Practices for Lesson 7: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 7-2
Practice 7-1: Searching for Your Value Sets .................................................................................................. 7-3
Practice 7-2: Searching for Your Chart of Accounts Structure and Instance .................................................. 7-4
Practice 7-3: Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration .......................................................................... 7-6
Practice 7-4: Creating an Account Shorthand Alias ........................................................................................ 7-7
Practice 7-5: Entering Values ...............................................................................................................................7-8
Practice 7-6: Searching and Completing Your Accounting Hierarchy .............................................................7-9
Practice 7-7: Publishing Accounting Hierarchy ...............................................................................................7-11
Practice 7-8: Creating an Account Combination ............................................................................................. 7-12
Practice 7-9: Defining Cross-Validation Rules ................................................................................................7-14
Practice 7-10: Verifying Your Calendar ................................................................................................................ 7-17
Practice 7-11: Reviewing and Creating Currencies ........................................................................................7-18
Practice 7-12: Creating Conversion Rate Types ............................................................................................7-19
Practice 7-13: Entering Daily Rates .....................................................................................................................7-20
Copyright © 2016. Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Oracle Financials Cloud: Financials Implementation for R11 Table of Contents
ii
Practice 7-14: Entering a Currency Conversion Journal .................................................................................7-22
Practice 7-15: Searching for Your Ledger ...........................................................................................................7-23
Practice 7-16: Verifying Your Ledger Options ................................................................................................7-24
Practice 7-17: Verifying Your Legal Entities and Balancing Segments Assignments .....................................7-26
Practice 7-18: Defining Reporting Currencies .....................................................................................................7-27
Practice 7-19: Completing the Ledger Configuration ......................................................................................7-29
Practice 7-20: Creating a Ledger Set ...................................................................................................................7-30
Practice 7-21: Reviewing Data Access Set Security ......................................................................................7-31
Practice 7-22: Creating Data Access Set Security .........................................................................................7-32
Practice 7-23: Opening the First Accounting Period ...........................................................................................7-34
Practice 7-24: Creating and Generating an Allocation Rule ...........................................................................7-35
Practice 7-25: Creating a Revaluation ............................................................................................................7-54
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany............................................................ 8-1
Practices for Lesson 8: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 8-2
Practice 8-1: Settung Up a New Rule Demonstratoin ..................................................................................... 8-3
Practice 8-2: Viewing Intercompany Balancing Rules and Secondary and Clearing Company
Balancing Options ..........................................................................................................................................8-5
Practice 8-3: Creating an Intercompany Batch .............................................................................................. 8-8
Practice 8-4: Submitting and Reviewing Reconciliation Reports ........................................................................ 8-12
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting .......................................................................... 9-1
Practices for Lesson 9: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 9-2
Practice 9-1: Viewing a Financial Report from the Financial Reporting Center .................................................9-3
Practice 9-2: Creating a Financial Report: Defining a Grid ............................................................................. 9-5
Practice 9-3: Creating a Financial Report: Adding a Formula for Total Expenses ............................................9-14
Practice 9-4: Creating a Financial Report Defining a Rolling 12-Period Column...............................................9-17
Practice 9-5: Creating a Financial Report: Defining the Grid and User Point of View Dimensions .................9-26
Practice 9-6: Creating a Financial Report: Setting Properties......................................................................... 9-31
Practice 9-7: Creating a Financial Report: Adding a Logo and Title ............................................................... 9-36
Practice 9-8: Reviewing a Report ......................................................................................................................... 9-38
Practice 9-9: Using Infolets Demonstration .................................................................................................... 9-41
Practice 9-10: Setting up the General Accounting Expense Infolet Demonstration ........................................9-42
Practice 9-11: Viewing an Account Group from the Financial Reporting Center Demonstration ....................9-46
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets ........................................ 10-1
Practices for Lesson 10: Overview .................................................................................................................10-2
Practice 10-1: Viewing Your Business Unit ......................................................................................................... 10-3
Practice 10-2: Viewing the Assigned Business Unit Functions .......................................................................10-4
Practice 10-3: Creating a Reference Data Set ....................................................................................................10-5
Practice 10-4: Managing Your Business Unit Set Assignment ....................................................................... 10-6
Practice 10-5: Provisioning Data Roles ...............................................................................................................10-7
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax ............................................................................. 11-1
Practices for Lesson 11: Overview .................................................................................................................11-2
Practice 11-1: Viewing a Calculated Tax on a Payables Transaction Demonstration .....................................11-3
Practice 11-2: Creating a US Sales Tax Using the Tax Configuration Workbook ...........................................11-5
Practice 11-3: Creating a VAT Tax Using the Tax Configuration Workbook (Optional) ..................................11-10
Practice 11-4: Using the Tax Simulator to Test a Payables Transaction ........................................................ 11-16
Practice 11-5: Enabling Your Tax for Transactions ........................................................................................11-18
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting ............................................. 12-1
Practices for Lesson 12: Overview .................................................................................................................12-2
Copyright © 2016. Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Oracle Financials Cloud: Financials Implementation for R11 Table of Contents
3
Practice 12-1: Creating Three Account Rules ..................................................................................................... 12-3
Practice 12-2: Creating a Description Rule ....................................................................................................12-6
Practice 12-3: Creating Two Journal Line Rules .................................................................................................12-8
Practice 12-4: Creating a Journal Entry Rule Set ................................................................................................12-10
Practice 12-5: Duplicating and Modifying an Accounting Method ...................................................................... 12-12
Practice 12-6: Reviewing Accounting for a Payables Invoice .........................................................................12-15
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables ....................................................................13-1
Practices for Lesson 13: Overview .................................................................................................................13-2
Practice 13-1: Defining Your User as a Procurement Agent ...........................................................................13-3
Practice 13-2: Creating a Payment Term.............................................................................................................13-5
Practice 13-3: Managing Common Options for Payables and Procurement ...................................................13-8
Practice 13-4: Managing Invoice Options .......................................................................................................13-10
Practice 13-5: Managing Payment Options ....................................................................................................13-12
Practice 13-6: Managing Distribution Sets .....................................................................................................13-13
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables ................................................14-1
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables ........................................................ 14-2
Practice 14-1: Creating Banks, Branches, and Accounts Using a Spreadsheet. ..............................................14-3
Practice 14-2: Creating a Payment Document for a Bank Account ................................................................ 14-5
Practice 14-3: Creating a Disbursement Payment File Format .......................................................................14-6
Practice 14-4: Creating the Transmission Configuration ................................................................................14-7
Practice 14-5: Creating a Payment System .........................................................................................................14-8
Practice 14-6: Creating a Payment Method ....................................................................................................14-10
Practice 14-7: Creating a Payment Process Profile........................................................................................14-13
Practice 14-8: Submitting a Payment Process Request .....................................................................................14-14
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables .............................................................. 15-1
Practices for Lesson 15: Overview .................................................................................................................15-2
Practice 15-1: Reviewing Receivables System Options .................................................................................15-3
Practice 15-2: Reviewing AutoAccounting Rules ................................................................................................15-6
Practice 15-3: Reviewing Remit-to Addresses ....................................................................................................15-7
Practice 15-4: Reviewing Receivables Activities .................................................................................................15-8
Practice 15-5: Reviewing Statement Cycles ........................................................................................................15-9
Practice 15-6: Creating a Customer Profile Class ..........................................................................................15-10
Practice 15-7: Creating a Customer ...............................................................................................................15-13
Practice 15-8: Defining a Transaction Type ...................................................................................................15-14
Practice 15-9: Defining a Transaction Source ................................................................................................ 15-16
Practice 15-10: Creating Banks, Branches, and Accounts Using a Spreadsheet .............................................15-18
Practice 15-11: Creating a Receipt Class and Receipt Method ...................................................................... 15-20
Practice 15-12: Creating a Receipt Source ......................................................................................................... 15-22
Practices for Lesson 16: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Receivables ...........................................16-1
Practices for Lesson 16 ..................................................................................................................................16-2
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management ................................................... 17-1
Practices for Lesson 17: Overview .................................................................................................................17-2
Practice 17-1: Managing Bank Statement Transaction Codes ...........................................................................17-3
Practice 17-2: Managing Bank Statement Transaction Creation Rules ..........................................................17-5
Practice 17-3: Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Matching Rules .....................................................17-6
Practice 17-4: Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Tolerance Rules .................................................... 17-7
Practice 17-5: Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Rule Sets............................................................... 17-8
Practice 17-6: Assigning a Rule Set to a Bank Account ................................................................................. 17-9
Copyright © 2016. Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Oracle Financials Cloud: Financials Implementation for R11 Table of Contents
4
Practice 17-7: Performing a Bank Statement Reconciliation with Autoreconciliation ......................................17-10
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections ..............................................18-1
Practices for Lesson 18: Overview ................................................................................................................. 18-2
Practice 18-1: Getting Started with Advanced Collections Demonstration ..................................................... 18-3
Practice 18-2: Creating an Aging Method. ...................................................................................................... 18-5
Practice 18-3: Creating a Collector and a Resource ...................................................................................... 18-7
Practice 18-4: Reviewing Dunning Templates Demonstration ........................................................................... 18-9
Practice 18-5: Creating a Strategy Task .........................................................................................................18-10
Practice 18-6: Creating a Strategy .................................................................................................................18-11
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets ................................................................................................ 19-1
Practices for Lesson 19: Overview ................................................................................................................. 19-2
Practice 19-1: Updating an Existing Assets Configuration ............................................................................. 19-3
Practice 19-2: Review Asset Key Flexfields Demonstration ........................................................................... 19-6
Practice 19-3: Define Values for Major and Minor Category .......................................................................... 19-7
Practice 19-4: Define Values for Asset Clearing and CIP Clearing Accounts .................................................19-9
Practice 19-5: Review Asset System Control Options ....................................................................................19-10
Practice 19-6: Define Values for Asset Clearing and CIP Clearing Accounts .................................................19-11
Practice 19-7: Managing Fiscal Years ............................................................................................................19-12
Practice 19-8: Managing Asset Calendars ..................................................................................................... 19-13
Practice 19-9: Managing Prorate Conventions ...............................................................................................19-15
Practice 19-10: Managing Asset Books ..........................................................................................................19-16
Practice 19-11: Managing Asset Categories ..................................................................................................19-18
Practice 19-12: Provisioning Data Roles to the User Account............................................................................19-23
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation .................................20-1
Practices for Lesson 20: Overview ................................................................................................................. 20-2
Practice 20-1: Reviewing the Expenses System Options ............................................................................... 20-3
Practice 20-2: Creating an Expense Report Template ................................................................................... 20-5
Practice 20-3: Modifying Approval Rules Demonstration ............................................................................... 20-8
Practice 20-4: Setting Warning and Error Limits on a Conversion Rate Demonstration .................................20-12
Practice 20-5: Viewing a Conversion Rate Policy Warning and Error.............................................................20-13
Practice 20-6: Setting Up a Car Rental Policy ................................................................................................20-15
Practice 20-7: Setting Up an Airfare Policy ....................................................................................................20-18
Practice 20-8: Setting Up a Miscellaneous Expense Policy............................................................................20-20
Practice 20-9: Setting Up a Meals Expense Policy .........................................................................................20-22
Practice 20-10: Setting Up a Mileage Expense Policy ....................................................................................20-24
Practice 20-11: Setting Up an Accommodations Expense Policy ................................................................... 20-27
Practice 20-12: Setting Up a Corporate Card Program ..................................................................................20-30
Practice 20-13: Creating a Corporate Card Program ..........................................................................................20-32
Practice 20-14: Setting Up a Corporate Card Usage Policy Warning Demonstration .......................................20-34
Practice 20-15: Creating Receipt and Notification Rules ....................................................................................20-35
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Cloud Financials Implementation
Chapter 1 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Cloud Financials Implementation
Chapter 1
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Cloud Financials Implementation
Chapter 1 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 1
There are no practices for this lesson.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 2: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Getting Started in Oracle Fusion Applications.
Exploring Infolets and Infotiles.
Use the following usernames with the password assigned by OU Operations for all activities unless otherwise specified.
Students: FASXX.Student where XX = 01 to 30
Instructors: FASXX.Instructor where XX = 00, 99
If the Navigator does not allow scrolling or closes before you can get to the items that are at the bottom of the box, use the following work around:
Use Internet Explorer (IE).
Use F11 function to maximize the screen.
Use Control and Scroll Down to minimize screen.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 3
Practice 2-1: Getting Started in Oracle Fusion Applications
Overview
In this practice you are introduced to Oracle Fusion Applications and the basic navigation features.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Select Applications Login for all labs unless otherwise instructed.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 4
2. Sign in as Your User (as assigned by the instructor).
3. Click the Sign in button.
After you sign in, you start on the Welcome Springboard, which contains one or more icons that allow you to access application pages directly.
4. Click on the Receivables group icon to see the pages available.
5. The global area at the top of the page is always available no matter where you are in Oracle Fusion Applications.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 5
6. Use the menus, icons, and tabs at the top in the Global Area provide access to features relevant to any page in Oracle Fusion Applications.
7. Use the Accessibility icon to set accessibility preferences. You can also access preferences through the Personalization menu found under your username.
8. Use the Show Help icon to toggle on or off Oracle Fusion Applications Help. The Help icons appear within pages when toggled on and give you access to page or field-related help topics.
9. The Search icon in the global area lets you run a quick keyword search and, from the search results, navigate to the page that contains what you are looking for.
10. Click In the Search field. A window opens with Recent Items and Recent Searches.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 6
11. Click the Personalize gears in the upper right hand corner of the Search window to open a window where you can narrow your search by groups or categories.
12. Enter Navigate in the search field and click Enter.
13. Review the topics that appear. Open one of the topics.
14. Close the topic and the Search Results window.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 10
15. Select your username to open the Setting and Actions menu > Set Preferences. You can set other preferences such as time zone and language. Also, where available, you can personalize the content and layout of the current page.
16. Click the Applications Help link on the Settings and Actions menu. A new tab opens on the browser.
17. Enter Work Areas in the search box. Click Search.
18. Click on Help Type and deselect everything but Video.
19. Click Apply.
20. Click and watch the video Exploring Work Areas.
The video does not run within the Oracle University and some client firewalls. Note the name and search for it on Google on your laptop.
21. Close the page that opened to display help.
22. Click the Navigator icon > General Accounting: Journals. If required, select the US Primary Ledger Data Access Set. The Journals work area appears.
Note: A work area contains the complete set of tasks, reports, embedded analytics, searches, or other content that you need to accomplish the tasks associated with a business goal. Work areas consist of many regions.
The local area is where you do your work.
The Tasks icon in the upper right corner opens the Panel on the right where you can select actions, searches, or reports.
23. Check the Data Access Set under the title, Journals, at the top of the page.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 11
24. If it is not set to US Primary Ledger, click the Change link next to the Data Access Set
and select US Primary Ledger.
25. Click the Tasks panel tab to open the Tasks Panel.
26. Click the Manage Journals link.
27. In the Search region, enter Accounting Period: 01-15.
28. Click the Search button.
29. Click the first Journal link.
30. After the journal loads, click the first journal line.
31. Click the Refresh icon in the contextual pane on the far right side of the page.
Note: When you select a record, any contextual information for the record is displayed in the contextual area on the right hand side of the work area. The contextual area content is driven by what you do in the local area.
Note: The Balances pane (contextual area) is displayed and can show additional information specific to the selected journal line.
As needed, you can resize or collapse the regional or contextual area to dedicate more space to the local area.
32. Click the Collapse Pane button in the center of the page on the right.
33. Click the Home icon.
34. Click your username and then the Sign Out link to sign out to end your session of Oracle Fusion Applications.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 12
Practice 2-2: Exploring Infolets and Infotiles
Overview
In this practice, you will learn explore Infolets and infotiles to help monitor your close and daily activates.
Assumptions
Sign in as Casey.Brown and the assigned password.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Home page > Page Control dot for General Accounting Infolets.
2. Hover over the center of the Close Calendar infolet to view the accounting period Start and End Dates.
3. Click the More link in the Open Subledgers infolet to view the status of the general ledger and all associated subledgers.
4. Click Done to close.
5. Click the Back View arrow on the bottom right of the Journals infolet.
6. Click the Expanded View double arrow on the bottom right of the Journals infolet to view more journal details. Example of the Expanded View.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 13
7. Click on the AP Reconciliation or AR Reconciliation infolet.
A quick click shows a highly graphic visualization in the form of a waterfall chart that bridges the difference between the subledger and the GL balances. For example:
8. Click the View Report link on the bottom of the chart.
9. Click Done to close all open pages and return to the General Accounting infolet page.
10. Click on the Page Control dot to return to the Welcome Springboard.
11. Click the Payables icon to open the Payables springboard strip.
12. Click on the Invoices icon.
13. Click on the arrow at the bottom of the Holds infotile to see the detailed table information change.
14. Click the Home icon to return to the Welcome Springboard.
15. Select the name Casey.Brown and click Sign Out.
16. Log back in using your FASXX.Student User as assigned by your instructor.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 14
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Browsing Offerings.
Configuring Offerings Demonstration
Creating an Implementation Project.
Use the following usernames with the password assigned by OU Operations for all activities unless otherwise specified.
Students: FASXX.Student where XX = 01 to 30
Instructors: FASXX.Instructor where XX = 00, 99
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 3
Practice 3-1: Browsing Offerings
Overview
In this practice, you will understand the Oracle Fusion Offerings.
You are an Implementation manager for your Oracle Fusion Financials implementation. In preparation for implementation, you need to review the Financials offering.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Sign in as Your User (as assigned by the instructor).
2. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance.
3. Select the Financials offering and notice how the About section becomes About Financials.
4. Click on one of the following links for more details:
Offering Content Guide describes all processes related to this offering.
Associated Features shows a list of features and functionality of this offering that can optionally be implemented.
Setup Task Lists and Tasks show a complete list of all setup tasks, including prerequisites that should be performed to make this offering ready for transaction.
Related Business Objects shows a complete list of all setup data, including prerequisites that should be entered for this offering.
Related Enterprise Applications shows a list of all J2EE applications required to setup this offering.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 4
Practice 3-2: Configure Offerings Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, the instructor will be:
Reviewing the Configure Offerings page.
Expanding the offering to see the Financial options.
Viewing the Setup Tasks page.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Financials offering > Actions > Change Configure button to make changes to an offering.
You must have the Application Implementation Manager or Application Implementation Consultant role to have permission to configure offerings.
2. Select the Financials > Enable for Implementation checkbox option, if not selected, to specify which offerings and options are applicable to your implementation. Your selection affects how Functional Setup Manager generates setup tasks for your implementation. All tasks needed to set up your selection are included in the auto generated task list. Tasks that are not needed by the offerings and options you have selected are excluded.
3. Click the Description icon on Financials offering to view a description of the offering. The Financials implementation has been started, so you see a status of In Progress.
4. Click the In Progress option to review the options.
5. Click the Done button.
Expand the Offerings
6. Click the Expand > Financials link to see the modules
Note: An Oracle Fusion Applications implementation may include all, none, or any combination of modules.
7. Select Features icon on Expenses to see optional or alternative business processes, which might apply to your Oracle Fusion Applications implementation. Some of the features may have other dependent features. You select progressively for those dependent features.
8. Click Done.
9. You are now ready to generate setup tasks and start implementing the offerings of your choice.
View Setup Tasks
10. Click the Setup button.
11. Select Legal Structures functional area.
12. Click Shared to see the other offerings sharing the task.
13. Click Done.
14. Click the drop down arrow icon to see links to other options.
15. Change the Show list of values to All Tasks to see required and optional tasks.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 5
16. Optionally, you can set Scope in this page. In this example, the scope value is the legal entity that you create or select to work within for your legal entity setup.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 6
Practice 3-3: Creating an Implementation Project
Overview
In this practice, you create an implementation project. An implementation project defines the scope of the implementation. You can have the implementation project populated by adding one or more related offerings or task lists.
In this example, you will be adding the Financials offering and required product task lists.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Log in as Your User.
2. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Implementation Projects.
3. Click the Create icon on the toolbar in the Search Results region.
4. Change the default name to: XXImplementation Project, replacing XX with the number assigned to you by your instructor.
5. As you press the Tab key to move out of the Name field, the Code and Description fields are populated for you. Leave all default values.
6. Click the Next button. The Create Implementation Project: Select Offerings to Implement page appears.
7. Expand the Financials offering.
8. Select the Include check box for Financials, and all of the nested offerings.
9. Click Save and Open Project.
10. Expand the Financials task list and view the implementation tasks that were included in the
Financials offering.
11. Click the Select and Add icon.
12. Enter Name: %Rapid%.
13. Click Search.
14. Select Define Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation.
15. Click Apply.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 7
16. Click Done.
17. Click on the Define Hyperion Financial Management Configuration task list.
18. Click the Delete icon.
19. Click Done to close the Manage Implementation Projects page.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 8
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 4: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Defining Role Mapping.
Creating a User.
Creating an Employee.
Using the Security Console.
Note: If you are a Financials only customer, use the Manage Users page to enter users and employees. This enables approvals because you need to assign a Department, Manager, Position, and so on to the user depending on how you want to structure your approval rules.
If implementing Financials and HCM, then use the Hire New Person page as we are showing in this practice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 3
Practice 4-1: Defining Role Mapping
Overview
In this practice, you will define a role mapping before you create users to automatically assign, reassign, and remove roles from users based on the conditions you specify.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage HCM Role Provisioning Rules
2. In the Manage Role Mappings page, click the Create icon.
3. Specify a Mapping Name: XXAccounting Manager.
4. Specify the following conditions that apply to automatically assign roles to users as they get hired, change jobs, or change managers.
Legal Employer: US1 Legal Entity.
Business Unit: US1 Business Unit.
Job: Accounting Manager.
System Person Type: Employee.
User Person Type: Employee.
Assignment Status: Active – Payroll Eligible.
Note: See the following screenshot for an example.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 4
5. In Associated Roles click the Add Row icon.
6. Assign the Role Name: General Accountant US Primary Ledger.
For subledger users, the data role should have the business unit context. For GL users, the data role should have the data access set context.
7. If not already selected, select the Autoprovision check box.
8. Click Save and Close.
9. Click OK.
10. Click Done.
Note: Run the Autoprovision Roles for All Users process if you want the system to automatically provision this role to all users who do not already have the role assigned.
Navigate to: Tools > Schedule Processes > Schedule New Process > search for Auto% > select Autoprovision Roles for All Users > OK > OK > Submit > OK > Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 5
Practice 4-2: Creating a User
Overview
In this practice, you will create a user.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Users.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter the user details:
Last Name: Manager.
First Name: XXAccounting.
Email: XXaccounting.manager@vision.com.
User Name: XXAccounting.Manager where XX is the number assigned by your instructor.
Person Type: Employee.
Legal Employer: US1 Legal Entity.
Business Unit: US1 Business Unit.
Job: Accounting Manager.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 6
4. Click the Autoprovision Roles button.
You should see the Employee and the General Accountant US Primary Ledger roles as defined.
5. Click Save and Close.
6. Sign Out.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 7
Practice 4-3: Creating an Employee
Overview
In this practice you will create employees from HCM’s Hire an Employee page.
Note: The Person defining a new user in HCM should first have following roles assigned to him in Fusion.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: My Workforce > New Person.
2. Click on the Tasks panel tab and click the Hire an Employee link.
3. Enter the following required fields:
Accept default Hire Date.
Accept default Hire Action: Hire.
Legal Employer: US1 Legal Entity.
Last Name: Employee
First Name: XXUser (where XX is the number assigned by your instructor.)
4. Click Next.
Note: If you get a Matching records window, click Continue.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 8
5. Enter Address details: 100 Main Street, Genoa, TX 77034 Harris County. Hint: Type in the street address and then the postal code to have the system complete the rest of the address.
6. Under E-Mail Details, click Add Row.
7. Click Type: Work E-Mail
8. Enter E-Mail: XXUser.Employee@oracle.com.
9. Click Next.
10. Select Business Unit: US1 Business Unit.
11. Enter Department: Accounting US.
12. Enter Location: Chicago.
13. Scroll down and expand Expenses Information. (This is needed for Expense Reporting.)
14. Enter the Default Expense Account: 101.10.60501.121.000.000
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 9
15. Expense Check Send-to Address: Home
16. Click Next. The Employee role is automatically assigned.
17. Click Next. If you get an error message, click OK.
18. Click Submit.
19. Click Yes.
20. Click OK to proceed.
21. Navigate to: Directory > Directory.
Note: If you can’t see the entire Navigator. Use Control and Scroll Down to minimize screen.
22. Click on the Search icon and search for your employee name. Click on your name to see details.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 10
Practice 4-4: Using the Security Console
Overview
In this practice, you will copy a role.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: More…Tools > Security Console.
2. Search for the Accounts Payable Manager.
3. Select the drop down arrow.
4. Select Copy Role.
5. Select Copy top role > click Copy Role.
6. Add your XX to the end of the Role Name and the Role Code.
7. Click Next.
8. Click in the box at the end of the first row.
9. Select Remove Data Security Policy.
10. Click in the box at the end of the second row.
11. Select Edit Data Security Policy.
12. Review the data and click OK without making any changes.
13. Click Next.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 11
14. Review the hierarchy.
15. Click Next.
16. Click Add User: XXUser.Employee.
17. Search for your user.
18. Click Add User to Role.
19. Click OK and Cancel.
20. Click Next.
21. Review the summary report.
22. Click Submit and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 12
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 5: Discussing the Vision Story and Common Applications
Chapter 5 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 5: Discussing the Vision Story and Common Applications
Chapter 5
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 5: Discussing the Vision Story and Common Applications
Chapter 5 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 5
There are no practices for this lesson.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 6: Overview
Job Title*
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Reviewing Shared Components.
Entering Data in the Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet.
Uploading the Chart of Accounts File.
Verifying Deployment Was Successful Demonstration.
Uploading the Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File.
Reviewing an Existing Legal Jurisdiction.
Reviewing Legal Addresses for Legal Entities and Reporting Units.
Creating a Legal Authority.
Searching for Your Legal Entity.
Viewing a Legal Reporting Unit.
Instructor Setup: Disable the cross-validation rule.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Cross-Validation (Hint: Enter “Cross” in the search field.)
2. Select the US Chart of Accounts.
3. Search.
4. Uncheck the Enabled check box.
5. End date with yesterday’s date in the To Date.
6. Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 3
Practice 6-1: Reviewing Shared Components
Overview
In this practice, you review the chart of accounts, calendar, and currencies (called the 3 Cs) as well as journal source and category setup that are shared across the ledger and related subledgers by creating a journal entry.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: General Accounting > Journals.
2. Verify you are in the Data Access Set: US Primary Leger. The Data Access Set controls the ledger and data you have access to.
3. Click the Create Journals link.
4. Enter a Journal Batch name: XXAdjustment and a Description: Adjustment to the cash account.
5. What Accounting Period is defaulting? .This is the current open period in the ledger’s calendar.
6. What is the default journal Source?
7. Enter the same name and description in the Journal region.
8. Click the Currency list icon to see the enabled currencies.
9. Click the Category list icon to see the predefined categories.
10. Select the Category: Adjustment.
11. In the Journal Lines region, click the Select: Account icon at the end of the Account field on Line 1 in the Journal Lines region to show the segments and default values of an accounting flexfield. The Account is created by combining segment values from your chart of accounts setup.
12. Select 11200 Cash in the Account segment.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 4
13. Click OK. The account is displayed with a segment separator you can define between each segment value.
14. Enter 1000 in the Debit column. This amount is posted to the Cash account when the journal is posted.
15. Tab twice to complete the line.
16. Click the Select: Account icon on Line 2 and select 11101 USBNK Checking Account.
17. Click OK.
18. Enter 1000 in the Credit column. Tab twice to complete the line.
19. Click the Post button to save and post the journal entry.
20. Click OK in the confirmation approval message.
21. Click the Cancel button to exit the page.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 5
Practice 6-2: Entering Data in the Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Overview
In this practice, you will enter data to create your chart of accounts, ledger, legal entity, and calendar replacing XX with the number assigned by your instructor.
Rapid implementation is a way to configure the Oracle Fusion Financial Enterprise and Financial Reporting Structures quickly using sheets in a workbook to upload lists of companies (legal entities), ledgers, business units, chart of account values, and other similar data.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Create Chart of Accounts, Ledger, Legal Entities, and Business Units in Spreadsheet
2. Click Open. The Instructions tab opens first. It contains instructions on loading the data and uploading the spreadsheet.
3. Click the Options button in the Security Warning immediately under the ribbon menu bar and select the Enable this content option if the option appears.
4. Save the file to the Desktop and name
XXRapidImplementationForGeneralLedger(1).xlsm.
5. Click the COA, Calendar, and Ledger tab on the bottom of the spreadsheet.
6. Enter the following data or select from drop-down lists on available fields. Save often.
Field Value
*Name
XXLedger
*Currency
USD
Period Frequency
Monthly
*Adjusting Periods
Once at year end
*Fiscal Year Start Date
01/01/YYYY where YYYY is the current year
*Segment Segment Label *Short Prompt *Display Width
XXCompany
Primary Balancing Segment
CO
2
XXDepartment
Cost Center Segment
DEP
3
XXAccount
Natural Account Segment
ACCT
4
XXIntercompany
Intercompany Segment
IC
2
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 6
7. Save.
8. Click the Add Segment Sheets to add a worksheet for the cost center segment called XXDepartment.
9. Save.
10. Click the Business Units tab.
11. Enter Name: XXBusiness Unit.
12. Enter Default Legal Entity Name: XXVision Corporate HQ
13. Save.
14. Click the Companies and Legal Entities tab and enter:
Note: This table has the field names going across and the line data going down. For example, Line 1 is Parent 1:99, Company Description: Total Company.
Column Line 1 Line 2 Line 3
Parent 1
99
*Child Value
00
01
*Company Description
Total Company
Corporate
Domestic Operations
Legal Entity Name
XXVision Corporate HQ
XXVision America
Legal Entity Identifier
XX-1234568
XX-1234569
Address for first legal entity:
Country: United States Address Line:XX101 Main Street
City: Houston State: TX Country: Harris Province: NA Postal Code: XX003
Address for first second entity:
Country: United States Address Line: XX102 Main Street
City: Houston State: TX Country: Harris Province: NA Postal Code: XX003
*Legal Entity Registration Number
XX-1234568
XX-1234569
*Legal Reporting Unit Registration Number
XX-1234568
XX-1234569
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 7
15. Save.
16. Click the Natural Accounts tab and enter:
Column Value Description Account Type Financial Category
Parent 2
9999
Total Parent
Owner’s Equity
Parent 1
1000
Total Assets
Asset
*Child Value
1110
Cash
Asset-Cash
Cash
*Child Value
1210
Accounts Receivable
Asset- Accounts Receivable
Accounts receivable
*Child Value
1260
Allowance for Bad Debt
Asset
Accounts receivable
*Child Value
1350
Prepayment
Asset- Prepayments
Accounts payable
Parent 1
2000
Total Trade Payables
Liability
*Child Value
2210
Accounts Payable
Liability- Accounts Payable
Accounts payable
*Child Value
2220
Contracts Payable
Liability
Accounts payable
*Child Value
2230
Expense Accrual Distribution
Liability
Accounts payable
*Child Value
2640
Sales Tax
Liability
Accounts payable
Parent 1
3000
Total Owner’s Equity
Owner’s Equity
*Child Value
3310
Retained Earnings
Owner’s Equity
– Retained Earnings
Retained earnings
*Child Value
3500
Translation Adjustment
Owner’s Equity
Other equity related
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 8
Column Value Description Account Type Financial Category
Parent 1
4000
Total Revenue
Revenue
*Child Value
4110
Technology Sales
Revenue
Sales revenue
*Child Value
4120
Financing Contracts
Revenue
Sales revenue
Parent 1
5000
Total Expense
Expense
*Child Value
5105
Salaries
Expense
Sales payroll
*Child Value
5120
Suspense
Expense
Other operating expenses
*Child Value
5130
Realized Gain/Loss
Expense - Realized Gain/Loss on Foreign Currency Conversions
Other sales expenses
*Child Value
5610
Freight
Expense – Freight
Freight Expense
*Child Value
5620
Miscellaneous
Expense - Miscellaneous Expenses
Miscellaneous operating expenses
*Child Value
7790
Discount Taken
Expense - Discount Taken
Other sales expenses
*Child Value
7890
Conversion Rate Variance Gain/Loss
Expense - Conversion Rate Variance Gain/Loss
Other sales expenses
*Child Value
7990
Rounding Differences
Expense - Rounding Difference and Balancing Adjustments
Other sales expenses
17. Save.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 9
18. Click the Financial Sequences tab and enter:
Transactions Restart Initial Value
Payables Invoices
Annually
1
Payments
Receivables Invoices
Annually
1
Receivables Credit Memos
Annually
1
Receivables Adjustment Activities
Annually
1
Subledger Journals
Annually
100
General Ledger Journals
Annually
1
19. Save.
20. Click the XXDepartment tab and enter:
Column Name Value Child Value Description
Parent1
999
Total Departments
*Child Value
000
Balance Sheet
*Child Value
110
Administration
*Child Value
120
Sales
*Child Value
400
Corporate
21. Save.
22. Return to the COA, Calendar and Ledger tab.
23. Click Step 1: Validate.
24. Correct any errors and validate again until all errors are fixed.
25. Click the Step 2: Generate Chart of Accounts File button.
26. Save to the Desktop and name the file:XXChartOfAccounts.zip.
27. Click the Step 3: Generate Ledger, LE, and BU File button.
28. Save to the Desktop and name the file: XXFinancialsCommonEntities.zip.
29. Close the spreadsheet.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 10
Practice 6-3: Uploading the Chart of Accounts File
Overview
In this practice, you upload the Chart of Accounts file created from the rapid implementation spreadsheet.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
You are uploading the Chart of Accounts file created from your spreadsheet data in the previous activity. The application will use this upload to create the chart of accounts structure, instance, value sets, and values.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Upload Chart of Accounts.
2. Use the Data File: Browse button to find your XXChartOfAccounts.zip file.
3. Click Submit.
4. Click OK
5. Click Done
6. Navigator > Tools > Scheduled Processes.
7. Verify that the process was completed without errors or warnings. Status should be
Succeeded.
8. If your spreadsheet completes with an error, click the Name of the process.
9. Click the name of the Attachment in the Log and Output region at the bottom of the window that opens on under the list of processes.
Common errors are:
Parent and child data not entered correctly.
Extra spaces after some of the values.
Incomplete data.
10. Double check the data and fix any errors in the spreadsheet.
11. Re-create the files and upload again.
12. Click No to the information window question.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 11
Practice 6-4: Verifying Deployment Was Successful Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, the instructor verifies that all charts of accounts key flexfield were deployed successfully. Wait for all the students to finish their chart of accounts.
Note: Deployment runs automatically as of Release 11.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
The deployment process runs automatically and deploys all charts of accounts key flexfields in the instance. If there are errors, fix the errors including completing incomplete chart of accounts. Continue running the process until it completes successful.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Chart of Accounts Structure Instances
> Click Search > Deploy Flexfield.
2. Click the Search button without entering in the search fields.
3. Use the scrollbar to move to the right to look for the column called Deployment Status.
4. Verify that a green check mark appears under the Deployment Status column.
5. If there are errors, fix the errors including completing incomplete chart of accounts. Continue running the process until it completes successful.
Click the Deploy Flexfield button.
Monitor Deployment Status.
When 100% is reached, click the OK button.
6. Click the Done button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 12
Practice 6-5: Uploading the Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to upload the Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit file created from the rapid implementation spreadsheet.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Upload Ledger, Legal Entities, and Business Units.
2. Use the Browse button to find your XXFinancialsCommonEntities.zip file.
3. Click Submit.
4. Click Ok in the confirmation message.
5. Click Done to close.
6. Navigator > Tools > Scheduled Processes.
7. Verify that the process completed without errors. Use the refresh button if needed until the process completes.
Note: If your spreadsheet completes with an error:
8. Click the Name of the process.
9. Click the name of the Attachment in the Log and Output region at the bottom of the window that opens on under the list of processes.
Common errors are:
Parent and child data not entered correctly.
Extra spaces after some of the values.
Incomplete data.
10. Double check the data and fix any errors in the spreadsheet.
11. Re-create the files and upload again.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 13
Practice 6-6: Reviewing an Existing Legal Jurisdictions
Overview
In this practice, you will review legal jurisdictions. Legal jurisdictions and related legal authorities are defined to support multiple legal entity registrations.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Legal Jurisdictions.
2. Select Income Tax in the Legislative Category list.
3. Click the Search button.
4. Sort ascending the Name column.
5. Select the link for one of the legal jurisdiction to view the details.
6. View the following fields:
Name.
Territory.
Legislative Category. Hover over the label Legislative Category to see the embedded help: This represents the type of law associated with a given registration.
Identifying: Yes indicates the first jurisdiction a legal entity must register with to do business in a country.
Start Date is optional. You can also add an End Date to indicate a date that the jurisdiction may no longer be used.
Legal Entity Registration Code.
Legal Reporting Unit Registration Code.
Legal Functions. Optionally, you may enter one of more.
7. Select Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 14
Practice 6-7: Reviewing Legal Addresses for Legal Entities and Reporting Units
Overview
In this practice, you will review an existing legal address for legal entities and reporting units.
A legal address is the address a legal entity or reporting unit uses to register with a legal authority. A legal entity and reporting unit may use different addresses for different authorities and hence, may have more than one registered address. This legal address must be located within the territory entered.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Legal Addresses.
2. Search Country: United States.
3. Select a row header for an address entry.
4. Select Edit.
5. View the Location Update fields.
6. Click Cancel to close the Location Update window.
7. Do not save any updates.
8. Click Cancel to close the Manage Legal Addresses window.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 15
Practice 6-8: Creating a Legal Authority
Overview
In this practice, you will create a legal authority.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Legal Authorities.
2. Click Create.
3. Enter Name: XXLegal Authority, replacing XX with the number assigned to you by your instructor.
4. Enter Tax Authority Type: Collecting and reporting.
5. In the Address region, select Create.
6. The Site Number is automatically assigned.
7. Enter Address Line 1, 121 Spear Street, Suite 400.
8. Enter Postal Code: 94105. The remainder of the address fields populate for you.
Optionally, Enter Address Purposes Details
9. Select Add Row.
10. Select Purpose: Business.
11. The Purpose from Date will default to today's date.
12. Select OK to close the Create Address window.
13. In the Legislative Categories region, select Create.
14. Enter Legislative Category: Local Tax.
15. Select Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 16
Practice 6-9: Searching for Your Legal Entity
Overview
In this practice, you will review and edit your legal entity and legal entity registration that were created when you uploaded your spreadsheet.
You define a legal entity for each registered company or other entity recognized in law for which you want to perform intercompany trading, record assets, liabilities, and income, or pay transaction taxes.
A legal entity registration is the record of a party's identity related details with the appropriate government or legal authorities for the purpose of claiming and ensuring legal and or commercial rights and responsibilities.
A legal entity registration with the same name as that of the legal entity will be created by default.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Working within an implementation project is required because you must select a scope value from within the implementation project. In this example, the scope value is the legal entity that you create or select to work within for your legal entity setup.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Legal Entities for Financials.
2. In order to review your legal entity, click the hyperlink in the Selected Scope column for the Manage Legal Entity task.
3. The Select Scope window appears.
4. Select Search Legal Entities radio button.
5. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
6. Search Name: XX.
7. You are now on the Manage Legal Entities page.
8. Select your legal entity, XXVision America, and click the Edit icon.
9. If your legal entity needs to be registered to report payroll tax and social insurance, select the Payroll statutory unit check box.
10. If your legal entity has employees, select the Legal employer check box.
11. If the legal entity is a legal employer, but not a payroll statutory unit, check the flags accordingly. You will need to select the payroll statutory unit for the attribute that becomes mandatory.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 17
12. Click Save and Close.
13. To set the scope to the new legal entity, click the hyperlink in the Selected Scope column for the Manage Legal Entity Registrations.
14. The Select Scope window appears. With the Manage Legal Entity Registrations option selected, select Select and Add from the Legal Entity drop down list.
15. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
16. Search and select your XXVision America.
17. Click the Save and Close button on the very bottom of the window.
18. Manage Registrations page opens. If it does not open, perform the following steps:
19. Click Done.
Select Manage Legal Entity Registrations. The name of your XXVision America
should appear in the page next to the page title.
If not, go back and set Scope again.
20. Select the row header for Registered Name: XXVision America.
21. Select Edit to view the Legal Entity Registration details. View the fields.
22. Click Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 18
Practice 6-10: Viewing a Legal Reporting Unit
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to create a reporting unit.
When a legal entity is created, a legal reporting unit with the same name as that of the entity is also automatically created.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Legal Reporting Unit
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Legal Reporting Units for Financials.
2. Expand Define Legal Reporting Units for Financials.
3. To set the scope for the legal entity, click the hyperlink in the Selected Scope column for the Manage Legal Reporting Unit.
4. The Select Scope window appears.
5. Select the Manage Legal Reporting Unit option.
6. Select Legal Entity: XXVision America.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 19
7. Select Legal Reporting Unit drop down box: Select and Add.
8. Click Apply
9. Select the row header for XXVision America.
10. Click the Save and Close button in the very bottom of the window.
The name of your XXLegal Entity should appear in the page next to the page title. If not, go back and set scope again.
11. View the details.
12. Click Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 20
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 7: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Searching for Your Value Sets.
Searching for Your Chart of Accounts Structure and Instance.
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration.
Creating an Account Shorthand Alias
Entering Values.
Searching and Completing Your Accounting Hierarchy.
Publishing Accounting Hierarchy
Creating an Account Combination.
Defining Cross-Validation Rules.
Verifying Your Calendar.
Reviewing and Creating Currencies.
Creating Conversion Rate Types.
Entering Daily Rates.
Entering a Currency Conversion Journal
Searching for Your Ledger.
Verifying Your Ledger Options.
Verifying Your Legal Entities and Balancing Segments Assignments.
Defining Reporting Currencies.
Completing the Ledger Configuration.
Creating a Ledger Set.
Reviewing Data Access Set Security.
Creating Data Access Set Security.
Opening the First Accounting Period.
Creating and Generating an Allocation Rule.
Creating a Revaluation.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 3
Practice 7-1: Searching for Your Value Sets
Overview
In this practice, you will view your three values sets for your chart of accounts: XXCompany, XXDepartment, and XXAccount replacing XX with your initials.
Value sets are created as the first step in the chart of accounts configuration. The value sets are then assigned to the chart of accounts instance. Do not create values until after assigning your values sets in chart of accounts segments because this step is needed to establish which value set attributes should be exposed for setting when defining a value.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Chart of Accounts Value Sets.
2. Search for your value sets. Enter Value Set Code: XX.
3. Click Search.
4. Click the Edit button to look at each value set.
5. Select the Uppercase only check box for each value set.
6. Click Save and Close button twice.
7. Click the Done button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 4
Practice 7-2: Searching for Your Chart of Accounts Structure and Instance
Overview
In this practice, you will search for your chart of accounts structure and structure instance called XXLedger, created from your spreadsheet. The Chart of accounts structure defines the framework for one or more chart of accounts instances.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance >Manage Chart of Accounts Structures.
2. Click the Search button.
3. Select Key Flexfield Name: Accounting Flexfield.
4. Click the Manage Structures button. The Manage Key Flexfield Structures page opens.
5. Enter Structure Code: XX.
6. Click the Search button to find your structure.
7. Click the Edit icon.
8. Pick a segment and click Edit icon to see the assigned Segment Label.
9. Click the Cancel button twice.
10. Click Done once. Remain on the page.
Search for your chart of accounts instance called XXLedger.
11. Click the Manage Structure Instances button.
12. Enter Structure Instance Code: XX.
13. Click the Search button to find your structure instance code.
14. Click Edit icon.
15. Add the word Instance to the name of the instance so reads: XXLedger Instance.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 5
16. Check the Shorthand alias enabled check box.
17. Pick a Segment Code and click Edit button to see the assigned structure instance options.
18. Click the Cancel button.
19. Click the Save and Close button.
20. Click the Done button twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 6
Practice 7-3: Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, your instructor deploys all charts of accounts key flexfield if updates have been made to the class charts of accounts instance in the previous lab. Wait for all students to finish updating their chart of accounts instance. Then run the process.
Caution: Only one person has to do this, but if you are not in a classroom setting, run the process to be able to use your updated chart of accounts.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Chart of Accounts Structures.
2. Click the Search button.
3. Use the scroll bar to move to the right.
4. Look for the column called Deployment Status.
5. Click the icon under the heading. Field indicates Edited or Patched which means there has been activity on the Accounting Flexfield.
6. Click the Deploy Flexfield button.
7. Monitor deployment status.
8. When 100% is reached, click the OK button.
9. Verify that a green check mark appears under the Deployment Status column.
10. Click the Done button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 7
Practice 7-4: Creating an Account Shorthand Alias
Overview
In this practice, you will create an account shorthand alias to speed data entry.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
1. Tasks
2. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Shorthand Aliases.
3. Select the Chart of Accounts: XX Ledger Instance.
4. Click Search.
5. Click the Add Row icon.
6. Name: Cash.
7. Company: 01
8. Department: 110
9. Account: 1110
10. Intercompany: 00
11. Description: Alias for Cash Account.
12. Enabled: Yes
13. Start Date: Today's Date
14. Click Save.
15. Click the Export to Excel icon to view your shorthand aliases in Excel.
16. Close the Excel sheet.
17. Click Cancel.
The Open Period practice tests your alias.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 8
Practice 7-5: Entering Values
Overview
In this practice, you will enter the valid values into your value sets.
After the value sets have been added to the newly created chart of accounts structure and structure instance, the values can be entered for each value set attached to a segment in the chart of accounts. You are not creating combinations, only the lists of individual values that will appear in the list of values of each segment.
Caution: Do not add values to value sets before attaching the value set to the newly created chart of accounts structure and structure instance as your values will be invalid.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Chart of Accounts Value Sets.
2. Search for your XXAccount XXLedger value set.
3. Click the Manage Values button.
4. Click the Search button to see your values you uploaded with the spreadsheet.
5. Click the Create icon to enter your values.
Note: Enter the values carefully because if the cash account is misclassified as Expense instead of Asset and closed to retained earnings at the end of an accounting year, the balance is reduced to zero instead of being carried forward into the next year.
6. Accept the Third Party Control Account default value of No on all values.
Note: The Reconciliation Flag is not used as it is out of scope of V1; therefore, the values are set to No by default.
7. Save and Close between each value entered and click the Create icon again.
Value Description Account Type Financial Category
9110
Headcount (STAT)
Asset
9910
Default Intercompany
Liability
8. Click Save and Close.
9. Click Done.
10. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 9
Practice 7-6: Searching and Completing Your Accounting Hierarchy
Overview
In this practice, you will verify the account hierarchy that your company will use with your cross-validation rules and revaluations.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Search for Your Tree
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Account Hierarchies. Search, create, and edit your account hierarchies.
2. Select your hierarchy that was created from the spreadsheet: XXCompany XXLedger.
3. Click the Edit icon to review the definition of your tree.
4. Click OK in the Update Tree warning message.
Use the Manage Account Hierarchies: Specify Definition page to define the basic details of the tree.
5. In the Data Source Parameters: Click the Expand button to expand the Accounting Flexfield Hierarchy Detail Values and Accounting Flexfield Hierarchy Parent Values rows.
6. Review the information in the Bind_ValueSetCode field on both levels: XXCompany XX Ledger.
This is the Value Set name and there is no list of values. When entering, you have to type the name in exactly as it is set up in database, or you do not see any values.
7. Click the Next button to navigate through the next two pages.
8. Click the Cancel button to return to the Manage Account Hierarchies page. Remain on the page.
Search for Your Tree Version
9. Select and expand your tree.
10. Select your tree version XXCompany XXLedger Current by clicking the row header at the beginning of the name.
The file upload from the spreadsheet created two versions, one called current and the other called base to enforce generation of the fully qualified name and minimization of changes in the future.
11. Click the Edit icon to review your account hierarchy.
12. Click OK in the Update Tree warning message.
13. Click the Next button.
14. Answer Yes if you get a warning message.
15. Expand the parent node 99 to see the children.
16. Click the Cancel button.
Complete the Account Hierarchy
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 10
17. Highlight your tree version that now says Draft.
18. Click the Actions menu > Audit.
19. Use the Audit Results region to start the Audit process. After the audit is performed, the status of the tree version can be set to active.
20. Click the Online Audit button to start the Audit process.
21. Click the OK button to acknowledge the message when the process finishes.
22. Click the Done button.
23. Highlight your tree version again.
24. Click the Actions menu > Flatten menu > Column Flattening. Column flattening optimizes parent-child information for run-time performance by storing an additional column in a table for all parents of a child.
25. Click the Online Flattening button.
26. Select to OK button to acknowledge the message when the process finishes.
27. Click the Done button.
28. Highlight your tree version again.
29. Click the Actions menu > Flatten menu > Row Flattening. Row flattening optimizes parent-child information for run-time performance by storing additional rows in a table.
30. Click the Online Flattening button.
31. Click the OK button to acknowledge the message when the process finishes.
32. Click the Done button.
33. Highlight your tree version.
34. Use the Actions menu > Set Status menu > Active to activate the tree.
35. Click the OK button to acknowledge the message.
36. Verify that your tree version is now set to Active.
37. Click the Done button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 11
Practice 7-7: Publishing Accounting Hierarchy
Overview
In this practice, you will verify your account hierarchy that was created by your spreadsheet for your company to use with your cross-validation rules and revaluations.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Publish Account Hierarchies >.
2. Use the Publish Account Hierarchies page to search and publish account hierarchies.
3. Click the Chart of Accounts field.
4. Select XXLedger Instance from the list.
5. Click the Search button.
6. Expand the XXCompany XXLedger row.
7. Click on the XXAccount XXLedger Current and Base tree versions rows.
8. Scroll across and verify that the Publish check box is selected for each tree versions.
9. If not, click the Publish button.
Note: It may take a minute or two to see the change.
10. Click the Save and Close button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 12
Practice 7-8: Creating an Account Combination
Overview
In this practice, you will create an account using a spreadsheet for your sales cost center and salaries account in your chart of accounts.
Account combinations contain a completed set of segment values that uniquely identifies an account in the chart of accounts.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Account Combinations.
2. Select your chart of accounts from the Chart of Accounts list.
3. Click Search.
4. Select the Create in Spreadsheet button.
5. Select Open.
6. Answer Yes to the question: Do you want to connect?
7. Sign in with your FASXX.student and password.
If you get a message saying the versions are not the same, select OK and proceed. This message has no effect on the success of the spreadsheet upload.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 13
8. Enter 01-120-5105-00 in the appropriate cells.
9. Click the Submit button.
10. Accept the default and click OK.
11. If successful, the Row Status shows Row inserted successfully.
12. Return to the Manage Account Combinations page and Search.
13. Your new account should appear in the list.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 14
Practice 7-9: Defining Cross-Validation Rules
Overview
In this practice, you will enter a new cross-validation rule using a spreadsheet to prevent your XXLedger for using cost center 120 with any account except revenue account 4110 in an account combination.
Cross-validation rules prevent specific combinations of segment values in your account combinations. For example, preventing a particular cost center from being combined with a specific company value. Cross-validation rules only affect the creation of new account combinations.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Create Cross Validation Rules in Spreadsheet.
(Hint: type “Cross” in the search field)
2. Select Open.
3. Answer Yes to the question: Do you want to connect?
4. Sign in with your FASXX.student and password.
If you get a message saying the versions are not the same, select OK and proceed. This message has no effect on the success of the spreadsheet upload.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 15
5. Select XXLedger Instance chart of accounts
6. Enter Name: XXCVR and an optional Description: Revenue Rule.
7. Enter Error Message: XXAccount: For Department 120, only use account 4110. .
When the rule is evaluated, an account combination must contain 4110 for department 120 or the account combination is not created.
8. Enter Condition Filter Segment: XXDepartment.
9. Enter Condition Filter Values: 120. The cross-validation rule evaluates if Department 120 was entered and if it is the defined value, then, the validation process continues to evaluate the rule.
Note: If you do not specify any statement in the condition filter, then the rule is always evaluated.
10. Enter the Validation Filter Segment: XXAccount.
11. Enter Validation Filter Values: 4110.
12. Tab out of the entry rows.
13. Click the Submit button.
14. Accept the default setting and click OK.
15. If successful, the Row Status shows Row inserted successfully.
16. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Cross-Validation Rules.
17. Select your Chart of Account: XXLedger Instance.
18. Review your rule and its filters by clicking on the View Filter icon.
19. Click Save and Close.
Test Cross-Validation Rule:
20. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Account Combinations.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 16
21. Select your XXLedger Instance.
22. Click the Add Row icon. 23. Enter 00-120-2220-00.
24. Save. Your error message appears.
25. Click OK to dismiss the message.
26. Click Cancel to exit the Manage Account Combinations page.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 17
Practice 7-10: Verifying Your Calendar
Overview
In this practice, you will verify that your accounting calendar starting January 1, 2013 and ending December 31st each with one adjusting period at the end of the year.
Your company, Vision Corporation implementing Oracle Fusion Financials and has created an accounting calendar using the rapid implementation spreadsheet process to add to the primary ledger to record journal entries and to control reporting.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Accounting Calendars.
Use the Manage Accounting Calendars page to create and edit calendars.
2. Select your XXLedger calendar.
3. Click Edit to review what has been created by spreadsheet.
4. Click the Cancel button.
5. Click the Done button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 18
Practice 7-11: Reviewing and Creating Currencies
Overview
In this practice, you will verify that USD, GBP, and CAD are enabled.
Your company, Vision Corporation, has a ledger currency of United States dollars (USD), and is doing business with suppliers in:
Canada in Canadian dollars (CAD).
Ultraland, a new country which uses Ultraland dollars (ULD).
You also have intercompany transactions with your Vision UK Banking, Ltd entity, which uses Great Britain pounds sterling (GBP).
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Reviewing Currencies
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Currencies.
2. Enter USD currency in the Currency Code.
3. Click Search button.
4. Click Expand icon to see details.
5. Repeat for CAD and GBP.
Creating Currencies
6. Click the New icon or use Action > New.
7. Enter Currency Code: XXULD.
8. Enter Currency Name: XXUltraland Dollars.
9. Enter Description: Currency for Ultraland.
10. Click the Enabled check box to start using the currency, if not checked.
11. Enter the first day of the current month in the Start Date.
12. Click the Save button.
13. Click the Expand icon and accepted defaults.
14. Click Save and Close button.
15. After all the students have completed creating their currencies; the instructor does the following steps:
Navigator to: Tools > Scheduled Processes.
Search for and run: Create Currency Dimension Members.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 19
Practice 7-12: Creating Conversion Rate Types
Overview
In this practice, you will create a new conversion rate type for your payables transactions called XXSPCORP.
Your company, Vision Corporation, has a ledger currency of United States dollars (USD), and needs different conversion rate types for your payables and receivables transactions with Ultraland, which uses Ultraland dollars (ULD).
For receivables, use your corporate conversion rate types.
For payables, use a special corporate conversion rate type.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Conversion Rate Types.
2. Click the Add row icon.
3. Enter XXSPCORP in the Name field.
4. Enable Enforce Inverse Relationship and Enable Cross Rates.
5. Enter your currency XXULD as the Cross Rate Pivot Currency.
6. Add USD and CAD as the contra currencies by clicking the Add Row button in the Contra Currencies region.
7. Click Save and Close.
8. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 20
Practice 7-13: Entering Daily Rates
Overview
In this practice, you will enter and view your daily rates.
Your company, Vision Corporation, has a ledger currency of United States dollars (USD), and is doing business with Ultraland, which uses Ultraland dollars (ULD).
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
To use the Daily Rates spreadsheet, ADF Desktop Integrator (DI) must be installed first.
Note: In the classroom, ADFdi is already installed so skip to step.5.
1. In the application, navigate to: Tools > Download ADF Desktop Integrator.
2. Click on the file that opens.
3. Click setup.exe.
4. Follow the prompts.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 21
Tasks
5. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Daily Rates or General Accounting: Period Close > Manage Currency Rates:
6. Click the Daily Rates tab.
7. Open a spreadsheet template using the Create in Spreadsheet button.
8. Answer OK in the box that opens. Answer Yes to the second box.
9. Sign in with your instance User Name and Password.
10. Enter the following daily rates data:
*From Currency: USD.
*To Currency: XXULD.
*Conversion Rate: XXSPCORP.
*From Conversion: 1st day of the current month.
*To Conversion Date: Last Day of the current month.
*Conversion Rate: 56.
11. Submit icon to submit the spreadsheet.
12. Click the OK button in the Submission box and the options box that follows.
13. Verify that the Record Status shows that the rows inserted successfully.
14. Click OK to the submission confirmation message.
15. Close the spreadsheet and return to the Oracle Fusion environment.
16. When asked if you want to save the spreadsheet click No.
View Your Rates
17. Click the Daily Rates tab.
18. Enter From Currency: USD.
19. Enter To Currency: XXULD.
20. Enter Rate Date: Current accounting period beginning and ending dates.
21. Click Search.
22. Review your rates.
23. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 22
Practice 7-14: Entering a Currency Conversion Journal
Note: The instructor or one student must turn off Journal Approval before the practice is performed.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Search for Journal Sources.
2. Select Go to Task icon on the Manage Journal Sources.
3. Uncheck the Require Journal Approval check box.
Overview
In this practice, you create and post a foreign currency journal.
Your company, Vision Corporation has a ledger currency of United States dollars (USD), and is doing business with a new country has been created in Eastern Europe, Ultraland, which uses Ultraland dollars (ULD) as it national currency. You need to create a journal entry for a payables transaction that was booked to the wrong account.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
4. Navigate to: General Accounting: Journals
5. Select the US Primary Ledger data access set.
6. Click on Create Journal.
7. Create a journal batch named XX_AP Correction for the latest open period.
8. Name the journal entry XX_AP Correction and enter Accrual for the Category. Choose the XXULD currency defined in a previous activity.
9. Enter today’s date as the Conversion Date and the Conversion Rate Type: XXSPCORP.
10. Enter the following journal lines:
Account Debit Credit Description
101.10.22100.000.000.000
10,567.00
Correction of department for payables transaction.
101.10.59410.110.000.000
10,567.00
Correction of department for payables transaction.
11. Post the journal batch.
The XXULD amount is converted to the ledger currency USD amount automatically in the Accounted fields.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 23
Practice 7-15: Searching for Your Ledger
Overview
In this practice, you will search for your primary ledger.
The primary ledger is the main record keeping ledger and consists of the chart of accounts, calendar, currency, and accounting method.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Primary Ledgers.
2. Note the name of your primary ledger, chart of accounts, calendar, and currency.
3. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 24
Practice 7-16: Verifying Your Ledger Options
Overview
In this practice, you will enter the settings list below for your ledger's options. Setting ledger options is one of the most important tasks in configuring your ledgers.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Accounting Configurations.
2. Click Select in the Specify Ledger Options: Selected Scope column.
3. Select the Specify Ledger Options option.
4. In the Specify Ledger Options field, select Select and Add.
5. Click the Apply and Go to Task button.
6. Select your XXLedger US from the list.
7. Scroll to the bottom and click the Save and Close button.
8. Setting Accounting Calendar Region Options
9. Review the Accounting Calendar that defaults from your ledger.
10. Note that Jan-XX is the First Open Period for your ledger.
11. Enter 3 for the Number of Future Enterable Periods.
12. Selecting the Subledger Accounting Region Options
13. Accept the default Accounting Method from your ledger.
14. Select US American English as your Journal Language.
15. Completing the Period Close Region Options
16. Verify your Retained Earnings Account: 00-000-3310-00.
Note: If the field is not populated, enter the account.
17. Enter Cumulative Translation Adjustment Account: 00-000-3500-00.
Specifying the Journal Processing Region Options Specify the Balance options:
18. Click to enable Suspense: General Ledger.
19. Click to enable Suspense: Subledger Accounting.
20. Enter Default Suspense Account: 00-400-5120-00.
21. Enter Rounding Account: 00-400-7990-00.
22. Enter Entered Currency Balancing Account: 00-400-7990-00.
23. Enter Balancing Threshold Percent: 0.
Enable all of the following Entry options:
24. Notify when prior period journal is entered.
25. Allow mixed statistical and monetary journals.
26. Validate reference date.
27. Separate journals by accounting date during journal import.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 25
For Intercompany options:
28. Select Enable intercompany accounting.
29. Click OK to close the confirmation window.
For Reversal options:
30. Leave the Journal Reversal Criteria Set blank. You can select any predefined criteria set from the list of values in the Journal Reversal Criteria Set at any time.
31. Deselect the Run AutoReverse after open period check box. You can return to this page and enable this option later.
32. Leave the Synchronize Reversals between Primary and Secondary Ledger deselected: Enable this option to automatically reverse the corresponding journal in the secondary ledger when a journal in the primary ledger is manually reversed.
For Sequencing options:
33. Leave the default of Sequencing By of No sequencing to not use sequencing.
34. Leave Enforce Document Sequencing set to None.
35. Select No for Enforce chronological order on document date if you don’t require chronological sequences.36.
36. Click Save and Close to go back to your implementation project.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 26
Practice 7-17: Verifying Your Legal Entities and Balancing Segments Assignments
Overview
In this practice, you will review your ledger configuration to verify which legal entities and balancing segments have been assigned when your spreadsheet was uploaded.
Assign your legal entities to your ledgers to limit your ledger transactions to just those legal entities.
Assign your balancing segment values to your legal entities. After assignment, all balancing segment values are available for journal and transaction processing.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Accounting Configurations.
Note: Scope should be set to your XXLedger US during the Verify Your Ledger options activity. If not, then set scope:
2. Click Assign Legal Entities.
3. In the Primary Ledger field, select Select and Add.
4. Click the Apply and Go to Task button.
5. Select your XXVision America from the list.
6. Scroll to the bottom and click Save and Close button.
Verify Your Legal Entity and Balancing Segment Assignments
7. Click Assign Legal Entities.
8. Verify your legal entities XXVision Corporate HQ and XXVision America are assigned.
9. Click the Cancel button.
10. Click Assign Balancing Segment Values to Legal Entities.
11. Verify your balancing segments are assigned automatically: 00: XXVision Corporate HQ
01: XXVision America
12. Click the Cancel button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 27
Practice 7-18: Defining Reporting Currencies
Overview
In this practice, you will set up reporting currencies tied to your XXPrimary Ledger.
A reporting currency is linked to a primary or secondary ledger, and is maintained at one of three data conversion levels.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Set up reporting currencies tied to your XXPrimary Ledger.
2. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Ledgers > Manage Reporting Currencies.
3. Click the Create icon.
4. Name: Enter XXReporting Currencies.
5. Currency Conversion Level: Select Journal.
6. Currency: Enter GBP.
7. In the Ledger Options region.
8. First Open Period: Enter Jan-XX where XX equals the current year.
9. Rounding Account: Accept default of 00-110-7990-00.
10. Revaluation Basis: Accept the default of Entered currency.
11. Enable journal approval: Do not select.
In the Currency Translation Options region
12. Default Conversion Rate Type: Corporate.
13. Retain Transaction Rate Type: Yes
14. In the Error Handling region:
15. Missing Conversion Rate: Click Use last rate.
16. Number of Days to Find Last Rate: 30.
In the Journal Conversion Rules region view the default settings:
17. Retain Journal Creator from Source Ledger: Yes.
18. Journal Source: Other.
19. Journal Category: Other.
20. Convert Journals to this Reporting Currency: Yes.
Data Conversion
21. First Future Period to Convert Journals: Select the first period in the list of values.
22. Historical Conversion: Retain Original Conversion Rate Type: Select Yes to use the rate type entered on the original transaction to convert the transaction to the reporting currency.
Sequencing
23. Sequencing By: No sequencing.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 28
24. Enforce Document Sequencing: None.
25. Click Save and Close twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 29
Practice 7-19: Completing the Ledger Configuration
Overview
In this practice, you will complete your ledger configuration by running the Review and Submit Accounting Configuration.
Submit the Review and Submit Accounting Configuration to complete your ledger configuration. A new standard balances cube is created when an accounting configuration is submitted for a primary or secondary ledger that uses to a new unique combination of chart of accounts and calendar.
Note: This process runs by primary ledger and processes related secondary ledgers, reporting currencies, and legal entities.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Review and Submit Accounting Configuration.
2. Select your ledger XXLedger US.
3. Click the Submit button.
4. Click OK to close the Confirmation window.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 30
Practice 7-20: Creating a Ledger Set
Overview
In this practice, you will create a ledger set using your XXPrimary Ledger and XXReporting Currencies.
Ledger Sets enable you to group multiple ledgers that share the same chart of accounts and calendar combination.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Ledger Sets.
2. Click the Create icon. Name and Description: XXSet.
3. Select your Chart of Accounts: XXLedger Instance.
4. Select your Accounting Calendar: XXLedger.
5. Default Ledger: XXLedger US.
6. Click the Add Row icon.
7. Select Ledger or Ledger Set: XXLedger US.
8. Click Save.
9. Click OK to accept the Confirmation window.
10. Click the Add Row icon.
11. Select Ledger or Ledger Set: XXReporting Currencies.
12. Click Save button.
13. Click OK to accept the Confirmation window.
14. Save and Close.
15. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 31
Practice 7-21: Reviewing Data Access Set Security
Overview
In this practice, you will review your Data Access Set created for your ledger set.
Data Access Sets are created to control access to specific ledgers, ledgers sets, or primary balancing segments.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Ledgers > Manage Data Access Sets.
2. Select the Name of your data access set XXSet.
3. Click the Edit icon.
4. Verify that your Privilege is set to Read and Write.
5. Click the Cancel button.
6. Click the Done button.
Note: The Access Set Type on your data access set is to Full Ledger which is the default created by the application when the spreadsheet upload is processed.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 32
Practice 7-22: Creating Data Access Set Security
Overview
In this practice, you will create and attach a Data Access Set for your ledger.
Data Access Sets are created to control access to specific ledgers, ledgers sets, or primary balancing segments.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Ledgers > Manage Data Access Sets.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter unique Name and Description: XXData Access Set.
4. Select the Access Set Type: Primary Balancing Segment Value.
5. Select your Chart of Accounts: XXLedger Instance.
6. Select the Accounting Calendar: XXLedger.
7. Select the Default Ledger: XXLedger US.
8. Click the Add Row icon in the Access Set Assignments.
9. Enter a Ledger or Ledger Set: XXSet.
10. Deselect All Values.
11. Select Specific Value: Single Value.
12. Enter Segment Value of 01.
13. Select Privilege: Read and Write.
14. Save and Close.
15. Click OK to accept Confirmation message.
16. Click the Done button.
Attach a Data Access Set to your role.
17. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Provision Roles to Implementation Users.
18. Click the Administration link located in the upper-right corner.
19. Enter your username: FASXX.Student in the Search box.
20. Click the Search Arrow icon.
21. Select the username.
22. Click the Roles tab.
23. Click the Assign Roles icon.
24. Search for the role by entering General%XX% in the Display Name field.
25. Select both the General Accountant and the General Accounting Manager, both with
XXData Access Set.
26. Click Add.
27. Exit Oracle Identify Manager.
28. Sign Out of the Oracle applications.
29. Sign In as your user: FASXX.student.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 33
30. Navigate to the General Accounting > Journals work area to verify your Data Access Set is available in the Change link.
Optional Troubleshooting if You Don't Find Your Data Role
31. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Type in the task field the following: Manage Role Templates.
32. Click the Search button.
33. Click the Manage Role Templates
34. Locate Search-Role Templates in the Search and Create panel (located on the right side, about 2/3 down the page).
35. Click Search to search for all roles.
36. Locate the General Ledger Template for Ledger (GL data access role) and highlight the name.
37. Click the Open icon.
38. Click the Summary tab.
39. Click the Generate Roles button.
40. Wait about 5 minutes.
41. Go back to step 17 and follow the steps again to assign the data access set to your role.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 34
Practice 7-23: Opening the First Accounting Period
Overview
In this practice you will open the first period in your general ledger.
Open the accounting period in both your ledger and reporting currencies before you create or import journals for the period. Converted journals are only generated in your reporting currency if the period is open or future enterable.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: General Accounting > Period Close.
2. Select your Change link for the Data Access Set at the top of the Tasks pane.
3. Select your Data Access Set: XXSet.
4. Click on the Manage Accounting Period link.
5. Select your Ledger Name link.
6. Answer Yes to the question: Open First Period?
7. Select your Reporting Ledger Name from the List of Values then click the OK button.
8. Answer Yes to the question: Open First Period?
9. Click the Done button.
For Subsequent Periods
10. Click on your ledger name.
11. Go to Actions > Open Target Period and select the current period.
12. Click OK to close the window.
13. Repeat for your reporting Ledger.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 35
Practice 7-24: Creating and Generating an Allocation Rule
-_-_-_-_-_- INSTRUCTOR NOTE -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-
To Participants:
You do not need to perform the steps in “Create an Allocation Rule Activity”. The allocation is already defined in the system. You only need to review this section to understand the allocation, and then perform the steps in the sections “Copy Allocations Activity” and “Generate Allocations Activity”.
-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_- _-_-_-_-_-_-
Create an Allocation Rule Activity
NOTE: In this section of the Activity Guide, you will use the demo data we have provided since subledger applications have already been defined for you.
You will be working in the Data Access Set: US Primary Ledger.
Background
In this activity you will create an allocation rule to perform allocations and redistribute amounts. Freight that was not originally posted to a product will be redistributed to products based on product revenue. Freight has been posted to account 62510, cost center 510, product 000. Revenue has been posted to account 41000, by product (all Cost Centers).
A run time prompt will be used to specify the accounting period when the allocation is run.
Activity Scope
Create, validate, and deploy an allocation rule in Allocation Manager.
Perform the following tasks:
1. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals
2. Change your Data Access Set to US Primary Ledger and click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 36
3. Select Create Allocation Rules from the Tasks menu. This opens the Enterprise Management System Workspace, Fusion Edition to access Calculation Manager. Here you can create, validate, deploy, and administer allocation Rules and RuleSets.
4. Click Navigate >Administer> Calculation Manager
Use the System View tab to view and edit existing rules and rule sets and to create new ones.
5. Click the Expand icon on Essbase > US Chart of Accounts > db.
6. Right-click on Rules > New.
Use the New Rule window to enter a Rule Name, Application Type, Application, and Database for the Allocation Rule.
7. Enter the following:
Name: XXAllocation of Freight based on Product Rev (replacing XX with your initials).
Leave the defaults for Application Type, Application, and Database, and then click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 37
Notice that a new tab has opened to define the Rule, XXAllocation of Freight based on Product Rev.
The Properties tab (lower pane) is used to define the properties of the current node in the Rule Designer.
8. Enter Description: Allocate Freight Expenses to Products based on Product Revenue.
9. In the Rule Palette pane (top left) select the Point of View object by pressing the left mouse button. Drag the Point of View object to the Rule Designer pane and drop it between the Begin and End nodes.
Enter Your Point of View to Specify Default Values for the Current Object
10. Click on the Properties tab, the first tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 38
11. For the Caption field, enter POV.
We will use a POV Variable that has already been defined.
12. Click on the Point of View tab, click the Variable Selector icon.
13. Change Category: to Database.
14. Select the Variable named POV and click OK.
The values you see entered for each Dimension were defined in the Variable. This is a time saving, efficient way to enter commonly used allocation Dimensions.
In this allocation, we will use the Product in the Allocation Range, so we don’t want the Product specified on the POV.
15. Highlight the Value for the Product Dimension and delete it so that it is blank.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 39
You will receive a message that says: Editing the grid will remove the dynamic variable linking. Are you sure you want to continue’ Click Yes before you delete the value.
Enter Your Allocation Object
16. Drag the Allocation object from the Rule Palette pane to the Rule Designer pane and drop between the POV start and end nodes.
Use the Allocate Wizard pop up to select the dimension variables and members to define the Allocation Rule. You will select a Variable for the Accounting Period. The Accounting Period will be specified by you when you execute the allocation.
17. For Accounting Period, click inside the Select Value field. Click the Actions icon to the far right in that field, and select Variable.
18. Change the Category: to Database using the drop down list.
19. Select the Accounting_Period Variable, then click OK.
20. The rest of the Dimensions will be specified in the next steps. Click the Next button.
Enter Source Information
21. For Account, click inside the Select Value field. Click Actions icon and select Member.
22. Expand Account and All Account Values.
23. Select 62510.
24. Click Right Arrow icon and click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 40
25. Repeat steps 25-29 for the Cost Center, Product, Intercompany, and Balance Amount dimensions. Choose the following for each:
Cost Center: 510
Product: 000
Intercompany: 000
Balance Amount: Ending Balance
26. Accept the other defaults.
27. Click Next.
Enter Allocation Range
The Allocation Range will be used to calculate the percentages of the basis.
28. For the Product, click inside the Select Value field.
29. Click the Actions icon > Member.
30. Expand Product and All Corporate Products-V1.
31. Select T.
32. Click the Right Arrow icon and click OK.
33. Click Next.
Enter Target
34. Click the Member Selector button (another way to enter member values)
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 41
35. In the Dimensions drop down, select Account.
36. Expand Account and All Account Values.
37. Select 62510.
38. Click the Right Arrow icon.
39. Repeat steps 40 – 43 for the Cost Center and Intercompany Dimensions specifying the following values for each simply by changing the drop downs for each:
o Cost Center: 510
o Intercompany: 000.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 42
40. Click OK
41. Click Next.
Enter Offset
42. Click the Member Selector button
43. In the Dimensions drop down, select Account.
44. Expand Account and All Account Values.
45. Select 62510.
46. Click the Right Arrow icon.
47. Repeat steps 47-51 for the Cost Center, Product, and Intercompany dimensions using the following values:
Cost Center: 510.
Product: 000
Intercompany: 000
48. Click OK.
49. Click Next.
Skip Exclude.
50. Click Next.
Enter Basis
51. Click the drop down arrow on Select an allocation method.
52. Select Allocate using a basis.
53. For AccountingPeriod, click inside the Select Value field.
54. Click the Actions icon.
55. Select Variable.
56. Change the Category to Database.
57. Select Variable of Accounting_Period.
58. Click OK.
You can define multiple Variables for each Dimension. You may want to use a different Accounting Period for the Basis than you use for the Source. In this example we will use the same Accounting Period for the Basis and Source, it will be specified as a Run Time Variable.
59. For Account, click inside the Select Value field.
60. Click the Actions icon.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 43
61. Select Member.
62. Expand Account and All Account Values.
63. Select 41000.
64. Click the Right Arrow icon and click OK.
65. Repeat steps 64-69 for the Cost Center, Intercompany, Scenario, Balance Amount, and Amount Type dimensions by specifying the following values:
Cost Center: Expand All Corporate Cost Center-V1, and select T.
Intercompany: 000
Scenario: Actual
Balance Amount: Ending Balance
Amount Type: PTD
66. Accept the other defaults.
67. Click Next.
Enter Basis - Options
68. Accept the defaults for the Basis-Options.
69. Click Next.
Enter Rounding
70. Accept the defaults for Rounding.
71. Click Save.
72. Click Finish.
73. Click File> Save to save the rule.
74. Click OK to the Information message.
Validate and Deploy
75. Click Actions > Validate > Essbase
76. Click Actions > Deploy.
Validate and Deploy can also be done using the last icon beneath the menus.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 44
77. Click OK on Information message The Deployment was successful.
Note: Successfully defining an allocation rule does not guarantee that allocation journals will be created when the rule is generated. The success depends on if there are balances in the accounts.
FYI
Viewing and Defining Variables
1. You can choose Tools> Variables.
2. In the Variable Navigator pane, expand Essbase.
3. Expand USChartofAccounts
4. Click on db, the Variables will appear in the right pane.
5. To View the Variable definition, select the Variable.
6. To add a new Variable, right click on db and select New.
Copy Allocations Activity
Background
We will make a copy of the “Allocation of Freight based on Product Rev” rule and rename with your initials for easier identification.
Activity Scope
Copy an allocation
Copy your allocations.
1. Find the “Allocation of Freight based on Product Rev” rule in the EPM Workspace.
2. Highlight the rule, right click, and select Copy To.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 45
3. In the window that opens, add your initials to the beginning of the name (i.e. XXAllocation of Freight based on Product Rev). Click OK.
4. Your allocation will appear in the list of allocation rules. Double-click on your allocation rule.
5. Click Actions > Validate.
6. Click Actions > Deploy.
Validate and Deploy can also be done using the last icon beneath the menus.
7. Click OK on Information message The Deployment was successful.
Note: Successfully defining an allocation rule does not guarantee that allocation journals will be created when the rule is generated. The success depends on if there are balances in the accounts.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 46
Generate Allocations Activity
Background
You have created an allocation rule and now you are ready to process it and create a General Ledger journal with the results.
Activity Scope
Generate an allocation
Verify Process completion
Review Journal
Generate your allocations.
1. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals
2. Click the Generate General Ledger Allocations link.
Use the Generate Allocations page to generate and post allocations.
3. Click the Rule or Rule Set list. Select the allocation rule you defined, XXAllocation of Freight based on Product Rev.
4. Click the Specify Accounting Period list. Select Period 01-14
Note: The Accounting Period is the Run Time Prompt you specified.
5. Clear the Post Allocations checkbox.
6. Click the Submit button.
7. Note the Request #.
8. Click the OK button.
Verify the Allocation Process completes
1. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals to check the status of the Processes.
The Journals work area has a Process Monitor region at the bottom.
2. In the Process Monitor widget, Select Status All and Time Range Last 1 hour.
3. You should see 3 sequential processes, beginning with the Request # you noted when submitting. Generate Allocations, Execute Allocations and Write Back Results, and Import Journals: Child. The status for each should be Succeeded. If the processes haven’t yet completed, use the refresh icon to refresh the search results.
Review Journal
1. Click the Manage Journals task.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 47
2. In the Search criteria, Journal Starts with XX (the initials you used to name your allocation). Source Equals Allocations. Click the Search button.
3. Your journal will appear in the search results. Click on the journal to open and review it.
You have successfully generated allocations.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 48
Practice 7-25: Creating a Revaluation
Overview
In this practice, you will define a revaluation.
Revalue your foreign currency balances that are still pending such as loan invoices from your third party systems that have not been paid but are entered in a foreign currency.
Tasks
1. Navigator > General Accounting > Period Close work area.
2. Click on Manage Currency Rates > Daily Rates.
3. Enter From Currency: USD and To Currency: XXULD.
4. Enter both Rate Dates of the last day of the current open accounting period.
5. Click Search.
6. Change the Rate to .75.
7. Save > Done.
8. Click the Revalue Balances link.
9. Use the Manage Revaluations page to generate reevaluations.
10. Click the Create icon.
11. Enter a Name and Description: XXRevaluation.
12. Select Chart of Accounts: US Chart of Accounts.
13. Select your Currency: XXULD.
14. Select your Conversion Rate Type: XXSPCORP.
15. Enter 10 Day to Roll Forward.
16. Enter 101.10.78630.000.000.000 in both the Unrealized Gain and Loss Accounts.
17. Leave PTD default on the Income Statement Accounts Basis.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 49
18. Check the Post Automatically.
19. In the Revaluation Accounts, click the Add Row icon.
20. Click on the filter Conditions Icon.
21. Click the Add Field button.
22. Add Account equals 22100 Accounts Payable.
23. Click the Save button.
24. Click the Generate button.
25. Enter your Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
26. Select Ledger or Ledger Set = US Primary Ledger.
27. Enter the latest Accounting Period (Same Period used in the Currency Conversion journal).
28. Enter the Rate Date: Last day of the current period.
29. Click Submit.
Verify the Journal Entry
30. Navigator > More… > Tools > Scheduled Processes.
31. Refresh until it finishes successfully.
32. Click on Revalue Balances process name.
33. Click on (1 more….) in Log and Output attachment.
34. Click on XXXXXX.txt and verify a journal was created.
35. Query the journal in the Manage Journal work area.
36. Open the journal and review the revaluation amounts.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 50
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 8: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will perform the following activities:
Setting Up a new rule demonstration.
Viewing Intercompany Balancing Rules and Secondary and Clearing Company Balancing Options.
Creating an Intercompany batch.
Submitting and reviewing reconciliation reports.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 3
Practice 8-1: Setting Up a New Rule Demonstration
(This section has already been performed by the instructor in the training environment, so you only need to review.)
Overview
In this demonstration, the instructor will create a new intercompany balancing rule.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Implementation Projects > XXImplementation Project > Financials.
2. Expand Define and Maintain Intercompany Processing Rules.
3. Select Go to Task for Manage Intercompany Balancing Rules.
4. In the Search Results region, select the Primary Segment Rules tab.
5. Click the Create icon to create a new rule.
6. Complete the fields on the Create Primary Segment Balancing Rules page as shown in the following table:
Field Value
Source
Other
Category
Other
Transaction Type
None
From Ledger
US Primary Ledger
To Ledger
US Primary Ledger
From Legal Entity
US1 Legal Entity
To Legal Entity
Leave blank (All others are default later).
From Primary Segment Value
101
To Primary Segment Value
All Other
Receivables Account
101.10.12300.000.000.000
Payables Account
101.10.22270.000.000.000
Start Date
Date prior to today’s date, for ex. 1/1/2014
End Date
Null
7. Click Save and Close.
Turn off journal approval for the Manual source if it was not done earlier.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 4
8. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Search for Manage Journal Sources > Go to Task.
9. Search Name: Manual.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 5
10. Set Require Journal Approval unchecked for the journal source option Manual.
11. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 6
Practice 8-2: Viewing Intercompany Balancing Rules and Secondary and Clearing Company Balancing Options
Overview
In this practice, you will view intercompany balancing rules and secondary and clearing company balancing options and enter and post three journals showing different balancing scenarios.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to Setup and Maintenance > Implementation Projects > XXImplementation Project > Financials > Define and Maintain Intercompany Processing Rules > Manage Intercompany Balancing Rules > Go to Task.
2. Select From Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Search Results region, click the Legal Entity Rules tab.
5. View the existing balancing rules.
6. Click the View icon in the Receivables Account column and the Payables Account
column to view the description of the segment values on one of the rules.
7. Click the Chart of Accounts Rules tab.
8. View the existing balancing rules.
9. Click Cancel.
10. Select Go to Task for Manage Secondary and Clearing Company Balancing Options.
11. Review the rules.
12. Click Cancel.
Enter and Post a GL Journal with Mixed Balancing Segment Value Assignments
13. Navigate to: General Accounting > Journals
14. Select Create Journal task.
15. Enter Journal Batch: XX1 Intercompany.
16. Select Accounting Period: Current period.
17. Enter Journal Name: XX1 Intercompany.
18. Enter Category: Adjustment.
19. Enter the following journal lines. 101 is assigned to a legal entity and 203 is assigned to the ledger.
Journal lines Debit Credit
203.10.59110.000.000.000
1,000.00
101.10.42000.000.000.000
1,000.00
20. Click Save. (Hint: tab out of the last line of the journal before clicking save.)
21. Click Post and note the request ID.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 7
22. Click Manage Journals in the Tasks pane. Search for your journal batch using your XX1%.
23. Click the Journal Name to drill down to view your posted journal.
24. View journal lines.
Notes
Intercompany balancing lines are generated to balance the journal between primary balancing segment values 101 and 203 and the appropriate trading partner value is populated into the intercompany segment of the balancing lines.
When balancing in this journal the Legal Entity Rule is used for both lines.
25. Click Cancel.
Perform the following tasks to enter and post a GL journal with balancing segment values assigned directly to a ledger:
26. Select the Create Journal task.
27. Enter Journal Batch and Journal Name: XX2 Intercompany with Category: Adjustment.
28. Select Accounting Period: Current period.
29. Enter the following journal lines. 204 and 251 are assigned to the ledger but not to any legal entities.
Journal lines Debit Credit
204.10.59210.000.000.000
1,000.00
251.90.42000.000.000.000
1,000.00
30. Click Save.
31. Click Post and note the request ID.
32. Click Manage Journals in the Tasks pane. Search for your journal batch using your XX2%.
33. Click the Journal Name to drill down to view your posted journal.
34. View journal lines.
Note:
The ledger balancing lines are generated using the Chart of Accounts Rule to balance the journal between primary balancing segment values 204 and 251.
Balancing segment 2 was also balanced between 10 and 90, while balancing the primary balancing segment values.
35. Click Cancel.
Perform the following tasks to enter and post a GL journal that balances by primary balancing segment but not by balancing segment 2:
36. Select Create Journal task.
37. Enter Journal Batch and Journal Name: XX3 Intercompany with Category: Adjustment.
38. Select Accounting Period: Current period.
39. Enter the following journal lines.
Journal lines Debit Credit
101.30.59110.000.000.000
1,000.00
101.10.42000.000.000.000
1,000.00
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 8
40. Click Save.
41. Click Post and note the request ID.
42. Click Manage Journals in the Tasks pane. Search for your journal batch using your XX3%.
43. Click the Journal Name to drill down to view your posted journal.
44. View journal lines.
As the journal balances by primary balancing segment balancing lines are generated to balance the journal between balancing segment 2 values 30 and 10. Secondary and Clearing Company Balancing Options for US Primary Ledger are used to build the accounts.
The intercompany segment for the balancing lines is not populated with the trading partner for balancing segment 2.
45. Click Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 9
Practice 8-3: Creating an Intercompany Batch
Overview
In this practice, you will:
Create an Intercompany Batch.
Review the Intercompany Balancing Rules.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Each student should only use the batch date assigned to them by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Intercompany Accounting > Transactions > Tasks Panel Tab > Create Transactions.
2. Select Provider: US1 I/C Org.
3. Enter Transaction Type Name: I/C Adjustment.
4. Accept the Batch Date and Accounting Date as today’s date.
5. From the Transactions section, click the Add Row icon.
6. Enter the following details:
Field Value
Receiver
US2 I/C Org
Debit (USD)
100
7. From the Transactions: Distributions section, click the Provider tab.
8. Click the Add Row icon and enter the following details:
Field Value
Account
101.10.41000.000.000.000
Credit (USD)
100
9. Click the Receiver tab.
10. Click the Add Row icon and enter the following details:
Field Value
Account
102.10.60110.000.000.000
Debit (USD)
100
11. Click Submit.
12. Click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 10
Review the transaction
13. Navigate to: Tasks Panel Tab > Manage Intercompany Inbound Transactions.
14. Enter your batch number and click Search.
15. Click the resultant row to display the View Inbound Transaction page.
Note: The transaction status is approved because the transaction type, I/C Adjustment,
does not require a manual approval.
16. Click the Receiver tab and review the details.
Note: An additional row is automatically added to the receiver distributions. This is the intercompany payables account that was generated based on the intercompany balancing rules.
17. Click the Provider tab and review the details.
Note: An additional row is automatically added to the Provider distributions. This is the intercompany receivables account that was generated based on the intercompany balancing rules.
18. Click Cancel.
Review the Intercompany Balancing Rules
19. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define and Maintain Intercompany Processing Rules > Manage Intercompany Balancing Rules
20. Select the following fields:
Field Value
From Ledger
US Primary Ledger
From Legal Entity
US1 Legal Entity
21. Click Search.
22. Click the Legal Entity Rules tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 10
23. Click the row with the following details:
Field Value
From Ledger
US Primary Ledger
From Legal Entity
US1 Legal Entity
To Legal Entity
US2 Legal Entity
Transaction Type
I/C Adjustment
24. Review the balancing rule and note the receivables account. This is used to generate the provider intercompany receivables line.
25. Click Cancel.
26. Select the following fields:
Field Value
From Ledger
US Primary Ledger
From Legal Entity
US2 Legal Entity
27. Click Search.
28. Click the Legal Entity Rules tab.
29. Click the row with the following details:
Field Value
From Ledger
US Primary Ledger
From Legal Entity
US2 Legal Entity
To Legal Entity
US1 Legal Entity
Transaction Type
All Other
30. Review the balancing rule and note the payables account. This is used to generate the receiver intercompany payables line.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 11
Transfer the Intercompany Transaction to General Ledger
31. Navigate to: Intercompany Accounting > Transactions >Transfer to General Ledger.
32. Enter the following details:
Field Value
From Accounting Date
Your assigned batch date
To Accounting Date
Your assigned batch date
From Intercompany Organization
US1 I/C Org
To Intercompany Organization
US1 I/C Org
33. Click Submit.
34. Note the Request ID.
35. Click OK.
Review and Post the Journal to the General Ledger
36. Navigate to: General Accounting > Journal > Journals > Manage Journals.
37. Enter your journal batch number and click Search.
38. Select the row and click the journal batch number.
Note: The journal only contains the accounting for the provider as the transfer was executed for just that intercompany organization.
39. Click Post to post the journal and note the request ID.
40. Click Cancel.
41. Click Search and verify that your batch status is posted.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 12
Practice 8-4: Submitting and Reviewing Reconciliation Reports
Overview
In this practice, you will:
Submit the Prepare Intercompany Reconciliation Reporting Information process.
Review the Intercompany Reconciliation report.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Submit the Prepare Intercompany Reconciliation Reporting Information Process Note: If another class participant already submitted the report, you can skip to the next section, Review the Intercompany Reconciliation Reports.
1. Navigate to: Intercompany Accounting > Reconciliation.
2. Click Actions > Run.
3. Enter Provider Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
4. Enter Provider Accounting Period: Current period. Leave all other fields blank.
5. Click Submit.
6. Note the Process ID.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Refresh.
Review the Intercompany Reconciliation Reports
9. Navigate to: Intercompany Accounting > Reconciliation.
10. If required, navigate to Actions > History and select the Instructor Request ID to view the report.
11. The Period Summary Report displays summary reconciliation data.
Note: The Receiver LE is displayed as UNASSIGNED if the primary balancing segment value on the balancing line is not assigned to a legal entity.
12. Click the Entered Amount Difference in Transaction Currency amount for the row where the Provider LE is US1 Legal Entity and the Receiver LE is US2 Legal Entity.
13. Review the Source by Summary Report.
14. Click the Amount in the Intercompany Receivables GL Balance.
15. Review the Journal Lines Report.
16. Click the Journal Name.
17. Review the journal lines and note that the provider side was posted. The difference is because the receiver side is not posted.
18. Click Done to return to the Journal Lines Report.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 13
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 9: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Viewing a Financial Report from the Financial Reporting Center.
Creating a report with the Financial Reporting Studio:
Defining a grid.
Adding a formula for total expenses.
Defining a rolling 12-period column.
Defining the grid point of views for the dimensions.
Setting properties.
Adding a logo, title and chart.
Reviewing a report.
Using Infolets Demonstration.
Setting up the General Accounting Expense Infolet for All Users Demonstration.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 3
Practice 9-1: Viewing a Financial Report from the Financial Reporting Center
Overview
In this practice, you will be reviewing the Balance Sheet report in HTML and Excel formats from the Financial Reporting Center.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to Financial Reporting Center.
2. Click on the Search icon.
3. Enter Balance Sheet and click on the Search icon.
4. Select the Balance Sheet that is a Financial Report not a Dashboard.
5. Click the Go to Member Selection icon.
6. Expand Company > All Company Values.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 4
7. Select [All Company Values].[102] and move it to the Selected area by using the Arrow
icon.
8. Click OK twice.
Note: By default the report opens in HTML Preview.
9. Next to Page: 101-US 1 LE 1 BU 1, click on the dropdown to choose either Company or
102-LE US 1 LE 2.
Note: the data refreshes automatically.
10. Click on the List of Values next to HTML Preview and select Export to Excel.
11. Select Open with and then click OK.
Note: Each Company opens is a separate sheet.
12. Close Excel once you have viewed the report.
13. Back in Fusion click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 5
Practice 9-2: Creating a Financial Report: Defining a Grid
Overview
In this practice, you will be performing the basic tasks to begin creating your report grid in
Oracle Financial Reporting Studio.
Your company, Vision America Inc., requires a rolling twelve-month income statement report to show revenue and expenses for both of its companies.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks.
1. Navigate to: Financial Reporting Center.
2. Click on the Tasks panel tab icon at the far right of the page and then click the Open Workspace for Financial Reporting link.
3. In the Workspace URL, remove /workspace/index.jsp.
4. Copy the URL that remains, for instance: https://adc-fapXXXX-bi.oracledemos.com.
Where XXXX is the Instance unique for your class.
Note: You will use this in the Server URL when you login to the Financials Reporting Studio in step 7 below.
Tasks
Accessing the Financial Reporting Studio on your desktop.
5. Navigate to Start menu > Programs > Oracle > Financial Reporting Studio > Financial Reporting Studio.
6. Enter your FASXX.Student name and password.
7. Paste the copied URL into the Server URL, https://adc-fap-bi.oracledemos.com. For example,
https://adc-fapXXXX-bi.oracledemos.com.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 6
8. Click OK.
Defining a new report and grid.
9. Click the New Report button (first icon on the tool bar) or File menu > New > Report.
10. From the top menu click on View > deselect Guidelines.
11. Click the New Grid button (first icon in the second set on the tool bar).
12. Draw a box on the pallet to create the grid for your report.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 7
13. Click the Database Connection list. Select USChartofAccounts.
14. Click OK.
Note: the Dimension Layout window that opens to arrange your dimensions in one of the three report levels: pages, columns, and rows.
Selecting the Point of View Dimensions for the Grid.
15. Drag and drop the following dimensions to the following grid sections:
Tip: Click the icon in front of the name to select for dragging.
Accounting Period > Columns
Account > Rows
Company > Pages
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 8
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 9
16. Click OK.
Selecting the Account Dimension Members.
17. Double-click Account.
Note: This opens the Select Members window. You will be selecting revenue accounts and expense accounts.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 10
18. In the Selected box on the right, click on Account and then click the Remove icon.
19. In the Available box, expand Account > All Corporate Accounts - V1 > [Account]@[T] > 95001.
20. Select 95011-Revenue.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 11
21. Click the Add icon.
22. Click OK.
Saving your report.
23. Click File > Save As.
24. Double click on My Folders.
25. Enter the name for the report: XXVision Income Statement.
26. Click Save.
Warning: Save often.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 12
Inserting a blank row and a data row for expenses.
27. Select the last row in the grid by clicking on the row header.
28. From the menu bar select Insert > Row > Text.
29. Right-click the row header on the row below row 2.
30. Select Insert > Row > Data.
31. Double-click account 95011 in line 3.
32. Remove the selected account 95011.
33. Expand Account > All Corporate Accounts - V1 > [Account]@[T] > 95001 > 95021 - Expenses.
34. Select all three accounts: 50000, 60000, and 70000.
35. Click the Add icon.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 13
36. Select the Place selections into separate rows check box at the bottom of the Selected
window.
37. Click OK.
38. Save. Leave the report open for the next practice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 14
Practice 9-3: Creating a Financial Report: Adding a Formula for Total Expenses
Overview
In this practice, you be adding a formula for total expenses.
Prerequisite:
Complete the following practice before beginning this one:
12-2: Creating a Report with the Financial Reporting Studio: Defining a Grid.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Right-click the row header of the last row.
2. Select Insert > Row > Formula.
3. Click in the blank cell on row 6.
4. In the Row 6 Properties sheet, select the Custom Heading radio button.
5. In the white box type Total Expenses.
6. Click in the formula cell at row 6 and column A.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 15
7. Click the Sum() button. The formula Sum() is entered into the Edit box.
8. Click between the brackets () and enter [3:5].
Note: If the rows are not contiguous (2 subtotal rows) then you can enter a formula like this:
Sum([1],[6])
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 16
9. Click the Accept button (green check mark in front of the Edit box).
Note: This action validates the syntax of the formula. The Reporting Studio does not give you a confirmation. You will only get an error window when the syntax does not validate.
10. Save. Leave the report open for the next practice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 17
Practice 9-4: Creating a Financial Report Defining a Rolling 12-Period Column
Overview
In this practice, you be creating a rolling 12-period column using the range function.
Prerequisite:
Complete the following practice before beginning this one:
12-3: Creating a Report with the Financial Reporting Studio: Adding a Formula for Total Expenses.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Double-click the AccountingPeriod cell (below Column A).
2. In the Selected box on the right, click on AccountingPeriod and then click the Remove
icon.
3. Click the Functions tab.
4. Select Range.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 18
5. Click the Add icon.
Note: The Edit Range Function window opens to add the range function start and end members.
6. If not selected, select the StartMember row.
7. Click in the Value field.
8. Click the Lookup button.
9. Select the Functions tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 19
10. Select RelativeMember.
11. Click the Add icon.
12. If not selected, select the Member row.
13. Click in the Value field.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 20
14. Click the Lookup button.
15. Select Current Point of View.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 21
16. Click the Add icon.
17. Click OK.
18. Select the Offset row.
Note: The Offset value determines how many periods to include from the current point of view. This will be a rolling 12-period report going 12 periods back from the last column.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 22
19. Enter -11 in the Value field.
20. Click OK twice.
21. In the Edit Range Function window, select the EndMember row.
22. Click in the Value field.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 23
23. Click the Lookup icon.
24. Select Current Point of View.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 24
25. Click the Add icon.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 25
26. Click OK three times until you return to your report grid.
Note: Column A should now be replaced by Range from Relative to Current Point of View offset by -11 to Current Point of View for AccountingPeriod.
27. Save. Leave the report open for the next practice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 26
Practice 9-5: Creating a Financial Report: Defining the Grid and User Point of View Dimensions
Overview
In this practice, you be defining the points of view for the report dimensions.
Prerequisite:
Complete the following practice before beginning this one:
12-4: Creating a Report with the Financial Reporting Studio: Defining a Rolling 12- Period Column.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Defining the Grid Point of View Dimension Values.
1. Click the Grid object (the intersection of rows and columns on the left margin).
Note: This activates the grid and opens the Grid Properties sheet.
2. Right-click the Grid object.
3. Select Grid Point of View.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 27
4. Click the Ledger: User Point of View for Ledger button.
5. Expand Ledger > All Ledgers > select US Primary Ledger.
6. Select the Scenario tab.
7. Expand Scenario > select Actual.
8. Select the Balance Amount tab.
9. Expand Balance Amount > select Period Activity.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 28
10. Select the Currency tab.
11. Expand Currency > select USD.
12. Click OK.
Setting up the Grid Point of View.
13. Right-click the Grid object.
14. Select Grid Point of View Setup.
15. Scroll down to find the Balance Amount dimension.
16. In the Report Viewers May Select column, select Nothing, Lock Member Selection.
17. Click OK.
Setting up a Prompt for a Point of View Dimension.
18. In the grid double-click on the word Pages.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 29
19. Remove Company from the Selected box.
20. In the Available box select Prompt for Company.
21. Click the Add icon.
22. Click OK.
23. In the Define Prompts window, replace the Enter Company title with Please select a Company.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 30
24. Click on the Default Member field, click the Lookup button.
25. Remove Company from the Selected box.
26. In the Available box expand Company > All Company Values.
27. Select 101 -US 1 LE 1 BU 1 and 102-US 1 LE 2.
28. Click the Add icon.
29. Click OK.
30. Click the Member Labels in Prompt Selection Dialog list button.
31. Select Alias.
32. Click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 31
Practice 9-6: Creating a Financial Report: Setting Properties
Overview
In this practice, you will be setting the grid, page and heading row properties.
Prerequisite:
Complete the following practice before beginning this one:
12-5: Creating a Report with the Financial Reporting Studio: Defining the Grid and User Point of View Dimensions.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Setting the Grid Properties.
1. Click the Grid object (the intersection of rows and columns on the left margin).
Note: This activates the grid and opens the Grid Properties sheet.
2. On the Grid Properties sheet select Suppression.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 32
3. In the Zero Values field enter 0.
4. On the Grid Properties sheet, select General.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 33
5. Select the Drill Through option. (Drag out the window to see the drill-through box on the very bottom of the window.)
Setting the Page Properties.
6. Click on the word Pages on the Grid.
Note: This opens the Page Properties sheet on the right side of the window. If it does not open, click View > Property Sheet.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 34
7. Select the Alias: Default radio button.
Setting the Heading Row Properties.
8. Click on the first cell on Row 1 on the Grid.
Note: This opens the Heading Row Properties sheet on the right side of the window.
9. Select the Alias: Default radio button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 35
10. Select the Allow Expansion radio button.
11. Repeat the Alias: Default and Allow Expansion settings for rows 3,4 and 5.
12. Save. Leave the report open for the next activity.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 36
Practice 9-7: Creating a Financial Report: Adding a Logo and Title
Overview
In this practice, you will perform the tasks to add your company logo and a title to your report in the Oracle Financial Reporting Studio.
Prerequisite:
Complete the following practice before beginning this one:
12-6: Creating a Report with the Financial Reporting Studio: Setting Properties.
Assumptions
Sign in as the FASXX.Student user assigned to you by the instructor.
Tasks
Inserting a logo into the report header:
1. Download a sample logo from here and save to your machine.
2. Click the Image button (third icon in the second set of icons on the tool bar).
3. Using your cursor, draw a box in the report pallet’s Header region to determine the length and width of the image.
4. Search for the logo you had downloaded in step 1.
5. Click the Open button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 37
6. Use your curser to size the image above the grid.
7. Save.
Using the Text button to insert text in the report.
8. Click the Text button (second icon in the second set of icons on the tool bar).
9. Using your cursor draw a box in the report pallet’s Header region to determine the length and width of the text box.
10. Enter Rolling 12 Month Income Statement.
11. Use the Format menu > Font to apply formatting options to the text. Select Bold as the Font Style and 14 as the Font Size.
12. Center the text with the Center Text icon on the tool bar.
13. Use the File menu > Page Setup option to set page setup options.
14. Select the Landscape option.
15. Click the OK button.
16. Save.
17. Save. Leave the report open for the next activity.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 38
Practice 9-8: Reviewing a Report
Overview
In this practice, you will be previewing the report in the Oracle Financial Reporting Studio and make edits that are necessary. Then, you will open the report in Workspace and drill down to detail balances.
You need to review your company Vision America Inc.'s rolling twelve-month income statement report to verify that it was created correctly.
Prerequisite:
Complete the following practice before beginning this one:
12-7: Creating a Report with the Financial Reporting Studio: Adding a Logo, Table and Chart.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Previewing the report in Financial Reporting Studio.
1. Ensure that the AccountingPeriod POV is set to 12-14. If not, click the
AccountingPeriod POV.
2. Expand AccountingPeriod > 12-14 > Qtr4-14 select 12-14 (or the period assigned by your instructor.)
3. Click OK.
4. Click File > PDF Preview.
5. Accept the default Companies in the prompt window.
6. Click OK.
7. Use the Next Page button to see all the columns.
8. Go back to your definition and adjust anything that does not look correct.
Note: Some of the values may show “Missing,” which is not an error but rather a lack of data due to the limited data in our database.
Opening the report from Workspace.
9. Sign in to the application.
10. Navigate to: Financial Reporting Center.
11. Click on the Tasks panel tab icon at the far right of the Overview page and then click Open Workspace for Financial Reports.
Note: This opens a new web page entitled Enterprise Performance Management System Workspace, Fusion Edition.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 39
12. Click on Navigate > Applications > BI Catalog.
13. Click on My Folders. Your XXVision Income Statement should be visible.
14. Click Open.
15. Accept the default Companies in the prompt window.
16. Click OK.
17. Click on the Revenue amount in column 2-14.
Note: the amounts on the screenshot may be different than yours due to changing data.
18. Select Drill to Detail Balances.
Note: You can drill down further by clicking on any amount in the Period Activity (USD)
Column.
19. Close the webpage tab that the drill down opened.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 40
20. Close the XXVision Income Statement tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 41
Practice 9-10: Setting up and Viewing the General Accounting Expense Infolet Demonstration
Overview
In this practice, you will set up an account group with 2 accounts that you will view on the General Accounting Expenses infolet.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: General Accounting > General Accounting Dashboard.
2. Ensure that the Data Access Set is US Primary Ledger.
3. In the Account Monitor area, click the View menu.
4. Select Account Group.
5. Select Create.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 42
6. Enter:
Field Value
Name
XXTravel Expenses
Description
For tracking airfare and meals
Display In
Expenses
Set as Default
Select
Time Option
Accounting Period
Comparison Option
Prior Year PTD
Access
Private
7. In the Accounts area, click the Add Row button.
8. Enter:
Field Value
Name
XXAirfare
Ledger
US Primary Ledger
Co
101
LoB
10
Acc
60512
CC
400
Prod
000
IC
000
Change
Always Display
9. In the Accounts area, click the Add Row button.
10. Enter:
Field Value
Name
XXMeals
Ledger
US Primary Ledger
Co
101
LoB
10
Acc
60521
CC
400
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 43
Field Value
Prod
000
IC
000
Change
Always Display
11. Select the Save drop-down list.
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click OK.
Viewing the Expense Infolet
Note: The account group may not show on the infolet immediately. Wait a few minutes before moving on. If the infolet does not work after 5 minutes, log out and then log back in.
1. Navigate to: Home icon > Page Control dot for General Accounting Infolets. .
2. Find the Expenses infolet.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 44
3. Click on the Expanded View icon.
4. Hover over the status bar graph to see the details.
Note: Infolets use the current open period as the basis for the comparison option so there may not be any values to hover over.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 45
Practice 9-11: Viewing an Account Group and Sunburst from the Financial Reporting Center Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, you will be:
Viewing your account group from the Financial Reporting Center
Viewing your account group as a Sunburst
Assumptions
Sign in as the FASXX.Student user assigned to you by the instructor.
Tasks
.
1. Navigate to: Financial Reporting Center.
2. Click the Search icon and enter XXT.
3. Click the Search icon.
4. Select your XXTravel Expense Sunburst.
5. From the Account Group drop down, select XXTravel Expenses.
Editing Account Group Segments.
6. Change the period to 11-15. The balances will be automatically updated.
7. Click the Show/Hide Segments button.
8. On the Account segment select Value and Description.
9. For the Product and Intercompany segments Unselect Value.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 46
10. Click Done.
Reviewing an Account Group as a Sunburst
11. Select View as Sunburst.
12. Click Show Description.
13. Hover over each ring to see the details of the changes.
14. Select any segment in the outer ring (cost center) and press the Zoom In button. This drills down from Total Sales parent cost center to child cost centers.
15. Select any segment in the middle ring (account) and press the Move Ring Away From Center arrow button to view expenses distributed first by cost center and then by account (expense type).
Note: You can also use the Segments section to the right of the sunburst to move the rings
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 47
away or towards the center.
16. Select another color for the rings.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 48
17. Select Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 10: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Viewing Your Business Unit.
Viewing the Assigned Business Unit Functions.
Creating a Reference Data Set.
Managing Your Business Unit Set Assignment.
Provisioning Data Roles.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 3
Practice 10-1: Viewing Your Business Unit
Overview
In this practice, you be reviewing your assigned business unit functions that were created when you uploaded your spreadsheet.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Organization Structures > Manage Business Unit.
4. Select your XXBusiness Unit hyperlink.
5. View the details, including the Default Set.
6. Click the Cancel button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 4
Practice 10-2: Viewing the Assigned Business Unit Functions
Overview
In this practice, you will view the assigned business unit functions..
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Organization Structures.
4. Next to the Assign Business Unit Business Function task, click the Select…link under the Scope column.
5. The Select Scope window appears. With the Assign Business Unit Business Function
option selected, select Select and Add from the Business Unit drop-down list.
6. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
7. Search and select the row header for your XXBusiness Unit.
8. Click Save and Close.
9. View the Business Unit Functions and Financial Reporting.
10. Click the Cancel button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 5
Practice 10-3: Creating a Reference Data Set
Overview
In this practice, you be creating a reference data set to use with Payables Payment Terms.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Application Extensions > Show: All Tasks > Manage Reference Data Sets.
4. Click New and enter the following
Field Choices or Values
Set Code
XXREFDATA
Set Name
XXReference Data
Description
XXReference Data Set
5. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 6
Practice 10-4: Managing Your Business Unit Set Assignment
Overview
In this practice, you will be putting your reference data set on the Payables Payment Terms for your Business Unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Organization Structures > Manage Business Unit Set Assignment.
Note: If this task is not currently scoped to your XXBusiness Unit, you will need to scope it.
4. Scroll down to Payables Payment Terms and change the Reference Data Set Code to
XXREFDATA.
6. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 7
Practice 10-5: Provisioning Data Roles
Overview
In this practice your instructor will be generating data roles for all the Business Units and SetID’s.
In this practice, you will be:
Searching for your user in Oracle Identity Manager.
Assigning the data role for your business unit and SetID to your user.
Note: When a business unit is created, the data role for that business unit is automatically generated and assigned to the Application Implementation Consultant job role. Since your FASXX.Student user has this job role, you already have access to the business unit that you created earlier. The purpose of this practice is to show you how to assign a business unit data role if you want to restrict access to one business unit.
Prerequisites
You successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Your Instructor will generate the roles.
Note to the Instructor: You may not need to generate the roles. Before generating them, check the Summary > Valid Roles for each student’s XXBusiness Unit and XXREFDATA.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance.
2. In the Search field type Define Data Security for Financials and click Search
3. Click Manage Data Security for Financials > Manage Role Templates.
4. Locate and click the Search - Role Templates link in the Search and Create panel (located on the bottom right).
5. Click Search to search for all role templates.
6. Find the Financials Common Module Template for Business Unit Security template and click the template name.
7. Click Open.
8. Click the Summary tab.
9. Click Generate Roles.
10. Click OK.
11. Close the tab and click on the Search Role Templates tab.
12. Do the same for the Payables Template for Business Function Payables Invoicing and the Financials Common Module Template for SetID template.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 8
Students begin here.
13. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
14. Click Setup.
15. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Enterprise Profile > Provision Roles to Implementation Users.
16. From Oracle Identity Manager, click the Administration link in the upper right-hand corner of the page.
17. Enter your FASXX.Student user in the User field.
18. Click Search.
19. Click the FASXX.Student link.
20. Click the Roles tab.
21. Click Assign.
22. Enter %XX in the Display Name field.
23. Select Search.
24. Highlight all the roles with your business unit and setID and click Add.
25. Close the Oracle Identity Manager tab on your browser.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 11: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will create two different tax configurations and test one of them. The practices are:
Viewing a Calculated Tax on a Payables Transaction Demonstration.
Creating a US Sales Tax Using the Tax Configuration Workbook.
Creating VAT Sales Tax Using the Tax Configuration Workbook (Optional).
Using the Tax Simulator to Test a Payables Transaction.
Enabling Your Tax for Transactions.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 3
Practice 11-1: Viewing a Calculated Tax on a Payables Transaction Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, you will view the calculated US sales tax on a Payables sales invoice.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
After setting up your tax configuration and verifying the transaction results through testing, you can enable the applicable tax or taxes for transactions. The tax determination process uses your tax configuration and the details on the transaction to determine which taxes apply to the transaction and how to calculate the tax amount for each tax that applies to the transaction.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Oracle Fusion Payables > Invoices work area.
2. Click on the Tasks panel > Invoices > Create Invoice.
3. Enter:
Field Value
Business Unit
US1 Business Unit
Supplier
Advanced Corp
Supplier Site
AC US1
Legal Entity
US1 Legal Entity
Number
APTest
Amount
1095.00
4. Accept all other defaults.
5. In the Lines section, enter:
Field Value
Amount
1000.00
Distribution Combination
101.10.60520.000.000.000
6. Click the Save button.
7. Click Invoice Actions > Calculate Tax.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 4
8. Expand the Taxes Section.
9. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 5
Practice 11-2: Creating a US Sales Tax Using the Tax Configuration Workbook
Overview
In this practice, you will create a US sales tax using the tax configuration workbook and subscribe you business unit to your tax regime.
The Tax Configuration Workbook is a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet template with five common tax setup worksheets:
Manage Tax Regimes
Manage Taxes
Manage Rates
Manage Tax Recovery Rates
Manage Tax Rules
Oracle Fusion Tax provides predefined tax regimes and taxes in the Tax Configuration Workbook to enable quick and easy setup.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > In the Search field, enter Rapid and click the
Search magnifying glass icon.
2. Click on the Define Common Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation task list and then select Manage Tax Regimes.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 6
3. In the Search Results region click the Rapid Setup Spreadsheets button. Select
Download Tax Configuration Workbook.
4. Click OK to open the spreadsheet using Microsoft Office Excel. If you get a message to accept the Spreadsheet, click Yes.
5. Right-click on the Tax Conf Workbook Instructions tab.
6. Click Unhide.
7. Select Manage Tax Regimes and click OK. Repeat for Manage Taxes.
8. Click the Manage Tax Regimes tab in the spreadsheet.
9. Delete all the existing Regimes.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 7
10. Enter the following:
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXUS Regime
Country
United States
Start Date
2001/01/01
11. Click on the Manage Taxes tab.
12. Delete all the existing Taxes.
13. Complete the fields, as shown in the following table:
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXUS Regime
Tax
COUNTRY
Tax Name
XXUS Sales Tax
Tax Geography Type
Country
Tax Currency
USD
Rounding Rule
Nearest
Recoverable
No
Default Place of Supply
Ship to use bill to if ship to is not found
Default Tax Registration
Bill-from party
Start Date
2001/01/01
14. Click on the Manage Rates tab.
15. Enter the following:
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXUS Regime
Tax
COUNTRY
Tax Status Code
STANDARD
Tax Jurisdiction Code
XXUS
Tax Jurisdiction Name
XXUnited States
Parent Geography Type
COUNTRY
Parent Geography Name
UNITED STATES
Geography Name
United States
Tax Rate Code
XXTAXRATE
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 8
Field Value
Tax Rate Name
XXTax Rate
Tax Rate
7
Set As Default Rate
Yes
Effective Start Date
2001/01/01
16. Click on the Instructions tab.
17. Click the Generate CSV File button. Save it to your Desktop.
Note: You may need to enable macros to use the Generate CSV File button.
18. Click OK.
19. Close Excel.
20. In the Search Results region click the Rapid Setup Spreadsheets button click Upload Tax Configuration Workbook.
21. Click Browse… and select your TaxConfigurationWorkbook.zip file.
22. Click Open.
23. Click Upload.
24. Click OK.
25. In the Manage Tax Regimes page for Transaction Tax, select the Monitor Upload and Download Processes tab. Click the Refresh icon until the Status is Succeeded.
Subscribing your Business Unit and the US1 Business Unit to your Tax Regime.
26. Search for your XXUS Regime.
27. Click on the XXUS Regime link.
28. Click Edit.
29. Scroll down to the Configuration Options tab.
30. Click Add Row.
31. Enter the following:
Field Value
Party Name
XXBusiness Unit
Party Type
Business unit owning tax content
Configuration for Taxes and Rules
Common Configuration
Effective Start Date
1/1/01
32. Repeat steps 30 and 31 for the US1 Business Unit.
33. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 9
34. Click Done.
Enabling a Tax for Simulation
Note: Tax is not enabled for simulation or transactions when it is created from a spreadsheet upload. You can enable a tax for simulation from the:
Create Tax page
Edit Tax page
Enable Taxes option in the Rapid Setup Spreadsheet list of values on the Manage Taxes page
Once you enable a tax for both simulation and transactions processing, you can’t modify the tax setup.
35. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > In the Search field, enter Rapid and click the
Search magnifying glass icon.
36. Click on the Define Common Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation task list and then select Manage Taxes.
37. Enter XXUS in the Tax Regime Code field and click Search.
38. Select the row with your tax and click the Edit icon.
39. Click the Tax Rule Defaults tab.
40. Scroll down to the bottom of the page. If the Tax Rate does not have a Default Value then click Create Default.
41. Accept all the defaults and enter:
Field Value
Tax Status Code
Standard
Tax Rate Code
XXTAXRATE1
Rate Percentage
7
42. Click Save and Close.
43. Select Enable tax for simulation.
Note: It is a best practice to use the Tax Simulator to test your configuration before you enable your tax for transactions.
44. Click the Save and Close button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 10
Practice 11-3: Creating a VAT Tax Using the Tax Configuration Workbook (Optional)
Overview
In this practice, you create a tax configuration for value-added tax (VAT) in the United Kingdom using the Tax Configuration Workbook.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Creating Tax Setup Data
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > In the Search field, enter Rapid and click the
Search magnifying glass icon.
2. Click on the Define Common Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation task list and then select Manage Tax Regimes.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 11
3. In the Search Results region click the Rapid Setup Spreadsheets button. Select
Download Tax Configuration Workbook.
4. Click OK to open the spreadsheet using Microsoft Office Excel. If you get a message to accept the Spreadsheet, click Yes.
5. Right-click on the Tax Conf Workbook Instructions tab.
6. Click Unhide.
7. Select Manage Tax Regimes and click OK. Repeat for Manage Taxes.
8. Click the Manage Tax Regimes tab in the spreadsheet.
9. Delete all the existing Regimes.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 12
10. Enter the following:
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXGB VAT
Country
United Kingdom
Start Date
2001/01/01
11. Click on the Manage Taxes tab.
12. Delete all the existing Taxes.
13. Complete the fields, as shown in the following table:
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXGB VAT
Tax
COUNTRY
Tax Name
XXGB VAT
Tax Geography Type
Country
Tax Currency
GBP
Rounding Rule
Nearest
Recoverable
No
Default Place of Supply
Ship to use bill to if ship to is not found
Default Tax Registration
Bill-from party
Start Date
2001/01/01
14. Click the Manage Rates tab in the spreadsheet.
Note: You need to create both a default nonjurisdiction-based tax rate and a default jurisdiction-based tax rate or rates for each type of transaction tax in a given country. The number of specific default jurisdiction-based tax rates you set up depends on the transaction tax regulations for that country. The default nonjurisdiction-based tax rate created for each tax is required to enable the tax for either simulation or simulation and transaction processing.
15. Complete the fields, as shown in this table, to set up a default nonjurisdiction-based tax rate for your XX GB VAT tax. For the tax regime and tax, you may have to scroll up in the window to select the value.
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXGB VAT
Tax
XX GB VAT
Tax Status Code
STANDARD
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 13
Field Value
Tax Jurisdiction Code
Blank
Tax Jurisdiction Name
Blank
Geography Name
Blank
Tax Rate Code
XX GB VAT DEFAULT
Tax Rate Name
XX GB VAT Default
Tax Rate
0
Set As Default Rate
Yes
Effective Start Date
2011/01/01
Note: The default nonjurisdiction-based tax rate is applied only in the absence of a valid tax rate rule or a default jurisdiction-based tax rate. It is a common tax rate that is applied when there is no specific tax rate defined for the jurisdiction associated with the transaction. The default nonjurisdiction-based tax rate can prevent potential transaction errors when a tax place of supply location on a transaction legally stops imposing a tax rate in accordance with newly enacted laws.
16. Complete the fields, as shown in this table, to set up a default jurisdiction-based tax rate. For the tax regime and tax, you may have to scroll up in the window to select the value.
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXGB VAT
Tax
XX GB VAT
Tax Status Code
STANDARD
Tax Jurisdiction Code
GB VAT
Tax Jurisdiction Name
GB VAT
Geography Name
United Kingdom
Tax Rate Code
XX GB VAT STANDARD
Tax Rate Name
XX GB VAT Standard
Tax Rate
20
Set As Default Rate
Yes
Effective Start Date
2011/01/01
Note: The default jurisdiction-based tax rates:
Ensures that the calculated transaction tax amounts are based on the rates enforced by the tax authority for a particular jurisdiction.
Allows correct downstream reporting of transaction tax amounts on a periodic basis to the proper local tax authorities.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 14
Without the creation of valid default jurisdiction-based tax rates, filing of tax reports and returns cannot be completed. The jurisdiction information is required for the calculated transaction tax amounts to appear on the tax reports and returns for filing with the specific local tax authorities.
17. Click the Manage Tax Recovery Rates tab in the spreadsheet.
18. Complete the fields, as shown in this table for the tax recovery rate. For the tax regime and tax, you may have to scroll up in the window to select the value.
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXGB VAT
Tax
XX GB VAT
Tax Recovery Rate Code
XX GB VAT STANDARD REC RATE
Tax Rate
100
Set As Default Rate
Yes
Effective Start Date
2011/01/01
19. Save the spreadsheet tax data in a zip file that contains CSV formatted data by using the Generate CSV File macro button on the Instructions tab of the spreadsheet. You may need to enable macros to use the Generate CSV File button.
Save your spreadsheet zip file with a unique name by adding _XX to the file name.
20. On the Manage Tax Regimes page for Transaction Tax, click Upload Tax Configuration Workbook in the Rapid Setup Spreadsheets list of values in the Search Results region.
21. In the Upload Tax Configuration Workbook dialog box, select your file and click Upload.
22. Click OK to acknowledge that your process was submitted.
23. On the Manage Tax Regimes page for Transaction Tax, select the Monitor Upload and Download Processes tab.
24. Note the status of your process.
If the status of the upload process is Succeeded and there are no validation errors in the log file, you can view your tax regime using the search criteria on this page.
If the status of the process is Paused, wait for the sub-processes to complete and then click the Refresh icon.
If the upload failed, check the details in your upload file, correct any errors, and upload the file again.
Enabling a Tax for Simulation
Tax is not enabled for simulation or transactions when it is created from a spreadsheet upload. You can enable a tax for simulation from the:
Create Tax page
Edit Tax page
Enable Taxes option in the Rapid Setup Spreadsheet list of values on the Manage Taxes page
Note: The Enable Taxes option in the Rapid Setup Spreadsheet list of values on the
Manage Taxes page automatically enables a tax for both simulation and transactions
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 15
processing. The best practice is to first enable a tax or collection of taxes for simulation only using the Create Tax page or the Edit Tax page. Use the Oracle Fusion Tax Simulator to thoroughly test all tax setups for accuracy before enabling the tax or collection of taxes for transactions processing. Once you enable a tax for both simulation and transactions processing, you can’t modify the tax setup.
25. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Taxes.
26. On the Manage Taxes page for Transaction Tax, enter XX GB VAT in the Tax field and click Search.
27. Select the row with your tax and click the Edit icon.
28. On the Edit Tax page, select the Enable tax for simulation option. You can use the Tax Simulator to test your configuration before you enable your tax for transactions.
29. Click the Save and Close button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 16
Practice 11-4: Using the Tax Simulator to Test a Payables Transaction
Overview
In this practice, you will use the Tax Simulator to test your US Sales Tax on a Payables transaction. After setting up your tax configuration and verifying the transaction results through testing, you can enable the applicable tax or taxes for transactions. The tax determination process uses your tax configuration and the details on the transaction to determine which taxes apply to the transaction and how to calculate the tax amount for each tax that applies to the transaction.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Simulator Transactions.
Note: Use the Manage Tax Simulator Transactions page to test your tax configuration with existing transactions, as well as newly created transactions, without impacting active data.
Entering a Payables Transaction to Test Your Tax Setup
Note: You must use the US1 Legal Entity and the US1 Business Unit for the simulation because your Business Unit does not have a Supplier Assignment.
2. Click the Create button.
3. Complete the fields, as shown in the following table:
Field Value
Document Event Class
Purchase invoice
Legal Entity
US1 Legal Entity
Business Unit
US1 Business Unit
Document Number
XXAP
4. In the Supplier region, click the Name search icon.
5. Enter Advanced Corp in the Name field.
6. Click the Search button.
7. Select the row.
8. Click the OK button.
9. Select AC US1 in the Site field.
10. Enter line information for line number 1.
11. Enter Hardware in the Line Description field.
12. Enter 3000.00 in the Amount field.
13. Click the Save button.
Viewing Tax Lines
14. Click the View Tax Lines button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 17
15. Use the Tax Line Details page to view additional details about the tax calculation that applies to a specific detail tax line.
16. Use the header region to view attributes that drive tax determination or tax calculation.
17. Use the tax line details table to view the calculated tax lines with the corresponding tax configuration details for each transaction line.
18. Use the Rule Results region to view the processing and evaluation of the rules associated with a rule type. For each tax rule listed in the tax rules process results table, you can drill down to the associated rule conditions to view the condition details. For this tax line no rules were evaluated. The default values for the rule types were used in tax determination, so no rule conditions are displayed.
19. Click the Done button.
20. Click the Save and Close button.
Information: For further information about setting up your minimum tax configuration, refer to the Help Portal to view the demonstrations on:
Configuring Taxes for Transactions Part 4: Verifying Tax Configuration.
Configuring Tax Rules Part 2: Verifying Tax Applicability Rules.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 18
Practice 11-5: Enabling Your Tax for Transactions
Overview
In this practice, you will enable your tax for transactions.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > In the Search field, enter Rapid and click the
Search magnifying glass icon.
2. Click on the Define Common Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation task list and then select Manage Taxes.
3. Enter XXUS in the Tax Regime Code field and click Search.
4. Select the row with your tax and click the Edit icon.
5. Select Enable tax for transactions.
6. Click Save and Close.
7. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 12: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will do the following practices:
Creating Three Account Rules.
Creating a Description Rule.
Creating Two Journal Line Rules.
Creating a Journal Entry Rule Set.
Duplicating and Modifying an Accounting Method.
Assigning an Accounting Method to a Ledger.
Reviewing Accounting for a Payables Invoice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 3
The goal of these practices is create a new Accounting Method for your secondary ledger. Your company requires the secondary ledger to have more detailed accounting for the Payables liability account than the standard accrual method allows.
Below is an example of the accounting that will be on the invoice and ultimately in the primary ledger. Also below is the accounting that your new SL Accrual accounting method will produce for the same invoice. The SL Accrual method will put the departments used on the distribution accounts on the liability account.
Ledger Accounting Method Account Combination DR CR
Primary
Standard Accrual
01-110-5620-01
400.00
01-120-5620-01
600.00
01-000-2210-01
1000.00
Secondary
SL Accrual
01-110-5620-01
400.00
01-120-5620-01
600.00
01-110-2210-01
400.00
01-120-2210-01
600.00
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 4
Practice 12-1: Creating Three Account Rules
Overview
In this practice, you will be defining three Account rules for the Payables subledger for the secondary ledger to use. Account rules will be used to determine the accounts for subledger journal entry lines.
The three account rules will be:
An account combination rule using a constant for the liability account for the credits: 01-000-2210-00.
A segment rule using the department value from the distribution account.
A source rule using the distribution account for the debits.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Creating Rules for Your Standard Invoice.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables > Manage Account Rules.
Note: You may need to first change the Show list of values to All Tasks.
4. Select Create.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXLiability Account
Short Name
XXLIAB_ACCT
Description
Using a constant.
Chart of Accounts
XXLedger
Rule Type
Account Combination
6. In the Rules region, click Add Row.
7. Enter the following:
Field Value
Priority
1
Value Type
Constant
Value
01-000-2210-01
Adding a Condition.
8. Place your cursor in the Rule 1: Conditions region text box, and remove any existing text.
9. Select Source.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 5
10. Search Name: Invoice Type.
11. Click the Search arrow.
12. Select Payables: Invoice Type.
13. Click OK.
14. Place the cursor after ).
15. Select Operator: Equal To (=).
16. Enter STANDARD.
17. Select Validate.
18. An Information window appears: Validation is complete.
Note: The validation step validates the Condition, not the rule.
19. Select OK.
20. If the rule status is not active, go to the Actions menu and select Change Status > Activate.
21. Select Save and Create Another.
Creating a Second Rule for the Department Segment.
22. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXDepartment
Short Name
XXDEPT
Description
Department value for the liability account.
Chart of Accounts
XXLedger
Rule Type
Segment
Segment
XXDepartment
23. In the Rules region, click Add Row.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 6
24. Enter the following:
Field Value
Priority
1
Value Type
Source
Value
Invoice Distribution Account Payables Standard
Segment
XXDepartment
25. Click OK.
26. Click Save and Create Another.
Creating a Third Rule for the Distribution Account.
27. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXExpense Account
Short Name
XXEXP_ACCT
Description
Expense Account
Chart of Accounts
XXLedger
Rule Type
Account Combination
28. In the Rules region, click Add Row.
29. Enter the following:
Field Value
Priority
1
Value Type
Source
Value
Invoice Distribution Account Payables Standard
30. Click Save and Close.
31. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 7
Practice 12-2: Creating a Description Rule
Overview
In this practice, you will define a description rule for Payables invoices.
Description rules are used to build the descriptions for subledger journal entry headers and lines.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables > Manage Description Rules.
4. Select Create in the Search Results table.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXDescription
Short Name
XXDESC
Description
Description for Invoices.
6. In the Rules region, click Create.
7. Enter the text Supplier:
8. Click the Source button.
9. In the Search dropdown, select: Name and enter Supplier Name.
10. Click the arrow pointing right.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 8
11. Select Supplier Name for Subledger Application: Payables.
12. Click OK.
13. Enter the text (including the comma): , Supplier Number: .
14. Click the Source button.
15. In the Search drop-down list, select Name and enter Invoice Supplier Number.
16. Click the arrow pointing right.
17. Select Invoice Supplier Number for the Payables Subledger.
18. Click OK.
19. Enter the text (including the comma): , Invoice Number: .
20. Click the Source button.
21. In the Search drop-down list, select Name and enter Invoice Number.
22. Click the arrow pointing right.
23. Select Invoice Number for the Payables Subledger.
24. Click OK.
25. Select Save and Close twice.
26. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 9
Practice 12-3: Creating Two Journal Line Rules
Overview
In this practice, you will create two journal line rules, one for the credit and one for the debit of the journal.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables > Manage Journal Line Rules.
4. Select Create in the Search Results table.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXCredit Line
Short Name
XXCREDIT
Description
Line rule for the credit.
Event Class
Invoices
Side
Credit
Accounting Class
Liability
Merge Matching Lines
No
6. Click Save and Create Another.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 10
7. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXDebit Line
Short Name
XXDEBIT
Description
Line rule for the debit.
Event Class
Invoices
Side
Debit
Accounting Class
Expense
Merge Matching Lines
No
8. Click Save and Close.
9. Click Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 10
Practice 12-4: Creating a Journal Entry Rule Set
Overview
In this practice, you will create a new Journal Entry Rule Set. The journal entry rule set is a collection of rules. These rules are used to create balanced journal entries for a given event type.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables > Manage Subledger Journal Entry Rule Sets.
4. Select Create in the Search Results table.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXJERS
Short Name
XXJERS
Description
Invoice rule set.
Event Class
Invoices
Event Type
All
Chart of Accounts
XXLedger
Assign Your Account Combination Rule
6. In the Journal Entry region, select Description Rule: XXDescription.
7. In the Journal Lines region, click Add Row.
8. Enter the following:
Field Value
Line Type
Credit
Journal Line Rule
XXCredit Line
Account Combination Rule
XXLiability
XXDepartment
XXDepartment
9. In the Journal Lines region, click Add Row.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 11
10. Enter the following:
Field Value
Line Type
Debit
Journal Line Rule
XXDebit Line
Account Combination Rule
XXExpense Account
11. Click Save and Close.
12. Select the row header for XXJERS.
13. Select Actions > Change Status > Activate.
14. Click Yes
15. Verify that the Status of the XXJERS is Active.
16. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 12
Practice 12-5: Duplicating and Modifying an Accounting Method
Overview
In this practice, you will duplicate the Standard Accrual method and replace the Payables invoice Journal entry rules set with your journal entry rule set. You should then attach your new accounting method to your secondary ledger.
Since you have not defined a secondary ledger yet you can practice attaching your new accounting method to your primary ledger. Attaching an accounting method to a secondary ledger is done in the same way.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables > Manage Accounting Methods.
4. Highlight the Standard Accrual row.
5. Click Actions > Duplicate.
6. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXSL Accrual
Short Name
XXSL_ACCRUAL
Chart of Accounts
XXLedger
7. Click Save and Close.
8. On the Invoices row, enter the Effective End Date = Yesterday’s date.
9. Click Save.
10. In the Journal Entry Rule set Assignments region, click Add Row.
11. Enter the following:
Field Value
Event Class
Invoices
Event Type
All
Rule Set
XXJERS
Effective Start Date
Today’s date
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 13
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Highlight your XXSL Accrual row and click Edit.
14. Click the Activate button.
15. Click Yes.
16. Click OK.
17. Click Save and Close.
18. Click Done.
Attaching Your New Accounting Method to Your Ledger.
19. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance.
20. Select the Financials Offering.
21. Click Setup in the Administration area.
22. Click on General Ledger from the Functional Areas list.
23. Next to the first Specify Ledger Options task click on the hyperlink in the Scope column.
24. Select the Specify Ledger Options radio button.
25. In the Secondary Ledger field, select Select and Add.
26. Click Apply and Go to Task.
27. Select your XXLedger US from the list.
28. Scroll to the bottom and click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 14
29. In the Subledger Accounting area, select XXSL Accrual for the Accounting Method.
30. Click Save and Close.
Note: We will test your new accounting method in another lesson.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 15
Practice 12-6: Reviewing Accounting for a Payables Invoice
Please skip this practice. The training environment is not set up to support it.
-_-_-_-_-_- INSTRUCTOR NOTE -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-
In preparation for this course instructor should have created a custom Subledger Accounting Method and attached it to the US IFRS Secondary Ledger, following the same steps as in practices 12-1 to 12-5, just using the US Chart of Accounts instead of Chart of Accounts: XXLedger.
The instructor will also have entered and accounted a sample AP invoice.
Participants can review the resulting subledger accounting entries and general ledger journals.
-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_- _-_-_-_-_-_-
Overview
In this practice, you will:
Review an AP invoice.
Review the resulting subledger accounting entries and general ledger journals.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Creating an AP invoice. This step has been performed by the instructor in advance. You can review the invoice.
1. Navigate to: Payables > Invoices > Create. Field Value
Business Unit
US1 Business Unit
Supplier
Advanced Corp
Number
GR_STDINV_004
Amount
1,000.00 USD
2. Create two lines: Field Value
Line 1
Amount
400.00
Distribution Combination
101.10.15160.110.000.000
Line 2
Amount
600.00
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 16
Distribution Combination
101.10.15160.120.000.000
3. Expand Taxes, click on Edit Taxes and overwrite tax amounts to 0.00
4. Validate and Account in Draft.
Submitting the Create Accounting Process in Final / Post. (This has already been performed by the instructor in advance, so you can simply review the accounting for the invoice.)
1. Navigate to: Payables > Invoices.
2. Click on the Tasks panel tab: Accounting > Create Accounting.
3. Enter or accept the following:
Field Value
Subledger Application
Payables
Ledger
US Primary Ledger
Process Category
Invoices
End Date
Today
Accounting Mode
Final
Process Events
All
Report Style
Detail
Transfer to General Ledger
Yes
Post in General Ledger
Yes
Journal Batch
Lesson 12
Include User Transaction Identifiers
No
4. Click Submit.
5. Select OK.
Viewing the results of the Create Accounting run. This has already been performed by the instructor in advance.
6. Navigate to: More…Tools > Scheduled Processes.
7. Click Refresh until the Create Accounting Execution Report, Status: Succeeded.
8. Select the row header for the Search Results: Name: Create Accounting Execution Report: status row.
9. The Create Accounting Execution Report, #####: Details region will appear below.
10. Scroll to the bottom of the page and select the Output Name: Default Document link.
11. A PDF report display appears. Click the Download icon and Save to your desktop. The file name is outputDocument.pdf.
12. Open the file from the desktop to view the report results.
Note: Notice that the secondary ledger has represented the accounting differently than the primary ledger. The secondary ledger’s liability department is the same as the distribution accounts.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 17
Reviewing the AP invoice
13. Navigate to: Payables > Invoices.
14. Click on the Tasks panel tab: Invoices > Manage Invoices
15. Search for Invoice Number: GR_STDINV_004
16. Click on the invoice number in the search results to open the Manage Invoice page
Note: You can review the invoice accounting entries for both the primary and the secondary ledger by clicking on the Accounting Status: Final hyperlink in the Invoice Summary panel.
Reviewing the Subledger Journal Entry.
17. Navigate to: Payables > Invoices.
18. Click on the Tasks panel tab and click Accounting > Review Journal Entries.
19. Enter Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
20. Optionally enter Transaction Number Equals: GR_STDINV_004
21. Click Search.
22. Click View Journal Entry.
23. Click View Transaction.
24. Click Done three times.
Viewing the General Ledger Journals.
1. Navigate to: General Accounting > Journals.
2. Change your Data Access Set to US Corp Ledger Set.
3. Click on the Tasks panel tab: Journals > Manage Journals
4. Enter Journal Batch: Starts with: Lesson 12.
5. Click Search.
6. Click on the Journal Batch name link on the US Primary Ledger row. Note: You are now viewing the General Ledger journal.
7. Click on the Credit amount link.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 18
8. Click View Journal Entry.
Note: You are now in Subledger Accounting not General Ledger.
9. Click Done twice.
10. Click Cancel.
11. Go back to the Search Results and click on the Journal Batch name link on the US IFRS Secondary Ledger row. Note: You are now viewing the General Ledger journal.
12. Click on a Credit amount link.
13. Click View Journal Entry.
Note: You are now in Subledger Accounting not General Ledger.
14. Click Done twice.
15. Click Cancel.
16. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 13: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Defining Your User as a Procurement Agent.
Creating a Payment Term.
Managing Common Options for Payables and Procurement
Managing Invoice Options
Managing Payment Options
Managing Distribution Sets.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 3
Practice 13-1: Defining Your User as a Procurement Agent
Overview
In this practice, you will be defining your user as a procurement agent.
Prerequisites
You successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Provisioning a Data Role
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables.
4. Next to the Manage Procurement Agents task, click the Selected Scope link.
5. The Select Scope window appears. With the Manage Procurement Agents option selected, select Select and Add from the Business Unit drop-down list.
6. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
7. Search and select the row header for your XXBusiness Unit.
8. Click Save and Close. The Manage Procurement Agents page opens.
9. Click Create.
10. Enter the following:
Field Value
Procurement BU
XXBusiness Unit
Agent
Student, FASXX
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 4
11. Accept all the defaults under Agent Access.
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click OK.
14. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 5
Practice 13-2: Creating a Payment Term
Overview
In this practice, you will be:
Setting the scope for your business unit.
The installments and discounts for the new payment term are:
First installment: 40 percent due in 10 days, with a discount of 5 percent if paid in 7 days.
Second installment: 35 percent due in 20 days, with a discount of 3 percent if paid in 15 days.
Third installment: 25 percent due in 30 days, with a discount of 2 percent if paid in 25 days.
Assigning your XXREFSET set to the payment term.
Prerequisites
You successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Provisioning a Data Role
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables.
4. Next to the Manage Payment Terms task, click the Selected Scope link.
5. The Select Scope window appears. With the Manage Payment Terms option selected, select Select and Add from the Business Unit drop-down list.
6. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
7. Search and select the row header for your XXBusiness Unit.
8. Click Save and Close. The Manage Payment Terms page opens.
9. Click Create.
10. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXPayment Term
Description
Multiple installments with discounts.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 6
11. In the Installments section Click Add Row.
12. Enter the following:
Field Value
Due (%)
40
Days
10
First Discount (%)
5
Days
7
13. In the Installments section Click Add Row.
14. Enter the following:
Field Value
Due (%)
35
Days
20
First Discount (%)
3
Days
15
15. In the Installments section Click Add Row.
16. Enter the following:
Field Value
Due (%)
25
Days
30
First Discount (%)
2
Days
25
17. Click Save.
18. In the Set Assignments section Click Add Row.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 7
19. Click the Set Code list and select XXREFSET and COMMON.
20. Click Save and Close.
Add your Reference Data Set to the Immediate Payment Term.
Note: The first time that you save the Manage Common Options for Payables and Procurement page for a business unit, a default record for the Manage Invoice Options task is automatically created. The Payment Terms field on the Manage Invoice Options page is a required field and the invoice options record is saved using the predefined payment term of Immediate. If your Reference Data Set is not added to the Immediate Payment Term you cannot complete the next practice.
21. Click on the Immediate payment term link.
22. In the Set Assignments region, click Add Row.
23. In the Set Code field enter: XXREFDATA.
24. Click Save and Close.
25. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 8
Practice 13-3: Managing Common Options for Payables and Procurement
Overview
In this practice, you will be:
Verifying that the scope is set for your business unit.
Reviewing default distribution combinations for your business unit.
Prerequisites
You successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Provisioning a Data Role
Creating a Payment Term
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables.
4. Ensure that the Manage Common Options for Payables and Procurement task is scoped for your XXBusiness Unit.
5. Click Manage Common Options for Payables and Procurement.
6. Review the following and enter if necessary. For accounting, review these values and make thoughtful changes id necessary, based upon the previous setup you have accomplished:
Field Value
Liability
01-000-2210-01
Prepayment
01-000-1350-01
Conversion Rate Variance Gain
01-400-7890-01
Conversion Rate Variance Loss
01-400-7890-01
Discount Taken
01-400-7790-01
Miscellaneous
01-400-6120-01
Realized Gain Distribution
01-400-8220-01
Realized Loss Distribution
01-400-8220-01
Conversion Rate Type
Corporate
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 9
7. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 10
Practice 13-4: Managing Invoice Options
Overview
In this practice, you will be:
Setting the scope for your business unit.
Configuring invoice options for your business unit.
Prerequisites
You successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Provisioning a Data Role
Creating a Payment Term
Manage Common Options for Payables and Procurement
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables.
4. Next to the Manage Invoice Options task, click the Selected Scope link.
5. The Select Scope window appears. With the Manage Invoice Options option selected, select Select and Add from the Business Unit drop-down list.
6. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
7. Search and select the row header for your XXBusiness Unit.
8. Click Save and Close. The Manage Invoice Option page opens.
9. Accept or enter.
Section Field Value
Invoice Entry
Recalculate invoice installments
Enable
Invoice Currency
USD
Payment Currency
USD
Pay Group
Standard
Payment Terms
XXPayment Term
Discount
Always take discount
Enable
Payment Request
Pay Group
Standard
Self-Service Invoices
Allow Unit Price Change for Quantity-Based Matches
Price decrease only
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 11
10. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 12
Practice 13-5: Managing Payment Options
Overview
In this practice, you will be:
Verifying that the scope is set for your business unit.
Reviewing the default payment option settings.
Prerequisites
You successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Provisioning a Data Role
Creating a Payment Term
Managing Common Options for Payables and Procurement
Managing Invoice Options
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables.
4. Next to the Manage Invoice Options task, click the Selected Scope link.
5. The Select Scope window appears. With the Manage Payment Options option selected, select Select and Add from the Business Unit drop-down list.
6. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
7. Search and select the row header for your XXBusiness Unit.
8. Click Save and Close. The Manage Payment Option page opens.
9. Review and accept the default payment options.
10. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 13
Practice 13-6: Managing Distribution Sets
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a distribution set for miscellaneous expenses.
Prerequisites
You must have successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Provisioning a Data Role
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
For accounting, review the recommended values and make thoughtful changes based on the previous setup you have accomplished. You may create a distribution set for department or cost center or another segment, based on your chart of account setups you have previously setup.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables.
4. In the Show field drop down select All Tasks.
5. Click on Manage Distribution Sets.
6. Click Create.
7. Enter the following:
Field Value
Business Unit
XXBusiness Unit
Name
XXMiscellaneous Expenses
Description
Distribute miscellaneous expenses to departments 110 and 120
Distribution Percentage
100
8. In the Distribution Set Details region, click Add Row.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 14
9. Enter the following and click Add Row again for Line 2:
Note: There might be a bug. Enter the Distribution Combination first, otherwise you will need to enter some of the information twice.
Column Line 1 Line2
Distribution (%)
50
50
Description
Administration Department
Sales Department
Distribution Combination (or one that fits your setups)
01-110-5620-01
01-120-5620-01
10. Click Save and Close.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Creating Banks, Branches, and Accounts Using a Spreadsheet.
Creating a Payment Document for a Bank Account.
Creating a Disbursement Payment File Format.
Creating the Transmission Configuration.
Creating a Payment System.
Creating a Payment Method.
Creating a Payment Process Profile.
Submitting a Payment Process Request.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 3
Practice 14-1: Creating Banks, Branches, and Accounts Using a Spreadsheet
Overview
In this practice you will be creating a bank, a branch, and an account using a spreadsheet.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > In the Search field, enter Rapid and click the
Search magnifying glass icon.
2. Click on the Define Common Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation task list and then select Create Banks, Branches and Accounts in Spreadsheet.
3. Click OK.
Note: Two tabs are displayed at the bottom of the spreadsheet Instructions and Bank Account.
4. Click the Bank Account tab.
Entering Data
5. Enter your bank, branch, and account information, using the tables below:
Bank Information
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Country
United States
Bank Name
XXBank of America
Branch Information
6. Enter the required branch information: name, optionally add the number, BIC code, and alternate name.
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Branch Name
XXMain Branch
Account Information
7. Enter the required account information: name, number, currency, legal entity, and type. Oracle recommends that you add the cash and clearing account for end of period accounting. For accounting, review the recommended values and make thoughtful changes based on the previous setup you have accomplished.
Required Spreadsheet Column
Value
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 4
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Account Name
XXDisbursements
Account Number
XX123456
Currency
USD
Legal Entity
XXVision America
Account Type
Checking
Cash Account
01-000-1110-01
Cash Clearing Account
01-000-1120-01
8. After preparing the data in the spreadsheet, click the Generate Banks, Branches, and Accounts File button.
9. Save the generated XML file with a unique name,
XX_CE_RAPID_IMPLEMENTATION.xml to your desktop.
Loading the File into Cash Management
10. From Functional Setup Manager select Upload Banks, Branches, and Accounts task.
11. Use the Data File: Browse button to find your XXCE_RAPID_IMPLEMENTATION.xml file.
12. Click Open.
13. Click Submit.
14. Click OK.
15. If you are not taken immediately to the Manage Scheduled Processes page then Navigate to: More…Tools > Scheduled Processes.
16. Verify that the process completed without errors or warnings. The Status should be
Succeeded.
Reviewing the Bank, Branch, and Account Created.
17. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
18. Click Setup.
19. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking > Manage Banks.
20. Highlight your XXBank of America.
21. Click View Branches and View Accounts.
22. Click Done until you are back to the Functional Setup Manager.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 5
Practice 14-2: Creating a Payment Document for a Bank Account
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a payment document for a bank account.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking > Manage Bank Accounts.
4. On the Manage Bank Accounts page, enter XXDisbursements in the Account Name
field.
5. Click Search.
6. In the Search Results region, click on the XXDisbursements link.
7. Click the Edit button at the top of the page.
8. Click Create icon in the Payment Documents region.
9. Enter the following:
Field Value
Payment Document
XXCheck
Paper Stock Type
Blank Stock
First Available Document Number
5001
Format
Laser Check
10. Click OK.
11. Click Save and Close.
12. Click OK.
13. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 6
Practice 14-3: Creating a Disbursement Payment File Format
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a Disbursement Payment File Format using the Standard Check BI Publisher Template.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payments > Manage Formats.
4. In the Search Results region select Disbursement Payment File Formats from the
Select Type field drop down.
Note: The Select Type list is in the middle of the page, not in the upper right.
5. Click the Create button.
6. In the Name field on the Create Format page, enter XXElectronic format.
7. In the Code field, enter XXELECTRONIC.
8. In the BI Publisher Template field, enter CE_ISO20022 if available.
9. Click the Save and Close button.
10. Click the OK button.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 7
Practice 14-4: Creating the Transmission Configuration
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating the transmission configuration.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Selecting the Protocol for the Transmission Configuration
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payments > Manage Transmission Configurations.
4. In the Search Results region select File Transfer Protocol for Static File Names from the Select Protocol field drop down.
5. Click the Create button.
Creating the Transmission Configuration
6. In the Configuration field enter XXTransmission Configuration.
Enter the following:
Name Value
*FTP Server IP Address
payments.training.oracle.com
*FTP Account User Name
FASXX
*FTP Account Password
XX123
*Remote File Directory
/tmp
7. Click Save and Close.
8. Click OK.
9. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 8
Practice 14-5: Creating a Payment System
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a payment system.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payments > Manage Payment Systems.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the Following:
Section Field Value
Header
Name
XXPayments
Code
XXPS
Processing Model
Processor
Bank
XXBank of America
Disbursement
Electronic funds transfer and positive pay
Select
Formats (Click Add)
Name
XXElectronic Format
Transmission Protocols
Name
File Transfer Protocol for Static File Names
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 9
6. Click Save and Add Accounts.
7. Click OK.
Creating a Payment System Account
8. Click the Add Row icon and enter XXPayments Account in the Name field.
9. Click Save and Close.
10. Click OK.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 10
Practice 14-6: Creating a Payment Method
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a payment method.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payments > Manage Payment Methods.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the Following:
Tab or Section Field Value
Header
Name
XXPayment Method
Code
XXPM
Usage Rules
Automatically assign payment method to all payees
Select
Payables
Enable for use in Payables
Select
Business Units (select Specific)
XXBusiness Unit
Payment Process Transaction Types (select Specific)
Payables Document
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 11
6. Accept all other defaults.
7. Click Save and Close.
8. Click OK.
9. Click Done.
Changing the Payment Method on Your Invoices only if you have done the additional activities and have a Supplier and Invoice Available.
10. Navigate to: Payables > Invoices > Tasks panel tab > Manage Invoices.
11. Search for your invoices based on you XXIBM Corp. supplier. If you did not setup any suppliers, you can do this for any invoice you see that has an unpaid amount equal to the invoice amount.
12. Click on the first Invoice Number link.
13. Click on the Installments tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 12
14. Change the Payment Method on each row to XXPayment Method.
15. Click Save and Close.
16. Repeat steps 12 – 15 for you second invoice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 13
Practice 14-7: Creating a Payment Process Profile
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a payment process profile.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payments > Manage Payment Process Profiles.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the Following:
Tab or Section Field Value
Header
Name
XXPayment Process Profile
Code
XXPPP
Payment File Format
Laser Check Format
Processing Type
Printed
Default Payment Document
XXCheck XX Disbursement
Payment File
Send to Printer
Usage Rules
Payment Methods
Specify: XXPayment Method
Disbursement Bank Accounts
Specify: XXDisbursements
Business Units
Specify: XXBusiness Unit
Currencies
All
Reporting
Allow multiple copies for payment file
Select
Condition
All payments
6. Click Save and Close.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 14
Practice 14-8: Submitting a Payment Process Request
Overview
In this practice, you will be submitting a payment process request.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
You have performed the additional activities for creating supplier and invoices.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Payables > Payments > Tasks panel tab > Submit Payment Process Request.
2. Enter or accept the Following:
Tab or Section Field Value
Header
Name
XXPayment Request
Selection Criteria (tab)
Pay Through Date
1 Month from today
From Payment Priority
1
To Payment Priority
99
Date Basis
Pay date
Supplier or Party
XXIBM Corp.( or use same supplier you used in step 11 in Lesson 14-6)
Payment Method
XXPayment Method
Payment and Processing Options (tab): Payment Attributes
Payment Date
Today
Disbursement Bank Account
XXDisbursement
Payment Document
XXCheck
Payment Process Profile
XXPayment Process Profile
Payment Conversion Rate Type
Corporate
Processing Options
Create payment files immediately
Select
Validation Failure Handling
Leave the defaults.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 15
3. Click Submit.
4. Click OK.
5. Scroll down to the bottom of the page and under the Schedule Requests region, click
Refresh until the Format Payment Files has Succeeded.
6. Click on the View Output icon.
7. Click on the ESS_O_XXXXXXX link.
8. Open with: Adobe Acrobat Reader (default).
9. Close all windows until you are back to the payments Overview page.
Printing the Payment.
10. Scroll up to the top region. You may need to click on the refresh icon in the region to update it.
11. Expand your XXPayment Process row.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 16
12. Click on the Action icon arrow.
13. Click Print.
14. Click OK.
15. Click Refresh until the Status is Submitted for Printing.
16. Click Action.
17. Click Record Print Status. If you get an error when doing this, click on the reference number link then click on the Record Print Status button.
18. Click Submit.
19. Click Record the Print Status.
20. Click OK.
21. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 15: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will:
Reviewing Receivables System Options.
Reviewing AutoAccounting Rules.
Reviewing Remit-to Addresses.
Reviewing Receivables Activities.
Reviewing Statement Cycles.
Creating a Customer Profile Class
Creating a Customer
Defining a Transaction Type
Creating Banks, Branches, and Accounts Using a Spreadsheet.
Creating a Receipt Class and Receipt Method
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 3
Practice 15-1: Reviewing Receivables System Options
Overview
In this practice you will be reviewing and setting required system options to configure the Receivables environment. This practice can only be done once. If a setting has been completed when your spreadsheet uploaded, review the settings. If the setting is not set or different, enter the correct value.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Receivables > Manage Receivables System Options.
4. In the Search field select your XXBusiness Unit and click Search.
5. Click on the XXBusiness Unit link.
6. Click the Billing and Revenue tab if it is not already selected.
7. For accounting, review these values and make thoughtful changes if necessary, based upon the previous setup you have accomplished:
Section Field Value
General Information
Split Amount
2,500
Days in days Sales Outstanding Calculation
30
Print remit to address
Selected
Print home country
Selected
Application Rule Set
Line And Tax Prorate
Discount Basis
Invoice Amount
Accounting
Tax Account
01-000-2230-01
Cross Currency Rounding Account
01-400-7990-01
Realized Gains Account
01-400-4430-01
Realized losses Account
01-400-4430-01
Automatic journal import
Selected
Days per Posting Cycle
15
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 4
Section Field Value
Transactions
Tax Invoice Printing Options
Itemize and Sum
Document Number Generation Level
When completed
Customers
Grouping Rule
DEFAULT
AutoInvoice
Purge interface tables
Selected
Maximum Memory in Bytes
3,145,728
Log File Message Level
0
8. Click the Cash Processing tab at the top.
9. Enter these values, for accounting, review these values and make thoughtful changes if necessary, based upon the previous setup you have accomplished:
Section Field Value
General Information
AutoCash Rule Set
Oldest transaction first
Match Receipts By 1
Transaction Number
Chargeback Due Date
Open invoice due date
Accounting
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 5
Section Field Value
Realized Gains Account
01-000-4430-01
Realized losses Account
01-000-4430-01
Cross Currency Rounding Account
01-400-7990-01
Automatic Receipts
Invoices per Commit
500
Receipts per Commit
500
10. Click Save and Close.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 6
Practice 15-2: Reviewing AutoAccounting Rules
Overview
In this practice you will be reviewing the AutoAccounting Rules for your business unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Customer Billing > Manage AutoAccounting Rules.
4. In the Search field select your XXBusiness Unit and click Search.
5. Click on each row to see the Constant Values used on each rule.
6. Click Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 7
Practice 15-3: Reviewing Remit-to Addresses.
Overview
In this practice you will be reviewing the Remit-to Address for your business unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Customer Billing > Manage Remit-to Addresses.
4. Leave the Search field blank and click Search.
5. Click on the Site Number link next to your XX Main Street address.
6. Click Cancel.
7. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 8
Practice 15-4: Reviewing Receivables Activities
Overview
In this practice you will be reviewing the Receivables Activities for your business unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Receivables > Manage Receivables Activities.
4. In the Search field select your XXBusiness Unit and click Search.
5. Click on a Name link to view the details.
6. Click Cancel twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 9
Practice 15-5: Reviewing Statement Cycles
Overview
In this practice you will be reviewing the Receivables Activities for your business unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Receivables > Manage Statement Cycles.
4. In the Interval Search field select Quarterly and click Search.
5. Click Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 10
Practice 15-6: Creating a Customer Profile Class
Overview
In this practice you be defining a customer profile class.
Assumptions
Sign in as the FASXX.Student user assigned to you by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Customer > Show: All Tasks > Manage Receivables Customer Profile Classes..
4. Click the Create icon.
5. Enter Profile Class Name as XXModerate Risk.
6. Enter following information on Profile Class tab:
Section Field Value
Credit and Collections
Collector
Jim Jones
Credit Classification
Moderate Risk
Credit Limit
USD 100000
Conversion Rate Type
Corporate
Terms
Payment Terms
30 Net
Receipt Matching
Match Receipts By
Transaction Number
Invoicing
Grouping Rule
DEFAULT
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 11
7. Accept all other defaults.
8. On Late Charges tab Click Add Row in Currency Settings Region
9. Enter following:
Field Value
Currency
USD – US Dollar
Conversion Rate Type
Corporate
Minimum Receipt Amount
15.00
Minimum Statement Amount
100
Minimum Dunning Amount
100
Minimum Dunning Invoice Amount
15.00
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 12
10. Click Save and Close.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 13
Practice 15-7: Creating a Customer
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a customer with a bill-to site.
Assumptions
Sign in as the FASXX.Student user assigned to you by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Receivables > Billing > Tasks panel tab > Customers > Create Customer.
2. Enter following details:
Section Field Value
Organization Information
Name
XXIBM Corporation
Account Information
Account Description
XXIBM Corporation
Account Type
External
Account Established Date
Six Months Ago (Important for Advanced Collections)
Account Address
Account Address Set
XXREFDATA
(or CUSTSITE)
From Date
Six Months Ago (Important for Advanced Collections)
Address
Site Name
XXNew York
Address Line 1
XX Main Street
City
New York
State
NY
Postal Code
10022
3. Click Save and Close
4. Click Done
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 14
Practice 15-8: Defining a Transaction Type
Overview
In this practice, you define a transaction type for your business unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Customer Billing > Manage Transaction Types.
4. Click the Create icon.
5. Enter these values in the header section:
Field Value
Transaction Type Set
COMMON
Legal Entity
XXVision America
Name
XXInvoices
Transaction Class
Invoice
Transaction Status
Open
From Date
Six months ago (Important for Advanced Collections)
Creation Sign
Positive Sign
Generate Bill
Yes
Credit Memo Type
Credit Memo
Open Receivable
Selected
Allow Freight
Select
Post to GL
Selected
Natural application only
Selected
6. Under Reference Accounts, click Create.
7. In the Business Unit field, select XXBusiness Unit. All the Accounts should default in.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 15
8. Click OK.
9. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 16
Practice 15-9: Defining a Transaction Source
Overview
In this practice, you will define a transaction source for your legal entity.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Customer Billing > > Show: All Tasks Manage Transaction Sources.
4. Click the Create icon.
5. Enter these values in the header section:
Field Value
Transaction Type Set
COMMON
Legal Entity
XXVision America
Name
XXManual
Description
XXManual
Type
Manual
From Date
Six months ago
Automatic transaction numbering
Selected
Last Transaction Number
1000
Standard Transaction Type
Invoice
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 17
6. Click Save and Close.
7. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 18
Practice 15-10: Creating Banks, Branches, and Accounts Using a Spreadsheet
Overview
In this practice you will be creating a bank, a branch and an account using a spreadsheet to use for Customer receipts.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > In the Search field, enter Rapid and click the
Search magnifying glass icon.
2. Click on the Define Common Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation task list and then select Create Banks, Branches and Accounts in Spreadsheet.
Note: Two tabs are displayed at the bottom of the spreadsheet Instructions and Bank Account.
3. Click the Bank Account tab.
Entering Data
4. Enter your bank, branch, and account information, using the tables below:
Bank Information
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Country
United States
Bank Name
XXBank of America
Branch Information
5. Enter the required branch information: name, optionally add the number, BIC code, and alternate name.
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Branch Name
XXMain Branch
Account Information
6. Enter the required account information: name, number, currency, legal entity, and type. Oracle recommends that you add the cash and clearing account for end of period accounting.
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Account Name
XXDeposit
Account Number
XX123456
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 19
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Currency
USD
Legal Entity
XXVision America
Account Type
Checking
Cash Account
01-000-1110-01
Cash Clearing Account
01-000-1120-01
7. After preparing the data in the spreadsheet, click the Generate Banks, Branches, and Accounts File button.
8. Save the generated XML file with a unique name,
XX_CE_RAPID_IMPLEMENTATION.xml to your desktop.
Loading the File into Cash Management
9. From Functional Setup Manager select Upload Banks, Branches, and Accounts task.
10. Use the Data File: Browse button to find your XXCE_RAPID_IMPLEMENTATION.xml file.
11. Click Open.
12. Click Submit.
13. Click OK.
14. If you are not taken immediately to the Manage Scheduled Processes page then Navigate to: More…Tools > Scheduled Processes.
15. Verify that the process completed without errors or warnings. The Status should be
Succeeded.
Reviewing the bank, branch, and account created.
16. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
17. Click Setup.
18. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking > Manage Banks.
19. Highlight your XXBank of America.
20. Click View Branches and View Accounts.
21. Click Done until you are back to the Functional Setup Manager.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 20
Practice 15-11: Creating a Receipt Class and Receipt Method
Overview
In this practice, you will create a manual receipt class, a check method, and attach your bank account to the method.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Customer Payments > Manage Receipt Classes and Methods.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter:
Field Value
Name
XXManual
Creation Method
Manual
Remittance Method
No Remittance
Clearance Method
By Matching
6. Under Receipt Methods click Create.
7. Enter:
Field Value
Name
XXCheck
Printed Name
XXCheck (defaults)
Effective Start Date
Yesterday
8. In the Remittance Bank Accounts tab click Create.
9. Enter the following, for accounting, review these values and make thoughtful changes if necessary based upon the previous setup you have accomplished:
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 21
Section Field Value
Remittance Bank Accounts
Business Unit
XXBusiness Unit
Bank
XXBank of America
Branch
XXMain Branch
Account
XXDeposit
Primary
Selected
Effective Start Date
Yesterday
GL Accounts
Cash
01-000-1110-01 (defaults)
Remittance
01-000-1270-01 (defaults)
Unapplied Receipts
01-000-1310-01 (defaults)
Unidentified Receipts
01-000-1310-01 (defaults)
On-Account Receipts
01-000-1280-01 (defaults)
Unearned Discounts
Unearned Discounts
Earned Discounts
Earned Discounts
10. Click Save and Close twice.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 16: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Receivables
Chapter 16 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 16: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Receivables
Chapter 16
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 16: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Receivables
Chapter 16 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 16
There are no practices for this lesson.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 17: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Managing Bank Statement Transaction Codes.
Managing Bank Statement Transaction Creation Rules.
Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Tolerance Rules.
Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Matching Rules.
Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Rule Sets.
Assigning a Rule Set to your Bank Account.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 3
Practice 17-1: Managing Bank Statement Transaction Codes
Overview
In this practice you be creating transaction codes for check disbursements and for bank fees.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Creating a Transaction Code for EFT Disbursements
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking >Manage Bank Statement Transaction Codes.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Transaction Code
0XX
Description
XXChecks
Transaction Type
Check
Domain
Payments
6. Click Save and Close.
Creating a Transaction Code for Bank Charges.
7. Click Create.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 4
8. Enter the following:
Field Value
Transaction Code
7XX
Description
XXBank Charges
Transaction Type
Fee
9. Click Save and Close.
10. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 5
Practice 17-2: Managing Bank Statement Transaction Creation Rules
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating bank statement transaction creation rules for bank fees.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
GL Chart of account setups for needed accounts has been done.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking > Show: All Tasks > Manage Bank Statement Transaction Creation Rules.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the following (for accounting, review these values and make thoughtful changes if necessary, based upon the previous setup you have accomplished):
Field Value
Name
XXBank Charges
Legal Entity
XXVision America
Type
Fee
Transaction Code
7XX
Type
Fee
Business Unit
XXBusiness Unit
Cash Account
01-000-1110-01
Offset Account
01-000-5620-01
6. Click Save and Close.
7. Click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 6
8. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 7
Practice 17-3: Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Matching Rules
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a bank statement reconciliation matching rule.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking >Show: All Tasks > Manage Bank Statement Reconciliation Matching Rules.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXOne to One
Description
One to one matching rule for Payables.
Transaction Source
Payables
Matching Type
One to One
Matching Criteria
Amount (Defaults)
6. Click Save and Close.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 8
Practice 17-4: Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Tolerance Rules
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a bank statement reconciliation tolerance rule.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking >Show: All Tasks > Manage Bank Statement Reconciliation Tolerance Rules.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXDate and Amount
Description
Date and Amount tolerance for Payables.
Date Tolerance
Enable
Days Before
3
Days After
3
Amount Tolerance
Enable
Amount Below
2
Amount Above
2
6. Click Save and Close.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 9
Practice 17-5: Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Rule Sets
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a bank statement reconciliation rule set.
Assumptions Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking >Show: All Tasks > Manage Bank Statement Reconciliation Rule Sets.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXRule Set
Description
XXRule set for Payables.
6. In the Reconciliation Rules section, click Create.
7. Enter the following:
Field Value
Matching Rule
XXOne to One
Tolerance Rule
XXDate and Amount
8. Click OK.
9. Click Save and Close.
10. Click OK.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 10
Practice 17-6: Assigning a Rule Set to a Bank Account
Overview
In this practice, you will be assigning a rule set to your bank account.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking > Manage Bank Accounts.
4. Search for your account by entering XX in the Account Name field and click Search.
5. Click on the XXDisbursements link.
6. Click on the Controls tab.
7. Click the Edit button.
8. In the Manual Reconciliation Tolerance Rule field enter XXDate and Amount.
9. In the Automatic Reconciliation Rule Set field enter XXRule Set.
10. In the Bank Statement Transaction Creation Rules, click Add.
11. In the Rule field enter XXBank Charges.
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click OK.
14. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 11
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 18: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be creating various setups for Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections. Some of these practices are required and others depending on your collection method are optional. The following practices are:
Getting Started with Advanced Collections Demonstration
Creating an Aging Method
Creating a Collector
Reviewing the Dunning Templates: Instructor Demonstration
Creating a Strategy Task
Creating a Strategy
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 3
Practice 18-1: Getting Started with Advanced Collections Demonstration.
Overview
In this instructor led demonstration, you will be
Viewing Collections Customer Work Area
Viewing the Collections Dashboard
Assumptions
Sign in a Jim.Jones and the same password assigned to your user.
Tasks
View Collections Customer Work Area
1. Sign in a Jim.Jones and the same password assigned to your user.
2. Navigate to: Collections > Customer.
3. Under the Search Customers section, click the Customer List of Values (LOV). Change the value to Account.
4. Enter 10060. Click Search.
5. The Collections Customer work area defaults to the Profile tab. The Profile tab displays the customers: Collector, Business Level view, whether or not to send Dunning Letters and Statements, contact method, payment terms, statement cycle, and discount grace days. This profile is directly linked to the customer profile class in Oracle Fusion
Accounts Receivables.
6. Click the Transactions tab. The customer delinquent invoices are displayed. You can filter by transaction class, due date, include current, or closed transactions. You can take the action of paying, disputing, or adjusting a customer's transaction.
7. Scroll down to the Details section. The details of the transaction selected above are displayed.
8. In the Details Section Click the Activity tab. This tab show information for each particular line selected in the transactions tab.
9. Click the Aging tab to display the customers aging method and details. You can recalculate by changing the Business Unit and Aging Method.
10. Click the Contact tab. The Contact tab displays the details of the primary and secondary contacts for the customer.
11. Click the History tab. The History tab displays the history of correspondence and the transactions included in that correspondence.
12. Click the Communication tab. The Communications tab displays the phone numbers, e- mail, and addresses for the customer.
13. Click the Activities tab. The Activities tab displays action taken on the specific transaction, such as partial payment, a submitted dispute, or adjustment.
14. You can take Notes regarding specific transactions or for the whole account. Click the
Create button and enter your notes in the form that displays. Click the Cancel button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 4
View Collections Dashboard
15. Navigate to: Collections > Collections Dashboard link. The delinquent customers that belong to the collector Jim Jones are displayed.
16. Scroll down to and expand the Activities region. Use the Activities region to create tasks for follow-up action with the customer assigned to the collector. Collectors must be created as Resources in the Customer Relationship Management application to create activities.
17. Expand the Customer Search region. You can filter the list of customers and access the
Collections Customer work area from the Customer Search region.
18. Clicking on any of the links displayed in the Search region takes you to the Collections Customer work area for that specific customer.
Viewing Metrics
19. Navigate to: Collections > Collections Dashboard.
20. Click on the Metrics tab.
21. Search on the Business Unit: US1 Business Unit.
22. Sign out as user Jim.Jones.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 5
Practice 18-2: Creating an Aging Method.
Overview
In this practice you will be creating an aging method because your company requires a unique aging method that is not a Collections predefined aging method.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Select the Financials offering > Setup > Collections > Manage Aging Methods.
2. Click Add Row.
Aging Method Section
3. Enter:
Field Value
Aging Method Name
XX 1 to 120 Aging
Aging Type
7 Bucket
Enable
Yes
Aging Method Set
Common Set
Aging Method Description
Current to 120 Day Aging method.
4. Click Save.
Aging Method Details Section
5. Click Add Row four times.
6. Enter:
Sequence Bucket Type Aging Days From Aging Days To Aging Bucket Heading
0
Current
-9999
0
Current
1
Past Due
1
45
45 Past Due
2
Past Due
46
60
60 Past Due
3
Past Due
61
90
90 Past Due
4
Past Due
91
120
120 Past Due
5
Past Due
121
9999
121+ Past Due
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 6
7. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 7
Practice 18-3: Creating a Collector and a Resource
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating yourself as a collector. Once you have created yourself as a new collector you can assign the collector to customers under the Profile tab on the Customer work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Select the Financials offering > Setup > Collections > Manage Collectors.
2. Click Add Row.
3. Enter your name as Collector Name.
4. Select Employee from the Type list of values.
5. Select your user name (Assigned by the instructor) from the list of values in Employee or Group field.
6. Select Yes to enable the collector.
7. Select US1 BU Set from the Collector Set list of values.
8. Click Save and Close.
Creating a Resource
9. Navigate to Resources > Show: All Tasks > Manage Resources.
10. Click Create.
11. Search for your FAS01.Student from the Person Name field and Employee from the
Usage field.
12. Highlight your row and click Add as Resource.
13. Click OK.
14. Select Collector from the Role drop down.
15. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 8
16. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 9
Practice 18-4: Reviewing Dunning Templates Demonstration
Overview
In this instructor led demonstration, you will be reviewing dunning templates.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: More…Tools > Click the Reports and Analytics link.
2. Expand Shared Folders > Financials > Collections > Correspondence.
3. Click on Collections Send Dunning Letters and then the Edit link.
4. Click the Edit link on one of the templates to open the files to view the contents of the template letter. Close the letter.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 10
Practice 18-5: Creating a Strategy Task
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a manual task.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Select the Financials offering > Setup > Collections > Manage Strategy Tasks.
2. Click Add Row.
3. Enter the following information using the table below:
Field Value
Enabled
Selected
Name
XXFriendly phone call
Description
Customer is slightly past due, make friendly call
Type
Manual
Category
Phone Call
How long will strategy wait until it executes this task
0 days
How long will strategy wait after it executes this task
0 days
Optional
Y
4. Click Save and Close twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 11
Practice 18-6: Creating a Strategy
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a strategy, assign tasks, and assign them sequentially.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Select the Financials offering > Setup > Collections > Show: All Tasks > Manage Collections Strategies.
Creating a Strategy Template Group
2. Click Create.
3. Enter:
Field Value
Group Name
XX US Customers
Strategy Level
Account
Change Strategy per Tolerance
No
Enabled
Yes
Start Date
Select today’s date from the pick list
End Date
Blank
Customer Segment Section
4. Enter the following information:
Field Values
View Name
IEX F_ACCOUNTS_V
Identifier
CUST_ACCOUNT_ID
Strategies Section
5. Click Add Row.
Field Values
Method Name
XXUSA Strategy Good
Lowest Applicable Score
50
6. Click the Add Row icon.
Field Values
Method Name
XXUSA Strategy Bad
Lowest Applicable Score
0
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 12
Tasks Section:
7. Select the XXUSA Good Strategy. Click Add Row for each new row.
Field Value
Order
10
Name
XXFriendly Phone Call
Order
20
Name
XXFriendly Phone Call
Order
30
Name
XXFriendly Phone Call
8. Select the XXUSA Bad Strategy. Click Add Row for each new row.
Field Value
Order
10
Name
Friendly Phone Call
Order
20
Name
Hard Customer Call
9. Click Save and Close twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 19: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Updating an Existing Assets Configuration
Review Asset Key Flexfield Demonstration
Review Asset System Control Options Demonstration
Define Values for Major and Minor Category
Define Values for Asset Clearing and CIP Clearing Accounts
Managing Fiscal Years
Managing Asset Books
Managing Asset Categories
Provisioning Data Roles to the User Account
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 3
Practice 19-1: Updating an Existing Assets Configuration
Overview
In this practice, you will:
Open an Update spreadsheet.
Update an existing Assets configuration.
Validate your data.
Generate a configuration file.
Upload your data.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
To use the spreadsheet, ADF Desktop Integrator (DI) must be installed first.
Note: In the classroom, ADFdi is already installed so skip to step.5.
1. In the application, navigate to: Tools > Download ADF Desktop Integrator.
2. Click on the file that opens.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 4
3. Click setup.exe.
4. Follow the prompts.
Tasks
5. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Update Fixed Assets Configuration in Spreadsheet.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Yes.
8. Reenter your login credentials.
9. On the Update Fixed Assets Configuration spreadsheet, click the Categories tab.
10. Click the Download button.
11. Count down the list to find an asset category that matches your number. For example if your 03, count down 3.
Change the Description by adding your XX or if there are more students than assets, click on the Locations tab.
12. Click the Download button.
13.
14. Add a new location by copying any existing location.In the BUILDING column, enter XX500 where XX is the number your instructor assigned you.
15. Return to the Rapid Setup Instructions tab.
16. Click Validate Data.
17. Ensure that your validation report contains no errors and return to the Rapid Setup Instructions tab.
18. Click Generate Configuration File.
19. Save the file to your computer.
To upload your data:
20. Navigate to: Tools > File Import and Export.
21. On the File Import and Export page, click the Create icon.
22. Select your saved zip file and the account fin/assets/import.
23. Click Save and Close. Your file now appears in the Search Results section.
24. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Upload Fixed Assets Configuration in Spreadsheet.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 5
25. On the Upload Fixed Assets Configuration page, select your data file as a zip file and click Submit.
26. On the Confirmation window, note your process ID and click OK.
27. Navigate to: Tools > Scheduled Processes.
28. On the Scheduled Processes page, search for your process ID.
29. If it is still running, wait a moment and click the Refresh icon until the Status shows that the upload has finished successfully.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 6
Practice 19-2: Review Asset Key Flexfields Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, the instructor will review the Asset Key Flexfields.
Assumptions
The instructor will sign in with their user.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields.
2. On the Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields page, click on the Search button.
3. Click Category Flexfield.
4. Click Manage Structures.
5. Click Search.
6. Place Cursor on the Asset Category Flexfield.
7. Click Edit.
8. Select the segment Major Category and click Edit.
9. Review Attributes for the Major Category Segment.
10. Click Cancel twice.
11. Click Done.
12. Select the Location Flexfield.
13. Click Manage Structures.
14. Click Search.
15. Place the cursor on the Asset Location Flexfield.
16. Click the Edit icon.
17. Select segment State/County and Click the Edit icon.
18. Click Cancel twice.
19. Click Done twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 7
Practice 19-3: Define Values for Major and Minor Category
Overview
In this practice, you create a major and minor category value by using the Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields page from the Setup and Maintenance work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
In this practice, you are the asset accounting manager at your company and your manager has requested that you add a category for Office Supplies with a minor category of Printer.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields.
2. Click Search.
3. Select Category Flexfield.
4. Click Manage Structure Instances.
5. Click Search.
6. Select the name Category and click the Edit icon.
7. To add a major category value, click FA_MAJOR_CATEGORY.
8. On the Manage Value Sets page, click Manage Values.
9. On the Manage Values page, click Search to view a list of the major category values that have already been defined in the Search Results section. Note that XXOFFICE SUPPLIES is not currently in the list.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 8
10. Click the Create icon.
11. On the Create Value page, enter Value: XXOFFICE SUPPLIES.
12. Enter Description: XXOffice Supplies.
13. Click Save and Close. Note that XXOFFICE SUPPLIES now appears in the Search Results.
14. Click Save.
15. You will now create a minor category value.
16. On the Manage Value Sets page, click the Cancel button.
17. On the Edit Key Flexfield Structure Instance page, click FA_MINOR_CATEGORY.
18. Click Manage Values.
19. Click the Create icon.
20. Enter Value: XXPRINTER.
21. Enter Description: XXPrinter.
22. Select XXOFFICE SUPPLIES in the Independent Value field.
23. Click Save and Close. XX PRINTER now appears in the Search Results.
24. On the Manage Values page, click Done.
25. On the Manage Value Sets page, click Cancel.
26. On the Edit Key Flexfield Structure Instance, click Cancel.
27. On the Manage Key Flexfield Structure Instances, click Done.
28. On the Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields page, click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 9
Practice 19-4: Define Values for Asset Clearing and CIP Clearing Accounts
Overview
In this practice, you will create asset clearing accounts that you will use for your asset categories.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Key Flexfields.
2. On the Manage Key Flexfields page click Search.
3. Place your cursor on the Accounting Flexfield and click Manage Structure Instances.
4. Click Search on the Manage Structure Instances Page.
5. Place your cursor on US Chart of Accounts and click on the Edit icon.
6. Place your Cursor on Account segment and click on the Corporate Account Value Set Code link.
7. Click Manage Values.
8. Click Search on the Manage Values page.
9. Click on the Create icon.
30. Define Values based on the following table (15910 + XX/15930 + XX where XX is the number your instructor assigned you)
10. :
Student Number
Value
Description
Account Type
01
15911/15931
01_Asset Clearing/01_CIP Clearing
Asset
02
15912/15932
02_Asset Clearing/02_CIP Clearing
Asset
03
15913/15933
03_Asset Clearing/03_CIP Clearing
Asset
04
15914/15934
04_Asset Clearing/04_CIP Clearing
Asset
05
15915/15935
05_Asset Clearing/05_CIP Clearing
Asset
06
15916/15936
06_Asset Clearing/06_CIP Clearing
Asset
07
15917/15937
07_Asset Clearing/07_CIP Clearing
Asset
08
15918/15938
08_Asset Clearing/08_CIP Clearing
Asset
09
15919/15939
09_Asset Clearing/09_CIP Clearing
Asset
10
15920/15940
10_Asset Clearing/10_CIP Clearing
Asset
11
15921/15941
11_Asset Clearing/11_CIP Clearing
Asset
12
15922/15942
12_Asset Clearing/12_CIP Clearing
Asset
13
15923/15943
13_Asset Clearing/13_CIP Clearing
Asset
14
15924/15944
14_Asset Clearing/14_CIP Clearing
Asset
15
15925/15945
15_Asset Clearing/15_CIP Clearing
Asset
16
15926/15946
16_Asset Clearing/16_CIP Clearing
Asset
17
15927/15947
17_Asset Clearing/17_CIP Clearing
Asset
11. Click Save and Close.
12. Click Done.
13. Click Cancel twice.
14. Click Done twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 10
Practice 19-5: Review Asset System Control Options
Overview
In this demonstration, the instructor will review the Asset System Control options.
Assumptions
The instructor will sign in with their user.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage System Controls.
2. Review the Manage System Controls Options.
3. Click Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 11
Practice 19-6: Define Values for Asset Clearing and CIP Clearing Accounts
Overview
In this practice, you will create asset clearing accounts that you will use for your asset categories.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields.
2. On the Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields page click Search.
3. Place your cursor on the Accounting Flexfield and click Manage Structure Instances.
4. Click Search on the Manage Structure Instances Page.
5. Place your cursor on US Chart of Accounts and click on the Edit icon.
6. Place your Cursor on Account segment and click on the Corporate Account Value Set Code link.
7. Click Manage Values.
8. Click Search on the Manage Values page.
9. Click on the Create icon.
10. Define Values based on the following table:
Student Number
Value
Description
Account Type
01
15911/15931
01_Asset Clearing/01_CIP Clearing
Asset
02
15912/15932
02_Asset Clearing/02_CIP Clearing
Asset
03
15913/15933
03_Asset Clearing/03_CIP Clearing
Asset
04
15914/15934
04_Asset Clearing/04_CIP Clearing
Asset
05
15915/15935
05_Asset Clearing/05_CIP Clearing
Asset
06
15916/15936
06_Asset Clearing/06_CIP Clearing
Asset
07
15917/15937
07_Asset Clearing/07_CIP Clearing
Asset
08
15918/15938
08_Asset Clearing/08_CIP Clearing
Asset
09
15919/15939
09_Asset Clearing/09_CIP Clearing
Asset
10
15920/15940
10_Asset Clearing/10_CIP Clearing
Asset
11
15921/15941
11_Asset Clearing/11_CIP Clearing
Asset
12
15922/15942
12_Asset Clearing/12_CIP Clearing
Asset
13
15923/15943
13_Asset Clearing/13_CIP Clearing
Asset
14
15924/15944
14_Asset Clearing/14_CIP Clearing
Asset
15
15925/15945
15_Asset Clearing/15_CIP Clearing
Asset
16
15926/15946
16_Asset Clearing/16_CIP Clearing
Asset
17
15927/15947
17_Asset Clearing/17_CIP Clearing
Asset
11. Click Save and Close.
12. Click Done.
13. Click Cancel twice.
14. Click Done twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 12
Practice 19-7: Managing Fiscal Years
Overview
In this practice, you will create a fiscal year by using the Manage Fiscal Years page from the Setup and Maintenance work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
In this practice, you are an asset accounting manager at your company and need to define a new fiscal year according to your company's reporting and tax regulations.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Fiscal Years.
4. Click the Create icon.
5. Enter a unique Name: XXFIS YR.
6. Enter a unique Description: XXFiscal Year.
7. Click the Add Row icon.
8. Enter a Fiscal Year: (enter the current year).
9. Enter a Start Date: 01/01/XX.
10. Enter an End Date: 12/31/XX.
11. Enter a Mid Year Start Date: 7/1/XX.
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 13
Practice 19-8: Managing Asset Calendars
Overview
In this Practice, you will create a monthly calendar by using the Manage Calendars page from the Setup and Maintenance work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
As the asset accounting manager, you have defined a fiscal year and now need to define a new calendar using the fiscal year you just defined.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Asset Calendars.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter a unique Name: XXMTH CAL.
4. Enter a unique Description: XXMonthly Calendar.
5. Select the Fiscal Year Name: Select the fiscal year you created earlier.
6. Enter the Periods per Year: 12
7. Select the Period Suffix: Calendar.
8. Click the Add Row icon.
9. Enter the first period:
Period Name: JAN-YY (YY is the current year).
Period Number: 1 Start Date: 1/1/YY End Date: 1/31/YY
10. Click the Add Row icon to enter another period. Note that the values for Period Number, Start Date, and End Date have been entered automatically. You only need to enter the first three letter of the month in the Period Name field: FEB.
11. Continue adding periods until you have entered all 12 periods.
12. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 14
13. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 15
Practice 19-9: Managing Prorate Conventions
Overview
In this Practice, you will create a Prorate Convention by using the Manage Prorate Conventions page from the Setup and Maintenance work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
As the asset accounting manager, you have defined a fiscal year and now need to define a new prorate convention using the fiscal year you just defined.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Prorate Conventions.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter a unique Name: XXPRO CON.
4. Enter a unique Description: XXMonthly Prorate Convention.
5. Select the Fiscal Year Name: Select the fiscal year you created earlier.
6. Enable Depreciate when placed in service option.
7. Select Reference Data Set as US1 BU Set.
8. Click the Add Row icon.
9. Enter the following details:
Start Date: Accept Default Value
End Date: 1/31/YY
Prorate Date: 01/01/YY
10. Click the Add Row icon to update the values for remaining periods. Note that the values for
Start Date, End Date and Prorate Date have been entered automatically.
11. Continue adding periods until you have entered all 12 periods.
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 16
Practice 19-10: Managing Asset Books
Overview
In this Practice you will create a corporate depreciation book by using the Manage Books page from the Setup and Maintenance work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
In this practice, you are an asset accounting manager for your company and need to define a new corporate book for your company. The corporate book will store all of your company's asset information in accordance with statutory requirements and your company's corporate policy.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Asset Books.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter a unique Name: XXUS CORP (replacing XX with your initials).
Note: XX cannot be numeric.
4. Enter a unique Description: XX US Corporate Book.
5. Select a Book Class: Corporate
Note: When you define a corporate book, the name of the corporate book you are defining is populated automatically into the Associated Corporate Book field.
6. Select a Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
7. Select a Depreciation Calendar: XX MTH CAL (select the calendar you created earlier).
Note: The Fiscal Year Name is populated automatically.
8. Select a Prorate Calendar: XX MTH CAL (select the calendar you created earlier).
9. Select the Current Period: Enter the current month and year.
10. Select how to Divide Depreciation: Evenly
11. Check the following check boxes: Depreciate if retire in the first year Allow amortized changes
Allow cost sign changes Allow ledger posting
Accounts Region
Enter the following account information:
Field Value
Account Defaults
101.10.78990.000.000.000
Net Book Value Retired Gain
78530
Net Book Value Retired Loss
78540
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 17
Proceeds of Sale Gain
78510
Proceeds of Sale Loss
78520
Proceeds of Sale Clearing
15930
Cost of Removal Gain
78530
Cost of Removal Loss
78540
Cost of Removal Clearing
24220
Deferred Depreciation Expense
68800
Deferred Depreciation Reserve
16800
Rules section: Reference Data Groups tab
Accept the default Reference Data Set Code for all reference data objects except for Asset Prorate Conventions. Enter US1 BU Set for Asset Prorate convention
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click Done
14. Navigate to Setup and Maintenance > Manage Fixed Asset Lookups Search for Lookup Type: ORA_FA; Click on ORA_FA_ALLOW_GROUP.
15. Add your book name as your lookup Code.Search for your book XXUS CORP (replacing XX with your initials)
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 18
16. Navigate to Setup and Maintenance > Manage Asset Books
17. Go to Advanced Rules tab and select all check boxes. Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 19
Practice 19-11: Managing Asset Categories
Overview
In this Practice you will create a corporate depreciation book by using the Manage Books page from the Setup and Maintenance work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
You are an asset accounting manager for your company. You created category values and now need to define a category with a major category of Office Supplies and a minor category of Printer.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Asset Categories.
2. Click Create.
3. Select a Major Category: XXOFFICE SUPPLIES (this is the major category value you created earlier).
4. Select a Minor Category: XXPRINTER (this is the minor category value you created earlier).
5. Enter a Description: Printer
6. Accept the default Category Type: Non-lease
7. Accept the default Ownership: Owned
8. Select the Property Type: Personal
9. Select the Property Class: 1245 property
10. Check the following check boxes:
Capitalized Enabled
In physical inventory
11. In the Books section, click the Add Row icon.
12. Select a Book: XXUS CORP
13. On the Accounts tab, enter the following account information: Please note that the XX_ACCOUNT for Asset Clearing should be 15910 + XX (where XX is the number assigned by your instructor). Please note that the XX_ACCOUNT for CIP Clearing should be 15930 + XX (where XX is the number assigned by your instructor).
Account Value
Asset Cost
101.10.15170.000.000.000
Asset Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Depreciation Expense
101.10.68170.121.000.000
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 20
Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16170.000.000.000
Bonus
101.10.68170.121.000.000
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 21
Depreciation Expense
Bonus Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16170.000.000.000
CIP Cost
101.10.15400.000.000.000
CIP Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Unplanned Depreciation Expense
101.10.68170.121.000.000
14. Select Default Depreciation Expense Combination.
15. On the Default Rules tab, click the Add Row icon.
16. Select a Method: STL
17. Select the Life in Years: 5
18. Select the Life in Months: 0
19. Select a Prorate Convention: XXPRO CON
20. Select a Retirement Convention: XXPRO CON
21. Click Save and Close.
22. Place your Cursor on Major Category-Vehicle and Minor Category-Standard Row.
23. Click on Edit Icon
24. In the Books section, click the Add Row icon.
25. Select a Book: XXUS CORP
26. On the Accounts tab, enter the following account information:
Account Value
Asset Cost
101.10.15150.000.000.000
Asset Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Depreciation Expense
101.10.68150.121.000.000
Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16150.000.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Expense
101.10.68150.121.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16150.000.000.000
CIP Cost
101.10.15400.000.000.000
CIP Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Unplanned Depreciation Expense
101.10.68170.121.000.000
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 20
27. Select Default depreciation expense combination.
28. On the Default Rules tab, click the Add Row icon.
29. Select a Method: STL
30. Select the Life in Years: 4
31. Select the Life in Months: 0
32. Select a Prorate Convention: XX PRO CON
33. Select a Retirement Convention: XX PRO CON
34. Click Save and Close.
35. Place your Cursor on Major Category-Vehicle and Minor Category-Heavy row.
36. Click the Edit icon.
37. In the Books region, click the Add Row icon.
38. Select a Book: XXUS CORP
39. On the Accounts tab, enter the following account information:
Account Value
Asset Cost
101.10.15150.000.000.000
Asset Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Depreciation Expense
101.10.68150.121.000.000
Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16150.000.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Expense
101.10.68150.121.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16150.000.000.000
CIP Cost
101.10.15400.000.000.000
CIP Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Unplanned Depreciation Expense
101.10.68170.121.000.000
40. Select Default depreciation expense combination.
41. On the Default Rules tab, click the Add Row icon.
42. Select a Method: STL
43. Select the Life in Years: 4
44. Select the Life in Months: 0
45. Select a Prorate Convention: XX PRO CON
46. Select a Retirement Convention: XX PRO CON
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 21
47. Click Save and Close.
48. Place your Cursor on the Major Category-Building and Minor Category-Office row.
49. Click on the Edit Icon.
50. In the Books section, click the Add Row icon.
51. Select a Book: XXUS CORP
52. On the Accounts tab, enter the following account information:
Account Value
Asset Cost
101.10.15120.000.000.000
Asset Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Depreciation Expense
101.10.68120.121.000.000
Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16120.000.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Expense
101.10.68120.121.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16120.000.000.000
CIP Cost
101.10.15400.000.000.000
CIP Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Unplanned Depreciation Expense
101.10.68170.121.000.000
53. Select the Default depreciation expense combination.
54. On the Default Rules tab, click the Add Row icon.
55. Select a Method: STL
56. Select the Life in Years: 30
57. Select the Life in Months: 0
58. Select a Prorate Convention: XXPRO CON
59. Select a Retirement Convention: XXPRO CON
60. Click Save and Close.
61. Place your Cursor on Major Category-Computer and Minor Category-Hardware row.
62. Click the Edit Icon.
63. In the Books section, click the Add Row icon.
64. Select a Book: XXUS CORP
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 22
65. On the Accounts tab, enter the following account information:
Account Value
Asset Cost
101.10.15160.000.000.000
Asset Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Depreciation Expense
101.10.68160.121.000.000
Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16160.000.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Expense
101.10.68160.121.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16160.000.000.000
CIP Cost
101.10.15400.000.000.000
CIP Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Unplanned Depreciation Expense
101.10.68170.121.000.000
66. Select the Default depreciation expense combination.
67. On the Default Rules tab, click the Add Row icon.
68. Select a Method: STL
69. Select the Life in Years: 4
70. Select the Life in Months: 0
71. Select a Prorate Convention: XXPRO CON
72. Select a Retirement Convention: XXPRO CON
73. Click Save and Close.
74. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 23
Practice 19-12: Provisioning Data Roles to the User Account
Overview
In this Practice you will learn to provision data roles for the Asset Book to your User Account.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
In this Practice you are an asset accounting manager at your company and need to assign the Data Role for the Asset Book to your User Account.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Provision Roles to Implementation Users for Asset Books.
2. On the Oracle Identity Manager page, Click Administration.
3. On the Welcome page, click on the Advanced Search-Users link in the Users section.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 24
4. Enter your user name assigned by the instructor in the User Login field and click on
Search.
1.
5. Click on Your User Name in the Display Name Field.
6. Click on Roles to search and assign the Data Role related to your Asset Book.
7. Click Assign to search and assign roles to your User Account.
8. Enter %XX% in the Display Name Field and click Search.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 25
9. Select the Roles related to your Asset Book and click Add to assign the roles.
10. Close Oracle Identity Manager tab from the Browser.
11. Log out from the Instance and Log in again.
12. Navigate to: Fixed Assets > Assets > Tasks.
13. From the Tasks pane, click Add Asset.
15. On the Book list, verify that your Asset Book appears in the list.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 26
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 20: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Reviewing the Expenses System Options.
Creating an expense report template.
Setting warning and error limits on a conversion rate demonstration.
Viewing a conversion rate policy warning and error.
Setting Up a Car Rental Policy.
Setting Up an Airfare Policy.
Setting Up a Miscellaneous Expense Policy.
Setting Up a Meals Expense Policy.
Setting Up a Mileage Expense Policy.
Setting Up an Accommodations Expense Policy.
Setting up a Corporate Credit Card
Creating a Corporate Card Program
Setting Up a Corporate Card Usage Policy Warning (Demonstration)
Creating Receipt and Notification Rules.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 3
Practice 20-1: Reviewing the Expenses System Options
Overview
In this practice, you will review the Expenses System Options.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense System Options.
2. On the Manage Expenses System Options page you can define system options for all business units or set options for a specific business unit.
3. Review the three sections in the Manage Expense System Options page:
User Options for Expense Report
Corporate Options for Expense Report
Processing Options for Expense Report
Specific Business Units
4. Click the Reset to Default Options button on the right-hand side of the page and notice how some of the options return to the default setting.
5. In the User Options for Expense Report section, change the Allow choice of reimbursement currency during expense entry to so you can choose a reimbursement currency when creating expense entries.
6. In the Corporate Options for Expense Report section, select the Enable Terms and Agreement check box to enforce expense terms and agreements for all business units. This controls whether employees are required to select the I have read the company policies before submitting expense reports check box.
7. Select a value from the Printable Expense Report Format list.
8. In the Processing Options for Expense Report section, select Third Party in the Pay Expense Reports Through choice list. This allows your expense reports to be paid through a third-party legacy application within your company or an outside supplier.13.
9. In the Specific Business Units section, select a business unit, Japan for example, and click the Edit button.
If you business unit doesn’t exist in the Specific Business Units section, click Create and select an applicable Business Unit from the Create System Options: Specific Business Unit page.
10. Review the choices in the Edit Expenses System Options: Business Unit page. Although the choices are similar to the options on the Manage Expense System Options page, the choices you make on this page will apply only to the specific business unit you have selected.
11. Scroll down to the Processing Options for Expense Report section.
12. In the Employee Liability Account section, select the Define value specific to business unit.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 4
13. Open the box and change the LoB to a different LoB.
14. Select OK.
15. Notice how the LoB number changes in your Employee Liability Account.
16. Select Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 5
Practice 20-2: Creating an Expense Report Template
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating expense types that are applicable to each business unit. You will complete the following tasks:
Creating an expense report template.
Creating four expense types.
Defining the expense types permitted to be itemized for the itemization-required expense type of Hotel.
Specifying Expense Requirements.
Confirming that created expense types appear in the expense report template.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Creating an Expense Report Template
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Templates.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter Name: XXTemplate.
4. Accept the default effective start date.
5. Select US1 Business Unit.
6. Click Save.
Creating an Expense Type for Domestic Airfare
7. Select the Expense Types tab.
8. Click the Create icon.
9. Enter Name: Domestic Airfare.
10. Select Category: Airfare.
11. Enter Account: 60512.
12. From the Save and Close drop down, click Save and Create Another.
Creating an Expense Type for Room Charge
13. Click the Receipt Requirement tab.
14. Enter Name: Room Charge.
15. Select Category: Accommodations.
16. Enter Account: 60530.
17. Select the This expense type used in itemization only check box.
Note: This expense type is now available only for an expense type that is required to be itemized.
18. Click Save and Create Another.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 6
Creating an Expense Type for Internet
19. Enter Name: Internet.
20. Select Category: Miscellaneous.
21. Enter Account: 60540.
22. Select the This expense type used in itemization only check box.
Note: This expense type is now available only for an expense type that is required to be itemized.
23. Click Save and Create Another.
Creating an Expense Type for Hotel
24. Enter Name: Hotel.
25. Select Category: Accommodations.
26. Enter Account: 60530.
27. Select the Itemization tab.
28. Select Enabled.
29. Select the Include check boxes for both the Room Charge and the Internet expense types.
Note: These two expense types are now available as itemizable expense types.
30. Click Save and Close.
31. Click Yes.
Specifying Receipt Requirements
32. Select the Receipt Requirement tab.
33. Select the Require receipts for cash expense lines above specified amount check box.
34. Enter 0.00 in the USD field.
35. Select the Require receipts for corporate card expense lines above specified amount
check box.
36. Enter 0.00 in the USD field.
37. Click Save and Close.
38. Click Yes.
39. Click Done.
Confirming that Created Expense Types Appear in the Created Expense Report Template
40. Navigate to: About Me > Expenses.
41. Click Create Expense Report.
42. Click the Create icon.
43. Accept the default date.
44. Select your Expense Report Template.
45. Select Hotel. Notice that the Itemize button is now enabled because you specified that the Hotel expense type is required to be itemized.
46. Enter Amount of $200.00.
47. Click the Itemize button.
48. Select Room Charge.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 7
49. Change the Amount field to 150.00.
50. Click Add Line.
51. From the Expense Type list, select Internet.
52. Change the Amount to 50.00.
53. Click Save and Close.
54. Click Save and Close.
55. Click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 8
Practice 20-3: Modifying Approval Rules Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, the instructor will demonstrate that you can create or modify approval rules to implement your expense report policies.
Instructor: In this instructor-led demonstration, modify the following two predefined approval rules that represent the company policy.
Expense reports with report total = < $1,000 is automatically approved.
Expense reports with report total > = $1,000 requires one level of supervisory approval.
You will modify the preceding predefined rules to reflect the following changes:
Expense reports with report total = < $1,000 is automatically approved.
Expense reports with report total > $1,000 and < = $2,000 requires one level of supervisory approval.
Expense reports with report total > $2,000 requires two levels of supervisory approval.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Approval Rules > Oracle BPM Worklist application.
2. Modifying an Existing Approval Rule to Add a New Condition That Requires a Single Level of Supervisory Approval for a Report Total Greater Than $1,000 and Equal to or Less Than
$2,000
3. From the Tasks to be configured pane, select the FinExmWorkflowExpenseApproval task.
4. To define and modify rules, click the Rules tab.
5. Click the Edit (pencil) icon on the icon tool bar to make the rules editable.
6. Expand the two predefined rules. There are no changes to the ExpenseReportAutoApprovalRule.
7. Collapse the ExpenseReportAutoApprovalRule.
8. In the IF region for the ExpenseReportManagerApprovalRule, click the Add Rule button (Insert Test). This adds a new blank condition.
9. In the left-most field of the new condition, click the LOV search icon to select the report attribute.
10. Expand the Task folder.
11. Expand the payload folder.
12. Expand the getExpenseReportVOResponse folder.
13. Expand the result folder.
14. Select the expenseReportTotal folder.
15. Click the OK button.
16. In the middle field, select same or less than from the choice list.
17. In the right-most field, enter 2000. Now you have modified the existing rule by adding a condition that requires a single level of supervisory approval for expense reports with a report total > $1000 and < = $2,000.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 9
18. Collapse the rule you just modified.
19. Adding a New Approval Rule That Requires Two Levels of Supervisory Approval for a Report Total Greater Than $2,000
20. From the Create icon choice list to the right of the View choice list, select Add Rule.
21. Expand the new rule. It has blank IF and THEN regions.
22. In the rule name field, enter Report Total over 2000.
23. In the IF region, click the LOV search icon in the left-most field.
24. Expand the Task folder.
25. Expand the payload folder.
26. Expand the getExpenseReportVOResponse folder.
27. Expand the result folder.
28. Select the expenseReportTotal folder.
29. Click the OK button.
30. From the middle list, select more than.
31. In the far-most right field, enter 2000. You have now defined the condition for expense reports over $2,000.
32. In the THEN region, from the List Builder list, select Supervisory and click the Create Action button. Now you can add levels to the hierarchy.
33. For the Response Type, select the Required radio button.
34. In the Number of Levels field, enter 2.
35. Click the LOV search icon for the Starting Participant field. The Add Variable dialog box appears.
36. Select the Get Manager radio button.
37. From the List Builder list, select Supervisory.
38. In the Reference User field, enter Task.creator. NOTE: Task.creator means the expense report submitter.
39. Click the OK button.
40. Click the LOV search icon for the Top Participant. The Add Variable dialog box appears.
41. Select the Get User radio button.
42. In the Reference User field, enter "Samuel.Mabry" as the name of the highest person in the supervisory hierarchy.
43. Click the OK button. You have completed the approval hierarchy definition for reports over
$2,000.
44. Click the Save icon in the icon toolbar.
45. Click the OK button.
46. Click the Commit icon in the icon toolbar.
47. Reviewing the Approver List to Confirm Changes to the Approval Rules
48. Login: Use your username.
49. You will create two expense reports, one with a report total of 1,500 USD and another with a report total of 2,500 USD and submit for approval.
Creating an Expense Report with an Expense Item of $1,500
50. Navigator menu > My Information menu > Expenses link > Expenses work area.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 10
51. In the Expenses work area, click the Create Report button. The Create Expense Report page appears.
52. In the Purpose field, enter report total equals 1500.
53. Select the I have read and accept the corporate travel and expense policies check box.
54. Click the Create Expense Item button. The Create Expense Item dialog box appears.
55. From the Expense Type choice list, select Car Rental.
56. From the Amount choice list, select USD - US Dollar.
57. To the right of the Amount choice list, enter 1500.
58. In the Merchant Name field, enter Hertz.
59. Click the Save and Close button.
60. Click the Submit button.
61. Click the OK button.
62. Confirming the Modified Approval Rule for Expense Reports Greater Than $1,000 and Equal to or Less Than $2,000
63. Click the Pending Approval tab.
64. Click the Expense Report Number link for the expense report number that you noted above. TIP: The most recent expense report link is always the one at the bottom of the table.
65. Alternatively, you can copy the expense report number from the message and paste it into the Query by Example (QBE) field for the expense report. To enable the QBE functionality, click the QBE icon and a row of fields display above the table.
66. Click the Approver List link. The Approver List hierarchy displays.
67. Note the approver listed in the Expense Report Approval Stage.
68. Click the OK button.
69. Click the Done button.
Creating an Expense Report with an Expense Item of $2,500
70. Navigator menu > My Information menu > Expenses link > Expenses work area.
71. In the Expenses work area, click the Create Report button. The Create Expense Report page appears.
72. In the Purpose field, enter report total equals 2500.
73. Select the I have read and accept the corporate travel and expense policies check box.
74. Click the Create Expense Item button. The Create Expense Item dialog box appears.
75. From the Expense Type choice list, select Car Rental.
76. From the Amount choice list, select USD - Dollar.
77. To the right of the Amount choice list, enter 2500.
78. In the Merchant Name field, enter Hertz.
79. Click the Save and Close button.
80. Click the Submit button.
81. Note the confirmation expense report number.
82. Click the OK button.
83. Confirming the New Approval Rule for Expense Reports Greater Than $2,000
84. Click the Pending Approval tab.
85. Click the Expense Report link of the expense report number that you noted above. TIP: The most recent expense report link is always the one at the bottom of the table.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 11
86. Alternatively, you can copy the expense report number from the message and paste it into the Query by Example (QBE) field for the expense report. To enable the QBE functionality, click the QBE icon and a row of fields display above the table.
87. Click the Approver List link. The Approver List hierarchy displays.
88. Note the approver listed in the Expense Report Approval Stage.
89. Click the OK button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 12
Practice 20-4: Setting Warning and Error Limits on a Conversion Rate Demonstration
Demonstration Overview
In this demonstration you will be:
Set a warning and error limits on a conversion rate
Note: This demonstration can be done only once in the instance. If it has already been completed, just review the setup with the class.
You are setting a warning limit on the conversion rate. If users enter a conversion rate that is 5-10% higher than the default conversion rate, they will see a Warning.
You are setting an error limit on the conversion rate. If users enter a conversion rate that is 10-15% higher than the default conversion rate, they will see an Error.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Financials > Define Expense Policies and Rules
> Manage Conversion Rates and Policies page > US1 Business
The Edit Conversion Rates and Policies: US1 Business Unit dialog opens.
3. Select the Default conversion rate check box.
4. Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 5.
5. Select the Display warning to user check box.
6. Enter Error Tolerance Percentage: 10.
7. In the Individual Currency Exceptions region, click the Add Row icon.
8. Select Currency: AUD – Australian Dollar.
9. Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 10.
10. Select the Display Warning to User check box.
11. Enter Error Tolerance Percentage: 15.
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 13
Practice 20-5: Viewing a Conversion Rate Policy Warning and Error
Overview
In this practice, you show that during your business trip to the UK, you took a taxi ride and paid for it by using your personal Visa credit card. After returning, you are entering your expenses. You notice that a different conversion rate was applied to the taxi expense by Visa than the one used by your company. You will complete the following tasks:
This practice covers:
View a conversion rate warning.
View a conversion rate error.
Review the Expense System Options.
Select options for a specific business unit.
Enable a printable expense report and then assign it to a specific business unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Viewing a Warning for a Conversion Rate Used in an Expense Report
1. Navigate to: About Me > Expenses.
3. Click Create Expense Report.
4. In the Expenses Items region, click the Create icon. The Create Expense Item dialog opens.
5. Accept the default date.
6. Select Expense Template: Expenses US1.
7. Select Expense Type: Taxi.
8. Select Amount: GBP - Pound Sterling and enter 100.00.
Note: GBP may be near the top of the choice list, rather than in alphabetical order.
9. In the Conversion Rate field, change the conversion rate from 1.52975371 to 1.62.
10. Select Expense Location: San Francisco, San Francisco, CA, United States.
Note: You will see a yellow warning that surrounds the Conversion Rate field, which indicates that the conversion rate you entered of 1.62 is 5% or more above the allowable limit of 1.52975371. For entering the conversion rate of 1.62, which resulted in a warning, enter a justification.
11. Enter Justification: Conversion rate applied by Visa.
12. Click Save and Create Another.
Viewing an Error for a Conversion Rate Used in an Expense Report
13. In Create Expense Item dialog, accept the default date.
14. Select Expense Type: Lunch.
15. Select Amount: GBP - Pound Sterling and enter 100.00.
16. Change the conversion rate to 1.88.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 14
17. Confirm that the Expense Location list shows San Francisco, San Francisco, CA, United States.
Note: You will receive a red error that surrounds the Conversion Rate field, which indicates that the conversion rate you entered of 1.88 is 10% or more above the allowable limit of 1.52975371.
18. Click Save and Close.
Tip: If you do not see the error message, click the Save and Close button and then submit the expense report. You will then see a message that indicates that you cannot submit an expense report with errors. You will note a red error icon on the line. Click the expense item link and then you will see the error that was not showing previously.
19. Select “I have read and accept the corporate travel and expense policies”.
20. Click Save and Close.
21. Click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 15
Practice 20-6: Setting Up a Car Rental Policy
Overview
In these practices, you will be following all of the procedures to set up a car rental policy in Expenses.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Setting Up a Car Rental Policy
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category.
2. Select Create Policy: Car Rental.
3. Specify a Policy Name: XXCar Rental.
4. In the Rate Definition region:
a. a. Select the Single Currency radio button.
b. b. Select Currency: USD US Dollar.
1. Note: If a currency rate conversion is necessary to verify a policy rate limit, you must define a conversion rate in Oracle Fusion General Ledger.
5. In the Rate Determinants section:
c. a. Select the Role check box.
d. b. Select Role Type: Job.
Setting Up Car Rental Policy Violations
6. Select the Policy violation warning check box.
7. Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 10.
8. Select the Display warning to user check box.
9. Select the Prevent report submission check box.
10. Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 20.
11. Click Save.
The following table describes what employees see when you set up warning and error policy violations, as well as the calculation used to derive the policy violation:
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 16
Completing the Car Rental Rate Spreadsheet
12. On the Create Car Rental Policy page, click Create Car Rental Rates.
13. Download the predefined spreadsheet to your local drive for completion.
TIP: If you select rate determinants in the Rate Determinants area, you complete the predefined spreadsheet. If you don't select any rate determinants, you create car rental rates in the Create Rates dialog.
14. On the Create Car Rental Rates spreadsheet, complete the fields as shown in the following table.
15. Click Upload Rates.
16. On the Manage Policies by Expense Category page, click Save.
Activating the Car Rental Policy
17. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category task > Go to Task > Manage Policies by Expense Category page.
18. Select the car rental policy that you created and click Activate.
19. Assign the car rental policy to an expense type.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 17
Assigning the Car Rental Policy to an Expense Type
20. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Templates.
The Manage Expense Report Templates page opens.
21. Select an applicable template for a business unit or click Create.
22. On the Create Expense Report Template page, create a template for Car Rental expenses.
23. On the Expense Types tab, click the Create icon to open the Create Expense Type
dialog.
24. In the Create Expense Type dialog, select Category: Car Rental.
25. On the Policies tab, select the Car Rental policy you created, specify the start date, and optionally specify an end date.
26. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 18
Practice 20-7: Setting Up an Airfare Policy
Overview
In this practice, you will be following all of the procedures to set up an airfare policy in Expenses.
To setup an airfare policy, you will:
Entering General Information
Setting Up Airfare Policy Violations
Creating a Flight Class policy
Activating the Airfare Policy
Assigning the Airfare Policy to an Expense Type
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Enter General Information
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category.
2. Select Create Policy: Airfare.
3. Enter Policy Name: 35AirFare.
4. In the Flight Class Determinant section:
e. a. The Role check box is already selected by default.
f. b. Select Role Type: Job.
Setting Up Airfare Policy Violations
5. In the Policy Enforcement section, accept the following defaults:
Policy violation warning radio button
Display warning to user check box
6. Click Save and Close.
The following table describes what employees see when you set up warning and error policy violations for an airfare policy.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 19
Creating a Flight Class Policy
7. Review the following example of a flight class policy:
Vice Presidents and above who fly longer than 8 hours for an international flight can purchase a first class ticket.
Vice Presidents and below who fly less than 8 hours for a domestic flight must purchase economy class ticket.
Activating the Airfare Policy
8. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category.
9. Select the airfare expense policy that you created and click Activate.
Assigning the Airfare Policy
10. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Templates.
11. Select an applicable template for a business unit or click the Create icon.
12. On the Create Expense Report Template page, create a template for airfare expenses, or an applicable template for a business unit.
13. On the Expense Types tab, click the Create icon to open the Create Expense Type
dialog.
14. Select Category: Airfare.
15. On the Policies tab, select the airfare policy you created, specify the start date, and optionally specify an end date.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 20
Practice 20-8: Setting Up a Miscellaneous Expense Policy
Overview
In this practice you will be setting up a miscellaneous expense policy and completing the miscellaneous rate spreadsheet for uploading to the application.
The policy is set up with a single instance rate in US dollars, by job, and is enforced by a warning and an error
This practice covers the following aspects of setting up a miscellaneous expense policy:
Setting Up a Miscellaneous Expense Policy
Setting Up Policy Violations
Completing the Miscellaneous Rate Spreadsheet
Associating the Miscellaneous Expense Policy with an Expense Type
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Setting Up a Miscellaneous Expense Policy
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category.
2. Select Create Policy: Miscellaneous.
3. In the Miscellaneous Eligibility Rule section, do the following:
g. a. Select the Minimum number of days for miscellaneous expense reimbursement check box.
h. b. Enter Days: 5.
4. In the Rate Type section, select the Rate limit radio button.
5. In the Rate Definition section, do the following:
i. a. Select the Single instance limit check box.
j. b. Select the Single currency radio button.
k. c. Select Currency: USD US Dollar.
Note: If a currency rate conversion is necessary to verify a policy rate limit, you must define a conversion rate in Oracle Fusion General Ledger.
6. In the Rate Determinants section, do the following:
l. a. Select the Role check box.
m. b. Select Role Type: Job.
7. In the Policy Enforcements section, do the following:
n. a. Select the Policy violation warning check box.
o. b. Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 10.
p. c. Select Display warning check box.
q. d. Select the Prevent report submission check box.
r. e. Enter Error Tolerance Percentage: 20.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 21
Setting up Policy Violations
8. To set up a policy violation for a miscellaneous expense policy, use the data shown previously in the set policy violations for accommodations expense.
Completing the Miscellaneous Rate Spreadsheet
9. On the Create Miscellaneous Policy page, click Create Rates.
10. Download the predefined spreadsheet to your local drive for completion.
Note: If you select rate determinants in the Rate Determinants section, you complete the predefined spreadsheet. If you don't select any rate determinants, you create miscellaneous rates in the Create Rates dialog.
11. On the Create Miscellaneous Rates spreadsheet, complete the fields as shown in the following table.
12. Click Upload.
When rates are successfully uploaded, the policy status is valid. To use the miscellaneous rate policy for calculation of miscellaneous expenses, you must:
13. Activate the miscellaneous expense policy.
14. On the Manage Policies by Expense Category page, select the miscellaneous expense policy that you created and click Activate.
15. Assign the accommodations expense policy to an expense type.
Assigning the Miscellaneous Expense Policy to an Expense Type
16. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Templates.
17. Click the Create icon or select an applicable template for a business unit.
18. Create a template for miscellaneous expenses.
19. On the Expense Types tab, click the Create icon to open the Create Expense Type
dialog.
20. Select Category: Miscellaneous.
21. On the Policies tab, select the miscellaneous expense policy you created, specify the start date, and optionally specify an end date.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 22
Practice 20-9: Setting Up a Meals Expense Policy
Overview
In this practice, you will be setting up a miscellaneous expense policy including:
Setting Up a Meals Expense Policy
Setting Up Policy Violations
Completing the Meals Rate Spreadsheet
Associating the Meals Expense Policy with an Expense Type
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Setting Up a Meals Expense Policy
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category.
2. Select Create Policy: Meals.
3. In the Rate Definition section, do the following:
s. a. Select the Select the Single instance limit check box.
t. b. Select the Single currency radio button.
u. c. Select Currency: USD US Dollar.
Note: If a currency rate conversion is necessary to verify a policy rate limit, you must define a conversion rate in Oracle Fusion General Ledger.
4. In the Policy Enforcements section, do the following:
v. a. Select the Policy violation warning check box.
w. b. Select Warning Tolerance Percentage: 10.
x. c. Select the Display warning to user check box.
y. d. Select the Prevent report submission check box.
z. e. Enter Error Tolerance Percentage: 20.
5. Click Save.
Setting up Policy Violations
To set up a policy violation for a meals expense policy, use the data shown previously in the set
policy violations for accommodations expense.
Completing the Meals Rate Spreadsheet
6. On the Create Meals Policy page, click the Create Rates button.
7. Download the predefined spreadsheet to your local drive for completion.
Note: If you select rate determinants in the Rate Determinants section, you complete the predefined spreadsheet. If you don't select any rate determinants, you create meals rates in the Create Rates dialog.
8. On the Create Meals Rates spreadsheet, complete the fields as shown in the table.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 23
9. Click the Upload.
10. When rates are successfully uploaded, the policy status is valid. To use the rates spreadsheet for calculation of meal expenses, you must:
aa. a. Activate the miscellaneous expense policy.
bb. b. On the Manage Policies by Expense Category page, select the meals expense policy that you created and click the Activate button.
11. Assign the meals expense policy to an expense type.
Assigning the Meals Expense Policy to an Expense Type
Follow these steps to assign the meals expense policy to an expense type:
12. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Templates.
13. Click the Create icon or select an applicable template for a business unit.
14. Create a template for meals expenses.
15. On the Expense Types tab, click the Create icon to open the Create Expense Type
dialog.
16. Select Category: Meals.
17. On the Policies tab, select the meals expense policy you created, specify the start date, and optionally specify an end date.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 24
Practice 20-10: Setting Up a Mileage Expense Policy
Overview
In this practice, you will be setting up a mileage expense policy to allow employees to claim mileage reimbursement for travel expenses incurred by using their personal vehicles for business activities. In most countries, mileage reimbursement rates are determined by the central government.
Based on government mileage regulations and your company policy, you can set up a mileage expense policy by defining:
Mileage eligibility rules
Mileage rate determinants
Mileage add-on rates
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Mileage Eligibility Rules
1. Navigator to: Setup and Maintenance > Tasks pane: Manage Policies by Expense Category.
2. Select Create Policy: Mileage.
3. In the Mileage Eligibility Rules section, specify the rules that determine whether employees can claim mileage reimbursement for using their personal or company provided vehicles. The table lists the eligibility rules and their descriptions.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 25
Mileage Rate Determinants
4. In the Mileage Rate Determinants section, specify the determinants on which the mileage reimbursement policy is based. The table lists selected rate determinants and their descriptions
Mileage Add-On Rates
5. In the Mileage Add-On Rates section, you can add passenger rates and company-specific rates for inclusion in the mileage reimbursement policy. The table lists additional rate types and their descriptions.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 26
6. Once you finish setting up the mileage expense policy, you must:
Complete the mileage rate spreadsheet and load the spreadsheet to the application, or complete the Create Rates dialog box, depending on the complexity of the policy.
Activate the mileage reimbursement policy.
Set up cumulative mileage determinants when applicable.
Assign the mileage reimbursement policy to expense types.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 27
Practice 20-11: Setting Up an Accommodations Expense Policy
Overview
In this practice, you will be following all of the procedures for setting up an accommodations expense policy.
To setup an accommodations expense policy, you perform the following steps:
Setting Up an Accommodations Policy
Setting Up Policy Violations
Completing the Accommodations Rate Spreadsheet
Associating the Accommodations Expense Policy with an Expense Type
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Setting Up an Accommodations Policy
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category.
2. Select Create Policy: Accommodations.
The Create Accommodations Expense Policy page opens.
3. In the Rate Definition section, do the following: cc.a. Select Single currency.
dd. b. Select Currency: USD.
Note: If a currency rate conversion is necessary to verify a policy rate limit, you must define a conversion rate in Oracle Fusion General Ledger.
4. In the Rate Determinants section, do the following: ee. a. Select the Roles check box.
ff. b. Select the Locations check box. gg. c. Select Role Type: Job.
hh. d. Select the Geographical locations check box.
5. In the Policy Enforcements section, do the following:
ii. a. Select the Policy violation warning check box. jj. b. Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 10. kk.c. Select the Display warning check box.
ll. d. Select the Prevent report submission check box. mm. e. Enter Error Tolerance Percentage: 20.
Setting up Policy Violations
To set policy violations for accommodations expense use the information shown in the following table.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 28
Completing the Accommodations Rate Spreadsheet
6. Click Create Rates.
7. Download the predefined spreadsheet to your local drive for completion.
Note: If you select rate determinants in the Rate Determinants section, you complete the predefined spreadsheet. If you don't select any rate determinants, you create accommodations rates in the Create Rates dialog.
8. On the Create Accommodations Rates spreadsheet, complete the fields as shown in the table.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 29
9. Click Upload.
10. On the Create Accommodations Expense Policy page, click Save and Close.
When rates are successfully uploaded, the policy status becomes valid. To use this rate policy for calculation of accommodations expenses, you must:
11. Activate the accommodations expense policy.
nn. a. On the Manage Policies by Expense Category page, select the accommodations expense policy you created and click Activate.
12. Assign the accommodations expense policy to an expense type.
Assign the Accommodations Expense Policy to an Expense Type.
13. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Templates.
14. Click the Create icon or select an applicable template for a business unit.
15. Create a template for accommodations expenses.
16. On the Expense Types tab, click the Create icon to open the Create Expense Type
dialog.
17. Select Category: Accommodations.
18. On the Policies tab in the Create Expense Type dialog, select the accommodations expense policy you created, specify the start date, and optionally specify an end date.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 30
Practice 20-12: Setting Up a Corporate Card Program
Overview
In this practice you will:
Set up a Cash Advance
Enter Values in the Create Transfer Parameters page.
Set Up the HTTPS Server.
Configure the Corporate Cards Program Setup.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Set Up a Cash Advance
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Corporate Card Program.
2. Click Create.
3. Enter Name: XXVision Card Program.
4. Enter Card Type: Procurement.
5. Enter Brand: American Express.
6. Select File Format: American Express #1025
7. Select the Transfer Parameters tab in the Create Corporate Card Program page.
8. Click the Create Transfer Parameter dialog box.
Before you can download transaction files from American Express servers, you must set up a Secure File Transfer (SFT) account with American Express and obtain the user name and password that identifies your customer account on the SFT server.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 31
Enter Values in the Transfer Parameters page.
9. Enter the values displayed in the table below in the Create Transfer Parameters page.
10. Click Save and Close.
After you complete the tasks for corporate card transaction download, you can use the Upload Corporate Card Transaction File program with the profile name as a download parameter to download corporate card transaction files from American Express.
Note: American Express places one or multiple transaction files at a time in a folder called Outbox in your customer account, but the Upload Corporate Card Transaction File program processes only one file at a time. The process picks up the oldest file each time. To pick up multiple files, you must schedule the Upload Corporate Card Transaction File process to run multiple times.
Before you can process VISA, MasterCard, and Diner's Club corporate card transaction files, you must set up an HTTPS server, configure the corporate card programs setup, and verify the HTTPS server setup.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 32
Practice 20-13: Creating a Corporate Card Program
Overview
In this practice, you show that your company has chosen American Express as your corporate card issuer. You are ready to start processing corporate card transaction files. To enable the processing, you will set up the applicable entities. You will complete the following tasks:
Define a corporate card mapping rule.
Create a corporate card program and company account number with American Express.
Assign the mapping rule to the corporate card program to enable the upload process to derive corporate card expense types for the corporate card transactions.
Create a Corporate Card Mapping Rule
A corporate card mapping rule enables you to assign a corporate card expense type to the transactions based on the transaction codes in the corporate card transaction file. Once the corporate card expense type is derived using the mapping rule, the corporate card expense type is converted to an expense type. This expense type is derived using the corporate card expense type mapping in the default expense template.
Note: Only those corporate card transactions with associated expense types are displayed in the Expenses work area
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Define a Corporate Card Mapping Rule
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Corporate Card Expense Type Mapping Rules.
2. Click the Create icon.
The Create Corporate Card Expense Type Mapping Rule dialog appears.
3. In the Name field, enter XXMapping Rule.
4. Select Source Lookup Type: MIS Industry Codes.
MIS Industry Codes is a lookup that contains the American Express corporate card transaction codes that describe the type of transactions in the corporate card transaction file.
5. Select Default Card Expense Type: Miscellaneous.
6. Map the Source Lookup Codes to the following corporate card expense types:
7. Select Source Lookup Code 01: Air.
8. Select Source Lookup Code 03: Hotel.
9. Select Source Lookup Code 05: Meal.
10. Select Source Lookup Code 08: Miscellaneous.
11. Click Save and Close.
12. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 33
Creating a Corporate Card Program and Company Account Number with American Express
A corporate card program represents your agreement with the card issuer, your organization setup within the card issuer system, and the payment liability.
13. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Corporate Card Programs.
14. Click the Create icon.
The Create Corporate Card Program page opens.
15. Enter Name: XXAMEX.
16. Enter Description: XXAmerican Express Travel Card.
17. Select Card Type: Travel.
18. Select Card Brand: American Express.
19. Click the Upload Rules tab.
20. Select File Format: American Express KR1025.
21. Select Employee Matching Rule for New Cards: Employee number.
22. In the Card Expense Type Mapping section, select Transaction Summary Mapping Rule: XXMapping Rule. This is the mapping rule that you created previously.
23. Select Transaction Summary Source Column: MIS industry code.
24. In the Company Accounts section, click the Create icon. The Create Company Account dialog opens.
25. Enter Company Account Name: XXCompany Account Name.
26. Enter Company Account Number: XX1000.
27. Enter Market Code: 001.
28. Enter Requesting Control Account Number: XX2000.
29. Select Card Issuer: American Express.
30. Select Card Issuer Site: UK - London.
31. Select Payables Business Unit: US1 Business Unit.
32. Select Payment Currency: USD – US Dollar.
33. Select Payment Terms: Immediate.
34. Select Payment Option: Both.
35. Enter Expense Clearing Account: 101.10.22190.000.000.000.
Note: If you receive an error message, click the Expense Clearing Account icon and search for any missing segments in the Expense Clearing Account dialog box.
36. Click Save and Close.
37. To exit the page, click Save and Close.
38. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 34
Practice 20-14: Setting Up a Corporate Card Usage Policy Warning Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, your instructor will set up a warning to enforce corporate card usage.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Corporate Card Usage Policy Warning
If the Airfare category has been adjusted already, select another expense category and add parameters.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Credit Card Data.
2. Click the US1 Business Unit link.
3. For Airfare, do the following:
Enter Cash Limit: 100.00.
Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 0.00.
Select the Display Warning to User check box.
4. Click Save and Close.
5. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 35
Practice 20-15: Creating Receipt and Notification Rules
Overview
In this practice you will be creating an Expense Report Receipt and Notification Rule.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Create Expense Report Receipt and Notification Rule
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Receipt and Notification Rule.
2. Specify the type of receipt your company requires for expense report submission in the header of the Create Receipt and Notification Rule page:
3. Specify the stage when imaged receipts must be attached to the expense report by the employee.
4. Specify when missing and overdue expense report receipts are considered overdue.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 36
5. Specify when expense report payments should be placed on hold due to pending receipts.
6. Specify the level on which you want to define receipt rules. You can specify receipt rules at all, any, or none of the following levels:
Organization Level
Template Level
Expense Level
7. For the Organization Level:
Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Receipt and Notification Rules > Create.
8. For the Template Level:
Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Template > Create > Receipt Requirement tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 37
9. For the Expense Level:
Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Template > Create > Expense Types tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 38
Oracle Financials Cloud: Financials Implementation for R11
Activity Guide D000PTGC10
Edition 1.0 | June 2016
Learn more from Oracle University at oracle.com/education/
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. Disclaimer
This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. You may copy and print this document solely for your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or altered in any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display, perform, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part without the express authorization of Oracle.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the document, please report them in writing to: Oracle University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This document is not warranted to be error-free.
Restricted Rights Notice
If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using the documentation on behalf of the United States Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
The U.S. Government’s rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or disclose these training materials are restricted by the terms of the applicable Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.
Trademark Notice
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Author
Kathryn Wohnoutka
This book was published using: oracletutor
Copyright © 2016. Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Oracle Financials Cloud: Financials Implementation for R11 Table of Contents
i
Table of Contents
Practices for Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Cloud Financials Implementation .....................................1-1
Practices for Lesson 1.................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation ................................................................... 2-1
Practices for Lesson 2: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 2-2
Practice 2-1: Getting Started in Oracle Fusion Applications ........................................................................... 2-6
Practice 2-2: Exploring Infolets and Infotiles...................................................................................................2-12
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup ........................................................ 3-1
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 3-2
Practice 3-1: Browsing Offerings .................................................................................................................... 3-3
Practice 3-2: Configure Offerings Demonstration ........................................................................................... 3-4
Practice 3-3: Creating an Implementation Project .......................................................................................... 3-6
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview .................................................................................................... 4-1
Practices for Lesson 4: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 4-2
Practice 4-1: Defining Role Mapping .............................................................................................................. 4-3
Practice 4-2: Creating a User ............................................................................................................................... 4-5
Practice 4-3: Creating an Employee .................................................................................................................... 4-7
Practice 4-4: Using the Security Console .......................................................................................................4-10
Practices for Lesson 5: Discussing the Vision Story and Common Applications......................................5-1
Practices for Lesson 5.................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures ............................................................................. 6-1
Practices for Lesson 6: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 6-2
Practice 6-1: Reviewing Shared Components ................................................................................................ 6-3
Practice 6-2: Entering Data in the Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet ............................................................. 6-5
Practice 6-3: Uploading the Chart of Accounts File ........................................................................................6-10
Practice 6-4: Verifying Deployment Was Successful Demonstration .............................................................. 6-11
Practice 6-5: Uploading the Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File ...................................................... 6-12
Practice 6-6: Reviewing an Existing Legal Jurisdictions .................................................................................6-13
Practice 6-7: Reviewing Legal Addresses for Legal Entities and Reporting Units ..........................................6-14
Practice 6-8: Creating a Legal Authority .........................................................................................................6-15
Practice 6-9: Searching for Your Legal Entity .................................................................................................6-16
Practice 6-10: Viewing a Legal Reporting Unit ............................................................................................... 6-18
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components ............................................................. 7-1
Practices for Lesson 7: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 7-2
Practice 7-1: Searching for Your Value Sets .................................................................................................. 7-3
Practice 7-2: Searching for Your Chart of Accounts Structure and Instance .................................................. 7-4
Practice 7-3: Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration .......................................................................... 7-6
Practice 7-4: Creating an Account Shorthand Alias ........................................................................................ 7-7
Practice 7-5: Entering Values ...............................................................................................................................7-8
Practice 7-6: Searching and Completing Your Accounting Hierarchy .............................................................7-9
Practice 7-7: Publishing Accounting Hierarchy ...............................................................................................7-11
Practice 7-8: Creating an Account Combination ............................................................................................. 7-12
Practice 7-9: Defining Cross-Validation Rules ................................................................................................7-14
Practice 7-10: Verifying Your Calendar ................................................................................................................ 7-17
Practice 7-11: Reviewing and Creating Currencies ........................................................................................7-18
Practice 7-12: Creating Conversion Rate Types ............................................................................................7-19
Practice 7-13: Entering Daily Rates .....................................................................................................................7-20
Copyright © 2016. Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Oracle Financials Cloud: Financials Implementation for R11 Table of Contents
ii
Practice 7-14: Entering a Currency Conversion Journal .................................................................................7-22
Practice 7-15: Searching for Your Ledger ...........................................................................................................7-23
Practice 7-16: Verifying Your Ledger Options ................................................................................................7-24
Practice 7-17: Verifying Your Legal Entities and Balancing Segments Assignments .....................................7-26
Practice 7-18: Defining Reporting Currencies .....................................................................................................7-27
Practice 7-19: Completing the Ledger Configuration ......................................................................................7-29
Practice 7-20: Creating a Ledger Set ...................................................................................................................7-30
Practice 7-21: Reviewing Data Access Set Security ......................................................................................7-31
Practice 7-22: Creating Data Access Set Security .........................................................................................7-32
Practice 7-23: Opening the First Accounting Period ...........................................................................................7-34
Practice 7-24: Creating and Generating an Allocation Rule ...........................................................................7-35
Practice 7-25: Creating a Revaluation ............................................................................................................7-54
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany............................................................ 8-1
Practices for Lesson 8: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 8-2
Practice 8-1: Settung Up a New Rule Demonstratoin ..................................................................................... 8-3
Practice 8-2: Viewing Intercompany Balancing Rules and Secondary and Clearing Company
Balancing Options ..........................................................................................................................................8-5
Practice 8-3: Creating an Intercompany Batch .............................................................................................. 8-8
Practice 8-4: Submitting and Reviewing Reconciliation Reports ........................................................................ 8-12
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting .......................................................................... 9-1
Practices for Lesson 9: Overview ......................................................................................................................... 9-2
Practice 9-1: Viewing a Financial Report from the Financial Reporting Center .................................................9-3
Practice 9-2: Creating a Financial Report: Defining a Grid ............................................................................. 9-5
Practice 9-3: Creating a Financial Report: Adding a Formula for Total Expenses ............................................9-14
Practice 9-4: Creating a Financial Report Defining a Rolling 12-Period Column...............................................9-17
Practice 9-5: Creating a Financial Report: Defining the Grid and User Point of View Dimensions .................9-26
Practice 9-6: Creating a Financial Report: Setting Properties......................................................................... 9-31
Practice 9-7: Creating a Financial Report: Adding a Logo and Title ............................................................... 9-36
Practice 9-8: Reviewing a Report ......................................................................................................................... 9-38
Practice 9-9: Using Infolets Demonstration .................................................................................................... 9-41
Practice 9-10: Setting up the General Accounting Expense Infolet Demonstration ........................................9-42
Practice 9-11: Viewing an Account Group from the Financial Reporting Center Demonstration ....................9-46
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets ........................................ 10-1
Practices for Lesson 10: Overview .................................................................................................................10-2
Practice 10-1: Viewing Your Business Unit ......................................................................................................... 10-3
Practice 10-2: Viewing the Assigned Business Unit Functions .......................................................................10-4
Practice 10-3: Creating a Reference Data Set ....................................................................................................10-5
Practice 10-4: Managing Your Business Unit Set Assignment ....................................................................... 10-6
Practice 10-5: Provisioning Data Roles ...............................................................................................................10-7
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax ............................................................................. 11-1
Practices for Lesson 11: Overview .................................................................................................................11-2
Practice 11-1: Viewing a Calculated Tax on a Payables Transaction Demonstration .....................................11-3
Practice 11-2: Creating a US Sales Tax Using the Tax Configuration Workbook ...........................................11-5
Practice 11-3: Creating a VAT Tax Using the Tax Configuration Workbook (Optional) ..................................11-10
Practice 11-4: Using the Tax Simulator to Test a Payables Transaction ........................................................ 11-16
Practice 11-5: Enabling Your Tax for Transactions ........................................................................................11-18
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting ............................................. 12-1
Practices for Lesson 12: Overview .................................................................................................................12-2
Copyright © 2016. Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Oracle Financials Cloud: Financials Implementation for R11 Table of Contents
3
Practice 12-1: Creating Three Account Rules ..................................................................................................... 12-3
Practice 12-2: Creating a Description Rule ....................................................................................................12-6
Practice 12-3: Creating Two Journal Line Rules .................................................................................................12-8
Practice 12-4: Creating a Journal Entry Rule Set ................................................................................................12-10
Practice 12-5: Duplicating and Modifying an Accounting Method ...................................................................... 12-12
Practice 12-6: Reviewing Accounting for a Payables Invoice .........................................................................12-15
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables ....................................................................13-1
Practices for Lesson 13: Overview .................................................................................................................13-2
Practice 13-1: Defining Your User as a Procurement Agent ...........................................................................13-3
Practice 13-2: Creating a Payment Term.............................................................................................................13-5
Practice 13-3: Managing Common Options for Payables and Procurement ...................................................13-8
Practice 13-4: Managing Invoice Options .......................................................................................................13-10
Practice 13-5: Managing Payment Options ....................................................................................................13-12
Practice 13-6: Managing Distribution Sets .....................................................................................................13-13
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables ................................................14-1
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables ........................................................ 14-2
Practice 14-1: Creating Banks, Branches, and Accounts Using a Spreadsheet. ..............................................14-3
Practice 14-2: Creating a Payment Document for a Bank Account ................................................................ 14-5
Practice 14-3: Creating a Disbursement Payment File Format .......................................................................14-6
Practice 14-4: Creating the Transmission Configuration ................................................................................14-7
Practice 14-5: Creating a Payment System .........................................................................................................14-8
Practice 14-6: Creating a Payment Method ....................................................................................................14-10
Practice 14-7: Creating a Payment Process Profile........................................................................................14-13
Practice 14-8: Submitting a Payment Process Request .....................................................................................14-14
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables .............................................................. 15-1
Practices for Lesson 15: Overview .................................................................................................................15-2
Practice 15-1: Reviewing Receivables System Options .................................................................................15-3
Practice 15-2: Reviewing AutoAccounting Rules ................................................................................................15-6
Practice 15-3: Reviewing Remit-to Addresses ....................................................................................................15-7
Practice 15-4: Reviewing Receivables Activities .................................................................................................15-8
Practice 15-5: Reviewing Statement Cycles ........................................................................................................15-9
Practice 15-6: Creating a Customer Profile Class ..........................................................................................15-10
Practice 15-7: Creating a Customer ...............................................................................................................15-13
Practice 15-8: Defining a Transaction Type ...................................................................................................15-14
Practice 15-9: Defining a Transaction Source ................................................................................................ 15-16
Practice 15-10: Creating Banks, Branches, and Accounts Using a Spreadsheet .............................................15-18
Practice 15-11: Creating a Receipt Class and Receipt Method ...................................................................... 15-20
Practice 15-12: Creating a Receipt Source ......................................................................................................... 15-22
Practices for Lesson 16: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Receivables ...........................................16-1
Practices for Lesson 16 ..................................................................................................................................16-2
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management ................................................... 17-1
Practices for Lesson 17: Overview .................................................................................................................17-2
Practice 17-1: Managing Bank Statement Transaction Codes ...........................................................................17-3
Practice 17-2: Managing Bank Statement Transaction Creation Rules ..........................................................17-5
Practice 17-3: Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Matching Rules .....................................................17-6
Practice 17-4: Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Tolerance Rules .................................................... 17-7
Practice 17-5: Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Rule Sets............................................................... 17-8
Practice 17-6: Assigning a Rule Set to a Bank Account ................................................................................. 17-9
Copyright © 2016. Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Oracle Financials Cloud: Financials Implementation for R11 Table of Contents
4
Practice 17-7: Performing a Bank Statement Reconciliation with Autoreconciliation ......................................17-10
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections ..............................................18-1
Practices for Lesson 18: Overview ................................................................................................................. 18-2
Practice 18-1: Getting Started with Advanced Collections Demonstration ..................................................... 18-3
Practice 18-2: Creating an Aging Method. ...................................................................................................... 18-5
Practice 18-3: Creating a Collector and a Resource ...................................................................................... 18-7
Practice 18-4: Reviewing Dunning Templates Demonstration ........................................................................... 18-9
Practice 18-5: Creating a Strategy Task .........................................................................................................18-10
Practice 18-6: Creating a Strategy .................................................................................................................18-11
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets ................................................................................................ 19-1
Practices for Lesson 19: Overview ................................................................................................................. 19-2
Practice 19-1: Updating an Existing Assets Configuration ............................................................................. 19-3
Practice 19-2: Review Asset Key Flexfields Demonstration ........................................................................... 19-6
Practice 19-3: Define Values for Major and Minor Category .......................................................................... 19-7
Practice 19-4: Define Values for Asset Clearing and CIP Clearing Accounts .................................................19-9
Practice 19-5: Review Asset System Control Options ....................................................................................19-10
Practice 19-6: Define Values for Asset Clearing and CIP Clearing Accounts .................................................19-11
Practice 19-7: Managing Fiscal Years ............................................................................................................19-12
Practice 19-8: Managing Asset Calendars ..................................................................................................... 19-13
Practice 19-9: Managing Prorate Conventions ...............................................................................................19-15
Practice 19-10: Managing Asset Books ..........................................................................................................19-16
Practice 19-11: Managing Asset Categories ..................................................................................................19-18
Practice 19-12: Provisioning Data Roles to the User Account............................................................................19-23
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation .................................20-1
Practices for Lesson 20: Overview ................................................................................................................. 20-2
Practice 20-1: Reviewing the Expenses System Options ............................................................................... 20-3
Practice 20-2: Creating an Expense Report Template ................................................................................... 20-5
Practice 20-3: Modifying Approval Rules Demonstration ............................................................................... 20-8
Practice 20-4: Setting Warning and Error Limits on a Conversion Rate Demonstration .................................20-12
Practice 20-5: Viewing a Conversion Rate Policy Warning and Error.............................................................20-13
Practice 20-6: Setting Up a Car Rental Policy ................................................................................................20-15
Practice 20-7: Setting Up an Airfare Policy ....................................................................................................20-18
Practice 20-8: Setting Up a Miscellaneous Expense Policy............................................................................20-20
Practice 20-9: Setting Up a Meals Expense Policy .........................................................................................20-22
Practice 20-10: Setting Up a Mileage Expense Policy ....................................................................................20-24
Practice 20-11: Setting Up an Accommodations Expense Policy ................................................................... 20-27
Practice 20-12: Setting Up a Corporate Card Program ..................................................................................20-30
Practice 20-13: Creating a Corporate Card Program ..........................................................................................20-32
Practice 20-14: Setting Up a Corporate Card Usage Policy Warning Demonstration .......................................20-34
Practice 20-15: Creating Receipt and Notification Rules ....................................................................................20-35
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Cloud Financials Implementation
Chapter 1 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Cloud Financials Implementation
Chapter 1
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Cloud Financials Implementation
Chapter 1 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 1
There are no practices for this lesson.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 2: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Getting Started in Oracle Fusion Applications.
Exploring Infolets and Infotiles.
Use the following usernames with the password assigned by OU Operations for all activities unless otherwise specified.
Students: FASXX.Student where XX = 01 to 30
Instructors: FASXX.Instructor where XX = 00, 99
If the Navigator does not allow scrolling or closes before you can get to the items that are at the bottom of the box, use the following work around:
Use Internet Explorer (IE).
Use F11 function to maximize the screen.
Use Control and Scroll Down to minimize screen.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 3
Practice 2-1: Getting Started in Oracle Fusion Applications
Overview
In this practice you are introduced to Oracle Fusion Applications and the basic navigation features.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Select Applications Login for all labs unless otherwise instructed.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 4
2. Sign in as Your User (as assigned by the instructor).
3. Click the Sign in button.
After you sign in, you start on the Welcome Springboard, which contains one or more icons that allow you to access application pages directly.
4. Click on the Receivables group icon to see the pages available.
5. The global area at the top of the page is always available no matter where you are in Oracle Fusion Applications.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 5
6. Use the menus, icons, and tabs at the top in the Global Area provide access to features relevant to any page in Oracle Fusion Applications.
7. Use the Accessibility icon to set accessibility preferences. You can also access preferences through the Personalization menu found under your username.
8. Use the Show Help icon to toggle on or off Oracle Fusion Applications Help. The Help icons appear within pages when toggled on and give you access to page or field-related help topics.
9. The Search icon in the global area lets you run a quick keyword search and, from the search results, navigate to the page that contains what you are looking for.
10. Click In the Search field. A window opens with Recent Items and Recent Searches.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 6
11. Click the Personalize gears in the upper right hand corner of the Search window to open a window where you can narrow your search by groups or categories.
12. Enter Navigate in the search field and click Enter.
13. Review the topics that appear. Open one of the topics.
14. Close the topic and the Search Results window.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 10
15. Select your username to open the Setting and Actions menu > Set Preferences. You can set other preferences such as time zone and language. Also, where available, you can personalize the content and layout of the current page.
16. Click the Applications Help link on the Settings and Actions menu. A new tab opens on the browser.
17. Enter Work Areas in the search box. Click Search.
18. Click on Help Type and deselect everything but Video.
19. Click Apply.
20. Click and watch the video Exploring Work Areas.
The video does not run within the Oracle University and some client firewalls. Note the name and search for it on Google on your laptop.
21. Close the page that opened to display help.
22. Click the Navigator icon > General Accounting: Journals. If required, select the US Primary Ledger Data Access Set. The Journals work area appears.
Note: A work area contains the complete set of tasks, reports, embedded analytics, searches, or other content that you need to accomplish the tasks associated with a business goal. Work areas consist of many regions.
The local area is where you do your work.
The Tasks icon in the upper right corner opens the Panel on the right where you can select actions, searches, or reports.
23. Check the Data Access Set under the title, Journals, at the top of the page.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 11
24. If it is not set to US Primary Ledger, click the Change link next to the Data Access Set
and select US Primary Ledger.
25. Click the Tasks panel tab to open the Tasks Panel.
26. Click the Manage Journals link.
27. In the Search region, enter Accounting Period: 01-15.
28. Click the Search button.
29. Click the first Journal link.
30. After the journal loads, click the first journal line.
31. Click the Refresh icon in the contextual pane on the far right side of the page.
Note: When you select a record, any contextual information for the record is displayed in the contextual area on the right hand side of the work area. The contextual area content is driven by what you do in the local area.
Note: The Balances pane (contextual area) is displayed and can show additional information specific to the selected journal line.
As needed, you can resize or collapse the regional or contextual area to dedicate more space to the local area.
32. Click the Collapse Pane button in the center of the page on the right.
33. Click the Home icon.
34. Click your username and then the Sign Out link to sign out to end your session of Oracle Fusion Applications.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 12
Practice 2-2: Exploring Infolets and Infotiles
Overview
In this practice, you will learn explore Infolets and infotiles to help monitor your close and daily activates.
Assumptions
Sign in as Casey.Brown and the assigned password.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Home page > Page Control dot for General Accounting Infolets.
2. Hover over the center of the Close Calendar infolet to view the accounting period Start and End Dates.
3. Click the More link in the Open Subledgers infolet to view the status of the general ledger and all associated subledgers.
4. Click Done to close.
5. Click the Back View arrow on the bottom right of the Journals infolet.
6. Click the Expanded View double arrow on the bottom right of the Journals infolet to view more journal details. Example of the Expanded View.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 13
7. Click on the AP Reconciliation or AR Reconciliation infolet.
A quick click shows a highly graphic visualization in the form of a waterfall chart that bridges the difference between the subledger and the GL balances. For example:
8. Click the View Report link on the bottom of the chart.
9. Click Done to close all open pages and return to the General Accounting infolet page.
10. Click on the Page Control dot to return to the Welcome Springboard.
11. Click the Payables icon to open the Payables springboard strip.
12. Click on the Invoices icon.
13. Click on the arrow at the bottom of the Holds infotile to see the detailed table information change.
14. Click the Home icon to return to the Welcome Springboard.
15. Select the name Casey.Brown and click Sign Out.
16. Log back in using your FASXX.Student User as assigned by your instructor.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 2: Introducing Oracle Fusion Navigation
Chapter 2 - Page 14
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Browsing Offerings.
Configuring Offerings Demonstration
Creating an Implementation Project.
Use the following usernames with the password assigned by OU Operations for all activities unless otherwise specified.
Students: FASXX.Student where XX = 01 to 30
Instructors: FASXX.Instructor where XX = 00, 99
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 3
Practice 3-1: Browsing Offerings
Overview
In this practice, you will understand the Oracle Fusion Offerings.
You are an Implementation manager for your Oracle Fusion Financials implementation. In preparation for implementation, you need to review the Financials offering.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Sign in as Your User (as assigned by the instructor).
2. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance.
3. Select the Financials offering and notice how the About section becomes About Financials.
4. Click on one of the following links for more details:
Offering Content Guide describes all processes related to this offering.
Associated Features shows a list of features and functionality of this offering that can optionally be implemented.
Setup Task Lists and Tasks show a complete list of all setup tasks, including prerequisites that should be performed to make this offering ready for transaction.
Related Business Objects shows a complete list of all setup data, including prerequisites that should be entered for this offering.
Related Enterprise Applications shows a list of all J2EE applications required to setup this offering.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 4
Practice 3-2: Configure Offerings Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, the instructor will be:
Reviewing the Configure Offerings page.
Expanding the offering to see the Financial options.
Viewing the Setup Tasks page.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Financials offering > Actions > Change Configure button to make changes to an offering.
You must have the Application Implementation Manager or Application Implementation Consultant role to have permission to configure offerings.
2. Select the Financials > Enable for Implementation checkbox option, if not selected, to specify which offerings and options are applicable to your implementation. Your selection affects how Functional Setup Manager generates setup tasks for your implementation. All tasks needed to set up your selection are included in the auto generated task list. Tasks that are not needed by the offerings and options you have selected are excluded.
3. Click the Description icon on Financials offering to view a description of the offering. The Financials implementation has been started, so you see a status of In Progress.
4. Click the In Progress option to review the options.
5. Click the Done button.
Expand the Offerings
6. Click the Expand > Financials link to see the modules
Note: An Oracle Fusion Applications implementation may include all, none, or any combination of modules.
7. Select Features icon on Expenses to see optional or alternative business processes, which might apply to your Oracle Fusion Applications implementation. Some of the features may have other dependent features. You select progressively for those dependent features.
8. Click Done.
9. You are now ready to generate setup tasks and start implementing the offerings of your choice.
View Setup Tasks
10. Click the Setup button.
11. Select Legal Structures functional area.
12. Click Shared to see the other offerings sharing the task.
13. Click Done.
14. Click the drop down arrow icon to see links to other options.
15. Change the Show list of values to All Tasks to see required and optional tasks.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 5
16. Optionally, you can set Scope in this page. In this example, the scope value is the legal entity that you create or select to work within for your legal entity setup.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 6
Practice 3-3: Creating an Implementation Project
Overview
In this practice, you create an implementation project. An implementation project defines the scope of the implementation. You can have the implementation project populated by adding one or more related offerings or task lists.
In this example, you will be adding the Financials offering and required product task lists.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Log in as Your User.
2. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Implementation Projects.
3. Click the Create icon on the toolbar in the Search Results region.
4. Change the default name to: XXImplementation Project, replacing XX with the number assigned to you by your instructor.
5. As you press the Tab key to move out of the Name field, the Code and Description fields are populated for you. Leave all default values.
6. Click the Next button. The Create Implementation Project: Select Offerings to Implement page appears.
7. Expand the Financials offering.
8. Select the Include check box for Financials, and all of the nested offerings.
9. Click Save and Open Project.
10. Expand the Financials task list and view the implementation tasks that were included in the
Financials offering.
11. Click the Select and Add icon.
12. Enter Name: %Rapid%.
13. Click Search.
14. Select Define Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation.
15. Click Apply.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 7
16. Click Done.
17. Click on the Define Hyperion Financial Management Configuration task list.
18. Click the Delete icon.
19. Click Done to close the Manage Implementation Projects page.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 3: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Chapter 3 - Page 8
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 4: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Defining Role Mapping.
Creating a User.
Creating an Employee.
Using the Security Console.
Note: If you are a Financials only customer, use the Manage Users page to enter users and employees. This enables approvals because you need to assign a Department, Manager, Position, and so on to the user depending on how you want to structure your approval rules.
If implementing Financials and HCM, then use the Hire New Person page as we are showing in this practice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 3
Practice 4-1: Defining Role Mapping
Overview
In this practice, you will define a role mapping before you create users to automatically assign, reassign, and remove roles from users based on the conditions you specify.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage HCM Role Provisioning Rules
2. In the Manage Role Mappings page, click the Create icon.
3. Specify a Mapping Name: XXAccounting Manager.
4. Specify the following conditions that apply to automatically assign roles to users as they get hired, change jobs, or change managers.
Legal Employer: US1 Legal Entity.
Business Unit: US1 Business Unit.
Job: Accounting Manager.
System Person Type: Employee.
User Person Type: Employee.
Assignment Status: Active – Payroll Eligible.
Note: See the following screenshot for an example.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 4
5. In Associated Roles click the Add Row icon.
6. Assign the Role Name: General Accountant US Primary Ledger.
For subledger users, the data role should have the business unit context. For GL users, the data role should have the data access set context.
7. If not already selected, select the Autoprovision check box.
8. Click Save and Close.
9. Click OK.
10. Click Done.
Note: Run the Autoprovision Roles for All Users process if you want the system to automatically provision this role to all users who do not already have the role assigned.
Navigate to: Tools > Schedule Processes > Schedule New Process > search for Auto% > select Autoprovision Roles for All Users > OK > OK > Submit > OK > Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 5
Practice 4-2: Creating a User
Overview
In this practice, you will create a user.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Users.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter the user details:
Last Name: Manager.
First Name: XXAccounting.
Email: XXaccounting.manager@vision.com.
User Name: XXAccounting.Manager where XX is the number assigned by your instructor.
Person Type: Employee.
Legal Employer: US1 Legal Entity.
Business Unit: US1 Business Unit.
Job: Accounting Manager.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 6
4. Click the Autoprovision Roles button.
You should see the Employee and the General Accountant US Primary Ledger roles as defined.
5. Click Save and Close.
6. Sign Out.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 7
Practice 4-3: Creating an Employee
Overview
In this practice you will create employees from HCM’s Hire an Employee page.
Note: The Person defining a new user in HCM should first have following roles assigned to him in Fusion.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: My Workforce > New Person.
2. Click on the Tasks panel tab and click the Hire an Employee link.
3. Enter the following required fields:
Accept default Hire Date.
Accept default Hire Action: Hire.
Legal Employer: US1 Legal Entity.
Last Name: Employee
First Name: XXUser (where XX is the number assigned by your instructor.)
4. Click Next.
Note: If you get a Matching records window, click Continue.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 8
5. Enter Address details: 100 Main Street, Genoa, TX 77034 Harris County. Hint: Type in the street address and then the postal code to have the system complete the rest of the address.
6. Under E-Mail Details, click Add Row.
7. Click Type: Work E-Mail
8. Enter E-Mail: XXUser.Employee@oracle.com.
9. Click Next.
10. Select Business Unit: US1 Business Unit.
11. Enter Department: Accounting US.
12. Enter Location: Chicago.
13. Scroll down and expand Expenses Information. (This is needed for Expense Reporting.)
14. Enter the Default Expense Account: 101.10.60501.121.000.000
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 9
15. Expense Check Send-to Address: Home
16. Click Next. The Employee role is automatically assigned.
17. Click Next. If you get an error message, click OK.
18. Click Submit.
19. Click Yes.
20. Click OK to proceed.
21. Navigate to: Directory > Directory.
Note: If you can’t see the entire Navigator. Use Control and Scroll Down to minimize screen.
22. Click on the Search icon and search for your employee name. Click on your name to see details.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 10
Practice 4-4: Using the Security Console
Overview
In this practice, you will copy a role.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: More…Tools > Security Console.
2. Search for the Accounts Payable Manager.
3. Select the drop down arrow.
4. Select Copy Role.
5. Select Copy top role > click Copy Role.
6. Add your XX to the end of the Role Name and the Role Code.
7. Click Next.
8. Click in the box at the end of the first row.
9. Select Remove Data Security Policy.
10. Click in the box at the end of the second row.
11. Select Edit Data Security Policy.
12. Review the data and click OK without making any changes.
13. Click Next.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 11
14. Review the hierarchy.
15. Click Next.
16. Click Add User: XXUser.Employee.
17. Search for your user.
18. Click Add User to Role.
19. Click OK and Cancel.
20. Click Next.
21. Review the summary report.
22. Click Submit and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 4: Security Overview
Chapter 4 - Page 12
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 5: Discussing the Vision Story and Common Applications
Chapter 5 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 5: Discussing the Vision Story and Common Applications
Chapter 5
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 5: Discussing the Vision Story and Common Applications
Chapter 5 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 5
There are no practices for this lesson.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 6: Overview
Job Title*
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Reviewing Shared Components.
Entering Data in the Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet.
Uploading the Chart of Accounts File.
Verifying Deployment Was Successful Demonstration.
Uploading the Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File.
Reviewing an Existing Legal Jurisdiction.
Reviewing Legal Addresses for Legal Entities and Reporting Units.
Creating a Legal Authority.
Searching for Your Legal Entity.
Viewing a Legal Reporting Unit.
Instructor Setup: Disable the cross-validation rule.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Cross-Validation (Hint: Enter “Cross” in the search field.)
2. Select the US Chart of Accounts.
3. Search.
4. Uncheck the Enabled check box.
5. End date with yesterday’s date in the To Date.
6. Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 3
Practice 6-1: Reviewing Shared Components
Overview
In this practice, you review the chart of accounts, calendar, and currencies (called the 3 Cs) as well as journal source and category setup that are shared across the ledger and related subledgers by creating a journal entry.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: General Accounting > Journals.
2. Verify you are in the Data Access Set: US Primary Leger. The Data Access Set controls the ledger and data you have access to.
3. Click the Create Journals link.
4. Enter a Journal Batch name: XXAdjustment and a Description: Adjustment to the cash account.
5. What Accounting Period is defaulting? .This is the current open period in the ledger’s calendar.
6. What is the default journal Source?
7. Enter the same name and description in the Journal region.
8. Click the Currency list icon to see the enabled currencies.
9. Click the Category list icon to see the predefined categories.
10. Select the Category: Adjustment.
11. In the Journal Lines region, click the Select: Account icon at the end of the Account field on Line 1 in the Journal Lines region to show the segments and default values of an accounting flexfield. The Account is created by combining segment values from your chart of accounts setup.
12. Select 11200 Cash in the Account segment.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 4
13. Click OK. The account is displayed with a segment separator you can define between each segment value.
14. Enter 1000 in the Debit column. This amount is posted to the Cash account when the journal is posted.
15. Tab twice to complete the line.
16. Click the Select: Account icon on Line 2 and select 11101 USBNK Checking Account.
17. Click OK.
18. Enter 1000 in the Credit column. Tab twice to complete the line.
19. Click the Post button to save and post the journal entry.
20. Click OK in the confirmation approval message.
21. Click the Cancel button to exit the page.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 5
Practice 6-2: Entering Data in the Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Overview
In this practice, you will enter data to create your chart of accounts, ledger, legal entity, and calendar replacing XX with the number assigned by your instructor.
Rapid implementation is a way to configure the Oracle Fusion Financial Enterprise and Financial Reporting Structures quickly using sheets in a workbook to upload lists of companies (legal entities), ledgers, business units, chart of account values, and other similar data.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Create Chart of Accounts, Ledger, Legal Entities, and Business Units in Spreadsheet
2. Click Open. The Instructions tab opens first. It contains instructions on loading the data and uploading the spreadsheet.
3. Click the Options button in the Security Warning immediately under the ribbon menu bar and select the Enable this content option if the option appears.
4. Save the file to the Desktop and name
XXRapidImplementationForGeneralLedger(1).xlsm.
5. Click the COA, Calendar, and Ledger tab on the bottom of the spreadsheet.
6. Enter the following data or select from drop-down lists on available fields. Save often.
Field Value
*Name
XXLedger
*Currency
USD
Period Frequency
Monthly
*Adjusting Periods
Once at year end
*Fiscal Year Start Date
01/01/YYYY where YYYY is the current year
*Segment Segment Label *Short Prompt *Display Width
XXCompany
Primary Balancing Segment
CO
2
XXDepartment
Cost Center Segment
DEP
3
XXAccount
Natural Account Segment
ACCT
4
XXIntercompany
Intercompany Segment
IC
2
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 6
7. Save.
8. Click the Add Segment Sheets to add a worksheet for the cost center segment called XXDepartment.
9. Save.
10. Click the Business Units tab.
11. Enter Name: XXBusiness Unit.
12. Enter Default Legal Entity Name: XXVision Corporate HQ
13. Save.
14. Click the Companies and Legal Entities tab and enter:
Note: This table has the field names going across and the line data going down. For example, Line 1 is Parent 1:99, Company Description: Total Company.
Column Line 1 Line 2 Line 3
Parent 1
99
*Child Value
00
01
*Company Description
Total Company
Corporate
Domestic Operations
Legal Entity Name
XXVision Corporate HQ
XXVision America
Legal Entity Identifier
XX-1234568
XX-1234569
Address for first legal entity:
Country: United States Address Line:XX101 Main Street
City: Houston State: TX Country: Harris Province: NA Postal Code: XX003
Address for first second entity:
Country: United States Address Line: XX102 Main Street
City: Houston State: TX Country: Harris Province: NA Postal Code: XX003
*Legal Entity Registration Number
XX-1234568
XX-1234569
*Legal Reporting Unit Registration Number
XX-1234568
XX-1234569
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 7
15. Save.
16. Click the Natural Accounts tab and enter:
Column Value Description Account Type Financial Category
Parent 2
9999
Total Parent
Owner’s Equity
Parent 1
1000
Total Assets
Asset
*Child Value
1110
Cash
Asset-Cash
Cash
*Child Value
1210
Accounts Receivable
Asset- Accounts Receivable
Accounts receivable
*Child Value
1260
Allowance for Bad Debt
Asset
Accounts receivable
*Child Value
1350
Prepayment
Asset- Prepayments
Accounts payable
Parent 1
2000
Total Trade Payables
Liability
*Child Value
2210
Accounts Payable
Liability- Accounts Payable
Accounts payable
*Child Value
2220
Contracts Payable
Liability
Accounts payable
*Child Value
2230
Expense Accrual Distribution
Liability
Accounts payable
*Child Value
2640
Sales Tax
Liability
Accounts payable
Parent 1
3000
Total Owner’s Equity
Owner’s Equity
*Child Value
3310
Retained Earnings
Owner’s Equity
– Retained Earnings
Retained earnings
*Child Value
3500
Translation Adjustment
Owner’s Equity
Other equity related
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 8
Column Value Description Account Type Financial Category
Parent 1
4000
Total Revenue
Revenue
*Child Value
4110
Technology Sales
Revenue
Sales revenue
*Child Value
4120
Financing Contracts
Revenue
Sales revenue
Parent 1
5000
Total Expense
Expense
*Child Value
5105
Salaries
Expense
Sales payroll
*Child Value
5120
Suspense
Expense
Other operating expenses
*Child Value
5130
Realized Gain/Loss
Expense - Realized Gain/Loss on Foreign Currency Conversions
Other sales expenses
*Child Value
5610
Freight
Expense – Freight
Freight Expense
*Child Value
5620
Miscellaneous
Expense - Miscellaneous Expenses
Miscellaneous operating expenses
*Child Value
7790
Discount Taken
Expense - Discount Taken
Other sales expenses
*Child Value
7890
Conversion Rate Variance Gain/Loss
Expense - Conversion Rate Variance Gain/Loss
Other sales expenses
*Child Value
7990
Rounding Differences
Expense - Rounding Difference and Balancing Adjustments
Other sales expenses
17. Save.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 9
18. Click the Financial Sequences tab and enter:
Transactions Restart Initial Value
Payables Invoices
Annually
1
Payments
Receivables Invoices
Annually
1
Receivables Credit Memos
Annually
1
Receivables Adjustment Activities
Annually
1
Subledger Journals
Annually
100
General Ledger Journals
Annually
1
19. Save.
20. Click the XXDepartment tab and enter:
Column Name Value Child Value Description
Parent1
999
Total Departments
*Child Value
000
Balance Sheet
*Child Value
110
Administration
*Child Value
120
Sales
*Child Value
400
Corporate
21. Save.
22. Return to the COA, Calendar and Ledger tab.
23. Click Step 1: Validate.
24. Correct any errors and validate again until all errors are fixed.
25. Click the Step 2: Generate Chart of Accounts File button.
26. Save to the Desktop and name the file:XXChartOfAccounts.zip.
27. Click the Step 3: Generate Ledger, LE, and BU File button.
28. Save to the Desktop and name the file: XXFinancialsCommonEntities.zip.
29. Close the spreadsheet.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 10
Practice 6-3: Uploading the Chart of Accounts File
Overview
In this practice, you upload the Chart of Accounts file created from the rapid implementation spreadsheet.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
You are uploading the Chart of Accounts file created from your spreadsheet data in the previous activity. The application will use this upload to create the chart of accounts structure, instance, value sets, and values.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Upload Chart of Accounts.
2. Use the Data File: Browse button to find your XXChartOfAccounts.zip file.
3. Click Submit.
4. Click OK
5. Click Done
6. Navigator > Tools > Scheduled Processes.
7. Verify that the process was completed without errors or warnings. Status should be
Succeeded.
8. If your spreadsheet completes with an error, click the Name of the process.
9. Click the name of the Attachment in the Log and Output region at the bottom of the window that opens on under the list of processes.
Common errors are:
Parent and child data not entered correctly.
Extra spaces after some of the values.
Incomplete data.
10. Double check the data and fix any errors in the spreadsheet.
11. Re-create the files and upload again.
12. Click No to the information window question.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 11
Practice 6-4: Verifying Deployment Was Successful Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, the instructor verifies that all charts of accounts key flexfield were deployed successfully. Wait for all the students to finish their chart of accounts.
Note: Deployment runs automatically as of Release 11.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
The deployment process runs automatically and deploys all charts of accounts key flexfields in the instance. If there are errors, fix the errors including completing incomplete chart of accounts. Continue running the process until it completes successful.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Chart of Accounts Structure Instances
> Click Search > Deploy Flexfield.
2. Click the Search button without entering in the search fields.
3. Use the scrollbar to move to the right to look for the column called Deployment Status.
4. Verify that a green check mark appears under the Deployment Status column.
5. If there are errors, fix the errors including completing incomplete chart of accounts. Continue running the process until it completes successful.
Click the Deploy Flexfield button.
Monitor Deployment Status.
When 100% is reached, click the OK button.
6. Click the Done button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 12
Practice 6-5: Uploading the Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to upload the Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit file created from the rapid implementation spreadsheet.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Upload Ledger, Legal Entities, and Business Units.
2. Use the Browse button to find your XXFinancialsCommonEntities.zip file.
3. Click Submit.
4. Click Ok in the confirmation message.
5. Click Done to close.
6. Navigator > Tools > Scheduled Processes.
7. Verify that the process completed without errors. Use the refresh button if needed until the process completes.
Note: If your spreadsheet completes with an error:
8. Click the Name of the process.
9. Click the name of the Attachment in the Log and Output region at the bottom of the window that opens on under the list of processes.
Common errors are:
Parent and child data not entered correctly.
Extra spaces after some of the values.
Incomplete data.
10. Double check the data and fix any errors in the spreadsheet.
11. Re-create the files and upload again.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 13
Practice 6-6: Reviewing an Existing Legal Jurisdictions
Overview
In this practice, you will review legal jurisdictions. Legal jurisdictions and related legal authorities are defined to support multiple legal entity registrations.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Legal Jurisdictions.
2. Select Income Tax in the Legislative Category list.
3. Click the Search button.
4. Sort ascending the Name column.
5. Select the link for one of the legal jurisdiction to view the details.
6. View the following fields:
Name.
Territory.
Legislative Category. Hover over the label Legislative Category to see the embedded help: This represents the type of law associated with a given registration.
Identifying: Yes indicates the first jurisdiction a legal entity must register with to do business in a country.
Start Date is optional. You can also add an End Date to indicate a date that the jurisdiction may no longer be used.
Legal Entity Registration Code.
Legal Reporting Unit Registration Code.
Legal Functions. Optionally, you may enter one of more.
7. Select Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 14
Practice 6-7: Reviewing Legal Addresses for Legal Entities and Reporting Units
Overview
In this practice, you will review an existing legal address for legal entities and reporting units.
A legal address is the address a legal entity or reporting unit uses to register with a legal authority. A legal entity and reporting unit may use different addresses for different authorities and hence, may have more than one registered address. This legal address must be located within the territory entered.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Legal Addresses.
2. Search Country: United States.
3. Select a row header for an address entry.
4. Select Edit.
5. View the Location Update fields.
6. Click Cancel to close the Location Update window.
7. Do not save any updates.
8. Click Cancel to close the Manage Legal Addresses window.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 15
Practice 6-8: Creating a Legal Authority
Overview
In this practice, you will create a legal authority.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Legal Authorities.
2. Click Create.
3. Enter Name: XXLegal Authority, replacing XX with the number assigned to you by your instructor.
4. Enter Tax Authority Type: Collecting and reporting.
5. In the Address region, select Create.
6. The Site Number is automatically assigned.
7. Enter Address Line 1, 121 Spear Street, Suite 400.
8. Enter Postal Code: 94105. The remainder of the address fields populate for you.
Optionally, Enter Address Purposes Details
9. Select Add Row.
10. Select Purpose: Business.
11. The Purpose from Date will default to today's date.
12. Select OK to close the Create Address window.
13. In the Legislative Categories region, select Create.
14. Enter Legislative Category: Local Tax.
15. Select Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 16
Practice 6-9: Searching for Your Legal Entity
Overview
In this practice, you will review and edit your legal entity and legal entity registration that were created when you uploaded your spreadsheet.
You define a legal entity for each registered company or other entity recognized in law for which you want to perform intercompany trading, record assets, liabilities, and income, or pay transaction taxes.
A legal entity registration is the record of a party's identity related details with the appropriate government or legal authorities for the purpose of claiming and ensuring legal and or commercial rights and responsibilities.
A legal entity registration with the same name as that of the legal entity will be created by default.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Working within an implementation project is required because you must select a scope value from within the implementation project. In this example, the scope value is the legal entity that you create or select to work within for your legal entity setup.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Legal Entities for Financials.
2. In order to review your legal entity, click the hyperlink in the Selected Scope column for the Manage Legal Entity task.
3. The Select Scope window appears.
4. Select Search Legal Entities radio button.
5. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
6. Search Name: XX.
7. You are now on the Manage Legal Entities page.
8. Select your legal entity, XXVision America, and click the Edit icon.
9. If your legal entity needs to be registered to report payroll tax and social insurance, select the Payroll statutory unit check box.
10. If your legal entity has employees, select the Legal employer check box.
11. If the legal entity is a legal employer, but not a payroll statutory unit, check the flags accordingly. You will need to select the payroll statutory unit for the attribute that becomes mandatory.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 17
12. Click Save and Close.
13. To set the scope to the new legal entity, click the hyperlink in the Selected Scope column for the Manage Legal Entity Registrations.
14. The Select Scope window appears. With the Manage Legal Entity Registrations option selected, select Select and Add from the Legal Entity drop down list.
15. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
16. Search and select your XXVision America.
17. Click the Save and Close button on the very bottom of the window.
18. Manage Registrations page opens. If it does not open, perform the following steps:
19. Click Done.
Select Manage Legal Entity Registrations. The name of your XXVision America
should appear in the page next to the page title.
If not, go back and set Scope again.
20. Select the row header for Registered Name: XXVision America.
21. Select Edit to view the Legal Entity Registration details. View the fields.
22. Click Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 18
Practice 6-10: Viewing a Legal Reporting Unit
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to create a reporting unit.
When a legal entity is created, a legal reporting unit with the same name as that of the entity is also automatically created.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Legal Reporting Unit
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Legal Reporting Units for Financials.
2. Expand Define Legal Reporting Units for Financials.
3. To set the scope for the legal entity, click the hyperlink in the Selected Scope column for the Manage Legal Reporting Unit.
4. The Select Scope window appears.
5. Select the Manage Legal Reporting Unit option.
6. Select Legal Entity: XXVision America.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 19
7. Select Legal Reporting Unit drop down box: Select and Add.
8. Click Apply
9. Select the row header for XXVision America.
10. Click the Save and Close button in the very bottom of the window.
The name of your XXLegal Entity should appear in the page next to the page title. If not, go back and set scope again.
11. View the details.
12. Click Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 6: Configuring Enterprise Structures
Chapter 6 - Page 20
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 7: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Searching for Your Value Sets.
Searching for Your Chart of Accounts Structure and Instance.
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration.
Creating an Account Shorthand Alias
Entering Values.
Searching and Completing Your Accounting Hierarchy.
Publishing Accounting Hierarchy
Creating an Account Combination.
Defining Cross-Validation Rules.
Verifying Your Calendar.
Reviewing and Creating Currencies.
Creating Conversion Rate Types.
Entering Daily Rates.
Entering a Currency Conversion Journal
Searching for Your Ledger.
Verifying Your Ledger Options.
Verifying Your Legal Entities and Balancing Segments Assignments.
Defining Reporting Currencies.
Completing the Ledger Configuration.
Creating a Ledger Set.
Reviewing Data Access Set Security.
Creating Data Access Set Security.
Opening the First Accounting Period.
Creating and Generating an Allocation Rule.
Creating a Revaluation.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 3
Practice 7-1: Searching for Your Value Sets
Overview
In this practice, you will view your three values sets for your chart of accounts: XXCompany, XXDepartment, and XXAccount replacing XX with your initials.
Value sets are created as the first step in the chart of accounts configuration. The value sets are then assigned to the chart of accounts instance. Do not create values until after assigning your values sets in chart of accounts segments because this step is needed to establish which value set attributes should be exposed for setting when defining a value.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Chart of Accounts Value Sets.
2. Search for your value sets. Enter Value Set Code: XX.
3. Click Search.
4. Click the Edit button to look at each value set.
5. Select the Uppercase only check box for each value set.
6. Click Save and Close button twice.
7. Click the Done button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 4
Practice 7-2: Searching for Your Chart of Accounts Structure and Instance
Overview
In this practice, you will search for your chart of accounts structure and structure instance called XXLedger, created from your spreadsheet. The Chart of accounts structure defines the framework for one or more chart of accounts instances.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance >Manage Chart of Accounts Structures.
2. Click the Search button.
3. Select Key Flexfield Name: Accounting Flexfield.
4. Click the Manage Structures button. The Manage Key Flexfield Structures page opens.
5. Enter Structure Code: XX.
6. Click the Search button to find your structure.
7. Click the Edit icon.
8. Pick a segment and click Edit icon to see the assigned Segment Label.
9. Click the Cancel button twice.
10. Click Done once. Remain on the page.
Search for your chart of accounts instance called XXLedger.
11. Click the Manage Structure Instances button.
12. Enter Structure Instance Code: XX.
13. Click the Search button to find your structure instance code.
14. Click Edit icon.
15. Add the word Instance to the name of the instance so reads: XXLedger Instance.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 5
16. Check the Shorthand alias enabled check box.
17. Pick a Segment Code and click Edit button to see the assigned structure instance options.
18. Click the Cancel button.
19. Click the Save and Close button.
20. Click the Done button twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 6
Practice 7-3: Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, your instructor deploys all charts of accounts key flexfield if updates have been made to the class charts of accounts instance in the previous lab. Wait for all students to finish updating their chart of accounts instance. Then run the process.
Caution: Only one person has to do this, but if you are not in a classroom setting, run the process to be able to use your updated chart of accounts.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Chart of Accounts Structures.
2. Click the Search button.
3. Use the scroll bar to move to the right.
4. Look for the column called Deployment Status.
5. Click the icon under the heading. Field indicates Edited or Patched which means there has been activity on the Accounting Flexfield.
6. Click the Deploy Flexfield button.
7. Monitor deployment status.
8. When 100% is reached, click the OK button.
9. Verify that a green check mark appears under the Deployment Status column.
10. Click the Done button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 7
Practice 7-4: Creating an Account Shorthand Alias
Overview
In this practice, you will create an account shorthand alias to speed data entry.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
1. Tasks
2. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Shorthand Aliases.
3. Select the Chart of Accounts: XX Ledger Instance.
4. Click Search.
5. Click the Add Row icon.
6. Name: Cash.
7. Company: 01
8. Department: 110
9. Account: 1110
10. Intercompany: 00
11. Description: Alias for Cash Account.
12. Enabled: Yes
13. Start Date: Today's Date
14. Click Save.
15. Click the Export to Excel icon to view your shorthand aliases in Excel.
16. Close the Excel sheet.
17. Click Cancel.
The Open Period practice tests your alias.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 8
Practice 7-5: Entering Values
Overview
In this practice, you will enter the valid values into your value sets.
After the value sets have been added to the newly created chart of accounts structure and structure instance, the values can be entered for each value set attached to a segment in the chart of accounts. You are not creating combinations, only the lists of individual values that will appear in the list of values of each segment.
Caution: Do not add values to value sets before attaching the value set to the newly created chart of accounts structure and structure instance as your values will be invalid.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Chart of Accounts Value Sets.
2. Search for your XXAccount XXLedger value set.
3. Click the Manage Values button.
4. Click the Search button to see your values you uploaded with the spreadsheet.
5. Click the Create icon to enter your values.
Note: Enter the values carefully because if the cash account is misclassified as Expense instead of Asset and closed to retained earnings at the end of an accounting year, the balance is reduced to zero instead of being carried forward into the next year.
6. Accept the Third Party Control Account default value of No on all values.
Note: The Reconciliation Flag is not used as it is out of scope of V1; therefore, the values are set to No by default.
7. Save and Close between each value entered and click the Create icon again.
Value Description Account Type Financial Category
9110
Headcount (STAT)
Asset
9910
Default Intercompany
Liability
8. Click Save and Close.
9. Click Done.
10. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 9
Practice 7-6: Searching and Completing Your Accounting Hierarchy
Overview
In this practice, you will verify the account hierarchy that your company will use with your cross-validation rules and revaluations.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Search for Your Tree
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Account Hierarchies. Search, create, and edit your account hierarchies.
2. Select your hierarchy that was created from the spreadsheet: XXCompany XXLedger.
3. Click the Edit icon to review the definition of your tree.
4. Click OK in the Update Tree warning message.
Use the Manage Account Hierarchies: Specify Definition page to define the basic details of the tree.
5. In the Data Source Parameters: Click the Expand button to expand the Accounting Flexfield Hierarchy Detail Values and Accounting Flexfield Hierarchy Parent Values rows.
6. Review the information in the Bind_ValueSetCode field on both levels: XXCompany XX Ledger.
This is the Value Set name and there is no list of values. When entering, you have to type the name in exactly as it is set up in database, or you do not see any values.
7. Click the Next button to navigate through the next two pages.
8. Click the Cancel button to return to the Manage Account Hierarchies page. Remain on the page.
Search for Your Tree Version
9. Select and expand your tree.
10. Select your tree version XXCompany XXLedger Current by clicking the row header at the beginning of the name.
The file upload from the spreadsheet created two versions, one called current and the other called base to enforce generation of the fully qualified name and minimization of changes in the future.
11. Click the Edit icon to review your account hierarchy.
12. Click OK in the Update Tree warning message.
13. Click the Next button.
14. Answer Yes if you get a warning message.
15. Expand the parent node 99 to see the children.
16. Click the Cancel button.
Complete the Account Hierarchy
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 10
17. Highlight your tree version that now says Draft.
18. Click the Actions menu > Audit.
19. Use the Audit Results region to start the Audit process. After the audit is performed, the status of the tree version can be set to active.
20. Click the Online Audit button to start the Audit process.
21. Click the OK button to acknowledge the message when the process finishes.
22. Click the Done button.
23. Highlight your tree version again.
24. Click the Actions menu > Flatten menu > Column Flattening. Column flattening optimizes parent-child information for run-time performance by storing an additional column in a table for all parents of a child.
25. Click the Online Flattening button.
26. Select to OK button to acknowledge the message when the process finishes.
27. Click the Done button.
28. Highlight your tree version again.
29. Click the Actions menu > Flatten menu > Row Flattening. Row flattening optimizes parent-child information for run-time performance by storing additional rows in a table.
30. Click the Online Flattening button.
31. Click the OK button to acknowledge the message when the process finishes.
32. Click the Done button.
33. Highlight your tree version.
34. Use the Actions menu > Set Status menu > Active to activate the tree.
35. Click the OK button to acknowledge the message.
36. Verify that your tree version is now set to Active.
37. Click the Done button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 11
Practice 7-7: Publishing Accounting Hierarchy
Overview
In this practice, you will verify your account hierarchy that was created by your spreadsheet for your company to use with your cross-validation rules and revaluations.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Publish Account Hierarchies >.
2. Use the Publish Account Hierarchies page to search and publish account hierarchies.
3. Click the Chart of Accounts field.
4. Select XXLedger Instance from the list.
5. Click the Search button.
6. Expand the XXCompany XXLedger row.
7. Click on the XXAccount XXLedger Current and Base tree versions rows.
8. Scroll across and verify that the Publish check box is selected for each tree versions.
9. If not, click the Publish button.
Note: It may take a minute or two to see the change.
10. Click the Save and Close button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 12
Practice 7-8: Creating an Account Combination
Overview
In this practice, you will create an account using a spreadsheet for your sales cost center and salaries account in your chart of accounts.
Account combinations contain a completed set of segment values that uniquely identifies an account in the chart of accounts.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Account Combinations.
2. Select your chart of accounts from the Chart of Accounts list.
3. Click Search.
4. Select the Create in Spreadsheet button.
5. Select Open.
6. Answer Yes to the question: Do you want to connect?
7. Sign in with your FASXX.student and password.
If you get a message saying the versions are not the same, select OK and proceed. This message has no effect on the success of the spreadsheet upload.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 13
8. Enter 01-120-5105-00 in the appropriate cells.
9. Click the Submit button.
10. Accept the default and click OK.
11. If successful, the Row Status shows Row inserted successfully.
12. Return to the Manage Account Combinations page and Search.
13. Your new account should appear in the list.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 14
Practice 7-9: Defining Cross-Validation Rules
Overview
In this practice, you will enter a new cross-validation rule using a spreadsheet to prevent your XXLedger for using cost center 120 with any account except revenue account 4110 in an account combination.
Cross-validation rules prevent specific combinations of segment values in your account combinations. For example, preventing a particular cost center from being combined with a specific company value. Cross-validation rules only affect the creation of new account combinations.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Create Cross Validation Rules in Spreadsheet.
(Hint: type “Cross” in the search field)
2. Select Open.
3. Answer Yes to the question: Do you want to connect?
4. Sign in with your FASXX.student and password.
If you get a message saying the versions are not the same, select OK and proceed. This message has no effect on the success of the spreadsheet upload.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 15
5. Select XXLedger Instance chart of accounts
6. Enter Name: XXCVR and an optional Description: Revenue Rule.
7. Enter Error Message: XXAccount: For Department 120, only use account 4110. .
When the rule is evaluated, an account combination must contain 4110 for department 120 or the account combination is not created.
8. Enter Condition Filter Segment: XXDepartment.
9. Enter Condition Filter Values: 120. The cross-validation rule evaluates if Department 120 was entered and if it is the defined value, then, the validation process continues to evaluate the rule.
Note: If you do not specify any statement in the condition filter, then the rule is always evaluated.
10. Enter the Validation Filter Segment: XXAccount.
11. Enter Validation Filter Values: 4110.
12. Tab out of the entry rows.
13. Click the Submit button.
14. Accept the default setting and click OK.
15. If successful, the Row Status shows Row inserted successfully.
16. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Cross-Validation Rules.
17. Select your Chart of Account: XXLedger Instance.
18. Review your rule and its filters by clicking on the View Filter icon.
19. Click Save and Close.
Test Cross-Validation Rule:
20. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Account Combinations.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 16
21. Select your XXLedger Instance.
22. Click the Add Row icon. 23. Enter 00-120-2220-00.
24. Save. Your error message appears.
25. Click OK to dismiss the message.
26. Click Cancel to exit the Manage Account Combinations page.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 17
Practice 7-10: Verifying Your Calendar
Overview
In this practice, you will verify that your accounting calendar starting January 1, 2013 and ending December 31st each with one adjusting period at the end of the year.
Your company, Vision Corporation implementing Oracle Fusion Financials and has created an accounting calendar using the rapid implementation spreadsheet process to add to the primary ledger to record journal entries and to control reporting.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Accounting Calendars.
Use the Manage Accounting Calendars page to create and edit calendars.
2. Select your XXLedger calendar.
3. Click Edit to review what has been created by spreadsheet.
4. Click the Cancel button.
5. Click the Done button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 18
Practice 7-11: Reviewing and Creating Currencies
Overview
In this practice, you will verify that USD, GBP, and CAD are enabled.
Your company, Vision Corporation, has a ledger currency of United States dollars (USD), and is doing business with suppliers in:
Canada in Canadian dollars (CAD).
Ultraland, a new country which uses Ultraland dollars (ULD).
You also have intercompany transactions with your Vision UK Banking, Ltd entity, which uses Great Britain pounds sterling (GBP).
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Reviewing Currencies
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Currencies.
2. Enter USD currency in the Currency Code.
3. Click Search button.
4. Click Expand icon to see details.
5. Repeat for CAD and GBP.
Creating Currencies
6. Click the New icon or use Action > New.
7. Enter Currency Code: XXULD.
8. Enter Currency Name: XXUltraland Dollars.
9. Enter Description: Currency for Ultraland.
10. Click the Enabled check box to start using the currency, if not checked.
11. Enter the first day of the current month in the Start Date.
12. Click the Save button.
13. Click the Expand icon and accepted defaults.
14. Click Save and Close button.
15. After all the students have completed creating their currencies; the instructor does the following steps:
Navigator to: Tools > Scheduled Processes.
Search for and run: Create Currency Dimension Members.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 19
Practice 7-12: Creating Conversion Rate Types
Overview
In this practice, you will create a new conversion rate type for your payables transactions called XXSPCORP.
Your company, Vision Corporation, has a ledger currency of United States dollars (USD), and needs different conversion rate types for your payables and receivables transactions with Ultraland, which uses Ultraland dollars (ULD).
For receivables, use your corporate conversion rate types.
For payables, use a special corporate conversion rate type.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Conversion Rate Types.
2. Click the Add row icon.
3. Enter XXSPCORP in the Name field.
4. Enable Enforce Inverse Relationship and Enable Cross Rates.
5. Enter your currency XXULD as the Cross Rate Pivot Currency.
6. Add USD and CAD as the contra currencies by clicking the Add Row button in the Contra Currencies region.
7. Click Save and Close.
8. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 20
Practice 7-13: Entering Daily Rates
Overview
In this practice, you will enter and view your daily rates.
Your company, Vision Corporation, has a ledger currency of United States dollars (USD), and is doing business with Ultraland, which uses Ultraland dollars (ULD).
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
To use the Daily Rates spreadsheet, ADF Desktop Integrator (DI) must be installed first.
Note: In the classroom, ADFdi is already installed so skip to step.5.
1. In the application, navigate to: Tools > Download ADF Desktop Integrator.
2. Click on the file that opens.
3. Click setup.exe.
4. Follow the prompts.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 21
Tasks
5. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Daily Rates or General Accounting: Period Close > Manage Currency Rates:
6. Click the Daily Rates tab.
7. Open a spreadsheet template using the Create in Spreadsheet button.
8. Answer OK in the box that opens. Answer Yes to the second box.
9. Sign in with your instance User Name and Password.
10. Enter the following daily rates data:
*From Currency: USD.
*To Currency: XXULD.
*Conversion Rate: XXSPCORP.
*From Conversion: 1st day of the current month.
*To Conversion Date: Last Day of the current month.
*Conversion Rate: 56.
11. Submit icon to submit the spreadsheet.
12. Click the OK button in the Submission box and the options box that follows.
13. Verify that the Record Status shows that the rows inserted successfully.
14. Click OK to the submission confirmation message.
15. Close the spreadsheet and return to the Oracle Fusion environment.
16. When asked if you want to save the spreadsheet click No.
View Your Rates
17. Click the Daily Rates tab.
18. Enter From Currency: USD.
19. Enter To Currency: XXULD.
20. Enter Rate Date: Current accounting period beginning and ending dates.
21. Click Search.
22. Review your rates.
23. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 22
Practice 7-14: Entering a Currency Conversion Journal
Note: The instructor or one student must turn off Journal Approval before the practice is performed.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Search for Journal Sources.
2. Select Go to Task icon on the Manage Journal Sources.
3. Uncheck the Require Journal Approval check box.
Overview
In this practice, you create and post a foreign currency journal.
Your company, Vision Corporation has a ledger currency of United States dollars (USD), and is doing business with a new country has been created in Eastern Europe, Ultraland, which uses Ultraland dollars (ULD) as it national currency. You need to create a journal entry for a payables transaction that was booked to the wrong account.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
4. Navigate to: General Accounting: Journals
5. Select the US Primary Ledger data access set.
6. Click on Create Journal.
7. Create a journal batch named XX_AP Correction for the latest open period.
8. Name the journal entry XX_AP Correction and enter Accrual for the Category. Choose the XXULD currency defined in a previous activity.
9. Enter today’s date as the Conversion Date and the Conversion Rate Type: XXSPCORP.
10. Enter the following journal lines:
Account Debit Credit Description
101.10.22100.000.000.000
10,567.00
Correction of department for payables transaction.
101.10.59410.110.000.000
10,567.00
Correction of department for payables transaction.
11. Post the journal batch.
The XXULD amount is converted to the ledger currency USD amount automatically in the Accounted fields.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 23
Practice 7-15: Searching for Your Ledger
Overview
In this practice, you will search for your primary ledger.
The primary ledger is the main record keeping ledger and consists of the chart of accounts, calendar, currency, and accounting method.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Primary Ledgers.
2. Note the name of your primary ledger, chart of accounts, calendar, and currency.
3. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 24
Practice 7-16: Verifying Your Ledger Options
Overview
In this practice, you will enter the settings list below for your ledger's options. Setting ledger options is one of the most important tasks in configuring your ledgers.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Accounting Configurations.
2. Click Select in the Specify Ledger Options: Selected Scope column.
3. Select the Specify Ledger Options option.
4. In the Specify Ledger Options field, select Select and Add.
5. Click the Apply and Go to Task button.
6. Select your XXLedger US from the list.
7. Scroll to the bottom and click the Save and Close button.
8. Setting Accounting Calendar Region Options
9. Review the Accounting Calendar that defaults from your ledger.
10. Note that Jan-XX is the First Open Period for your ledger.
11. Enter 3 for the Number of Future Enterable Periods.
12. Selecting the Subledger Accounting Region Options
13. Accept the default Accounting Method from your ledger.
14. Select US American English as your Journal Language.
15. Completing the Period Close Region Options
16. Verify your Retained Earnings Account: 00-000-3310-00.
Note: If the field is not populated, enter the account.
17. Enter Cumulative Translation Adjustment Account: 00-000-3500-00.
Specifying the Journal Processing Region Options Specify the Balance options:
18. Click to enable Suspense: General Ledger.
19. Click to enable Suspense: Subledger Accounting.
20. Enter Default Suspense Account: 00-400-5120-00.
21. Enter Rounding Account: 00-400-7990-00.
22. Enter Entered Currency Balancing Account: 00-400-7990-00.
23. Enter Balancing Threshold Percent: 0.
Enable all of the following Entry options:
24. Notify when prior period journal is entered.
25. Allow mixed statistical and monetary journals.
26. Validate reference date.
27. Separate journals by accounting date during journal import.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 25
For Intercompany options:
28. Select Enable intercompany accounting.
29. Click OK to close the confirmation window.
For Reversal options:
30. Leave the Journal Reversal Criteria Set blank. You can select any predefined criteria set from the list of values in the Journal Reversal Criteria Set at any time.
31. Deselect the Run AutoReverse after open period check box. You can return to this page and enable this option later.
32. Leave the Synchronize Reversals between Primary and Secondary Ledger deselected: Enable this option to automatically reverse the corresponding journal in the secondary ledger when a journal in the primary ledger is manually reversed.
For Sequencing options:
33. Leave the default of Sequencing By of No sequencing to not use sequencing.
34. Leave Enforce Document Sequencing set to None.
35. Select No for Enforce chronological order on document date if you don’t require chronological sequences.36.
36. Click Save and Close to go back to your implementation project.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 26
Practice 7-17: Verifying Your Legal Entities and Balancing Segments Assignments
Overview
In this practice, you will review your ledger configuration to verify which legal entities and balancing segments have been assigned when your spreadsheet was uploaded.
Assign your legal entities to your ledgers to limit your ledger transactions to just those legal entities.
Assign your balancing segment values to your legal entities. After assignment, all balancing segment values are available for journal and transaction processing.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Accounting Configurations.
Note: Scope should be set to your XXLedger US during the Verify Your Ledger options activity. If not, then set scope:
2. Click Assign Legal Entities.
3. In the Primary Ledger field, select Select and Add.
4. Click the Apply and Go to Task button.
5. Select your XXVision America from the list.
6. Scroll to the bottom and click Save and Close button.
Verify Your Legal Entity and Balancing Segment Assignments
7. Click Assign Legal Entities.
8. Verify your legal entities XXVision Corporate HQ and XXVision America are assigned.
9. Click the Cancel button.
10. Click Assign Balancing Segment Values to Legal Entities.
11. Verify your balancing segments are assigned automatically: 00: XXVision Corporate HQ
01: XXVision America
12. Click the Cancel button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 27
Practice 7-18: Defining Reporting Currencies
Overview
In this practice, you will set up reporting currencies tied to your XXPrimary Ledger.
A reporting currency is linked to a primary or secondary ledger, and is maintained at one of three data conversion levels.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Set up reporting currencies tied to your XXPrimary Ledger.
2. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Ledgers > Manage Reporting Currencies.
3. Click the Create icon.
4. Name: Enter XXReporting Currencies.
5. Currency Conversion Level: Select Journal.
6. Currency: Enter GBP.
7. In the Ledger Options region.
8. First Open Period: Enter Jan-XX where XX equals the current year.
9. Rounding Account: Accept default of 00-110-7990-00.
10. Revaluation Basis: Accept the default of Entered currency.
11. Enable journal approval: Do not select.
In the Currency Translation Options region
12. Default Conversion Rate Type: Corporate.
13. Retain Transaction Rate Type: Yes
14. In the Error Handling region:
15. Missing Conversion Rate: Click Use last rate.
16. Number of Days to Find Last Rate: 30.
In the Journal Conversion Rules region view the default settings:
17. Retain Journal Creator from Source Ledger: Yes.
18. Journal Source: Other.
19. Journal Category: Other.
20. Convert Journals to this Reporting Currency: Yes.
Data Conversion
21. First Future Period to Convert Journals: Select the first period in the list of values.
22. Historical Conversion: Retain Original Conversion Rate Type: Select Yes to use the rate type entered on the original transaction to convert the transaction to the reporting currency.
Sequencing
23. Sequencing By: No sequencing.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 28
24. Enforce Document Sequencing: None.
25. Click Save and Close twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 29
Practice 7-19: Completing the Ledger Configuration
Overview
In this practice, you will complete your ledger configuration by running the Review and Submit Accounting Configuration.
Submit the Review and Submit Accounting Configuration to complete your ledger configuration. A new standard balances cube is created when an accounting configuration is submitted for a primary or secondary ledger that uses to a new unique combination of chart of accounts and calendar.
Note: This process runs by primary ledger and processes related secondary ledgers, reporting currencies, and legal entities.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Review and Submit Accounting Configuration.
2. Select your ledger XXLedger US.
3. Click the Submit button.
4. Click OK to close the Confirmation window.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 30
Practice 7-20: Creating a Ledger Set
Overview
In this practice, you will create a ledger set using your XXPrimary Ledger and XXReporting Currencies.
Ledger Sets enable you to group multiple ledgers that share the same chart of accounts and calendar combination.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Ledger Sets.
2. Click the Create icon. Name and Description: XXSet.
3. Select your Chart of Accounts: XXLedger Instance.
4. Select your Accounting Calendar: XXLedger.
5. Default Ledger: XXLedger US.
6. Click the Add Row icon.
7. Select Ledger or Ledger Set: XXLedger US.
8. Click Save.
9. Click OK to accept the Confirmation window.
10. Click the Add Row icon.
11. Select Ledger or Ledger Set: XXReporting Currencies.
12. Click Save button.
13. Click OK to accept the Confirmation window.
14. Save and Close.
15. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 31
Practice 7-21: Reviewing Data Access Set Security
Overview
In this practice, you will review your Data Access Set created for your ledger set.
Data Access Sets are created to control access to specific ledgers, ledgers sets, or primary balancing segments.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Ledgers > Manage Data Access Sets.
2. Select the Name of your data access set XXSet.
3. Click the Edit icon.
4. Verify that your Privilege is set to Read and Write.
5. Click the Cancel button.
6. Click the Done button.
Note: The Access Set Type on your data access set is to Full Ledger which is the default created by the application when the spreadsheet upload is processed.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 32
Practice 7-22: Creating Data Access Set Security
Overview
In this practice, you will create and attach a Data Access Set for your ledger.
Data Access Sets are created to control access to specific ledgers, ledgers sets, or primary balancing segments.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Ledgers > Manage Data Access Sets.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter unique Name and Description: XXData Access Set.
4. Select the Access Set Type: Primary Balancing Segment Value.
5. Select your Chart of Accounts: XXLedger Instance.
6. Select the Accounting Calendar: XXLedger.
7. Select the Default Ledger: XXLedger US.
8. Click the Add Row icon in the Access Set Assignments.
9. Enter a Ledger or Ledger Set: XXSet.
10. Deselect All Values.
11. Select Specific Value: Single Value.
12. Enter Segment Value of 01.
13. Select Privilege: Read and Write.
14. Save and Close.
15. Click OK to accept Confirmation message.
16. Click the Done button.
Attach a Data Access Set to your role.
17. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Provision Roles to Implementation Users.
18. Click the Administration link located in the upper-right corner.
19. Enter your username: FASXX.Student in the Search box.
20. Click the Search Arrow icon.
21. Select the username.
22. Click the Roles tab.
23. Click the Assign Roles icon.
24. Search for the role by entering General%XX% in the Display Name field.
25. Select both the General Accountant and the General Accounting Manager, both with
XXData Access Set.
26. Click Add.
27. Exit Oracle Identify Manager.
28. Sign Out of the Oracle applications.
29. Sign In as your user: FASXX.student.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 33
30. Navigate to the General Accounting > Journals work area to verify your Data Access Set is available in the Change link.
Optional Troubleshooting if You Don't Find Your Data Role
31. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Type in the task field the following: Manage Role Templates.
32. Click the Search button.
33. Click the Manage Role Templates
34. Locate Search-Role Templates in the Search and Create panel (located on the right side, about 2/3 down the page).
35. Click Search to search for all roles.
36. Locate the General Ledger Template for Ledger (GL data access role) and highlight the name.
37. Click the Open icon.
38. Click the Summary tab.
39. Click the Generate Roles button.
40. Wait about 5 minutes.
41. Go back to step 17 and follow the steps again to assign the data access set to your role.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 34
Practice 7-23: Opening the First Accounting Period
Overview
In this practice you will open the first period in your general ledger.
Open the accounting period in both your ledger and reporting currencies before you create or import journals for the period. Converted journals are only generated in your reporting currency if the period is open or future enterable.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: General Accounting > Period Close.
2. Select your Change link for the Data Access Set at the top of the Tasks pane.
3. Select your Data Access Set: XXSet.
4. Click on the Manage Accounting Period link.
5. Select your Ledger Name link.
6. Answer Yes to the question: Open First Period?
7. Select your Reporting Ledger Name from the List of Values then click the OK button.
8. Answer Yes to the question: Open First Period?
9. Click the Done button.
For Subsequent Periods
10. Click on your ledger name.
11. Go to Actions > Open Target Period and select the current period.
12. Click OK to close the window.
13. Repeat for your reporting Ledger.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 35
Practice 7-24: Creating and Generating an Allocation Rule
-_-_-_-_-_- INSTRUCTOR NOTE -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-
To Participants:
You do not need to perform the steps in “Create an Allocation Rule Activity”. The allocation is already defined in the system. You only need to review this section to understand the allocation, and then perform the steps in the sections “Copy Allocations Activity” and “Generate Allocations Activity”.
-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_- _-_-_-_-_-_-
Create an Allocation Rule Activity
NOTE: In this section of the Activity Guide, you will use the demo data we have provided since subledger applications have already been defined for you.
You will be working in the Data Access Set: US Primary Ledger.
Background
In this activity you will create an allocation rule to perform allocations and redistribute amounts. Freight that was not originally posted to a product will be redistributed to products based on product revenue. Freight has been posted to account 62510, cost center 510, product 000. Revenue has been posted to account 41000, by product (all Cost Centers).
A run time prompt will be used to specify the accounting period when the allocation is run.
Activity Scope
Create, validate, and deploy an allocation rule in Allocation Manager.
Perform the following tasks:
1. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals
2. Change your Data Access Set to US Primary Ledger and click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 36
3. Select Create Allocation Rules from the Tasks menu. This opens the Enterprise Management System Workspace, Fusion Edition to access Calculation Manager. Here you can create, validate, deploy, and administer allocation Rules and RuleSets.
4. Click Navigate >Administer> Calculation Manager
Use the System View tab to view and edit existing rules and rule sets and to create new ones.
5. Click the Expand icon on Essbase > US Chart of Accounts > db.
6. Right-click on Rules > New.
Use the New Rule window to enter a Rule Name, Application Type, Application, and Database for the Allocation Rule.
7. Enter the following:
Name: XXAllocation of Freight based on Product Rev (replacing XX with your initials).
Leave the defaults for Application Type, Application, and Database, and then click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 37
Notice that a new tab has opened to define the Rule, XXAllocation of Freight based on Product Rev.
The Properties tab (lower pane) is used to define the properties of the current node in the Rule Designer.
8. Enter Description: Allocate Freight Expenses to Products based on Product Revenue.
9. In the Rule Palette pane (top left) select the Point of View object by pressing the left mouse button. Drag the Point of View object to the Rule Designer pane and drop it between the Begin and End nodes.
Enter Your Point of View to Specify Default Values for the Current Object
10. Click on the Properties tab, the first tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 38
11. For the Caption field, enter POV.
We will use a POV Variable that has already been defined.
12. Click on the Point of View tab, click the Variable Selector icon.
13. Change Category: to Database.
14. Select the Variable named POV and click OK.
The values you see entered for each Dimension were defined in the Variable. This is a time saving, efficient way to enter commonly used allocation Dimensions.
In this allocation, we will use the Product in the Allocation Range, so we don’t want the Product specified on the POV.
15. Highlight the Value for the Product Dimension and delete it so that it is blank.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 39
You will receive a message that says: Editing the grid will remove the dynamic variable linking. Are you sure you want to continue’ Click Yes before you delete the value.
Enter Your Allocation Object
16. Drag the Allocation object from the Rule Palette pane to the Rule Designer pane and drop between the POV start and end nodes.
Use the Allocate Wizard pop up to select the dimension variables and members to define the Allocation Rule. You will select a Variable for the Accounting Period. The Accounting Period will be specified by you when you execute the allocation.
17. For Accounting Period, click inside the Select Value field. Click the Actions icon to the far right in that field, and select Variable.
18. Change the Category: to Database using the drop down list.
19. Select the Accounting_Period Variable, then click OK.
20. The rest of the Dimensions will be specified in the next steps. Click the Next button.
Enter Source Information
21. For Account, click inside the Select Value field. Click Actions icon and select Member.
22. Expand Account and All Account Values.
23. Select 62510.
24. Click Right Arrow icon and click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 40
25. Repeat steps 25-29 for the Cost Center, Product, Intercompany, and Balance Amount dimensions. Choose the following for each:
Cost Center: 510
Product: 000
Intercompany: 000
Balance Amount: Ending Balance
26. Accept the other defaults.
27. Click Next.
Enter Allocation Range
The Allocation Range will be used to calculate the percentages of the basis.
28. For the Product, click inside the Select Value field.
29. Click the Actions icon > Member.
30. Expand Product and All Corporate Products-V1.
31. Select T.
32. Click the Right Arrow icon and click OK.
33. Click Next.
Enter Target
34. Click the Member Selector button (another way to enter member values)
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 41
35. In the Dimensions drop down, select Account.
36. Expand Account and All Account Values.
37. Select 62510.
38. Click the Right Arrow icon.
39. Repeat steps 40 – 43 for the Cost Center and Intercompany Dimensions specifying the following values for each simply by changing the drop downs for each:
o Cost Center: 510
o Intercompany: 000.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 42
40. Click OK
41. Click Next.
Enter Offset
42. Click the Member Selector button
43. In the Dimensions drop down, select Account.
44. Expand Account and All Account Values.
45. Select 62510.
46. Click the Right Arrow icon.
47. Repeat steps 47-51 for the Cost Center, Product, and Intercompany dimensions using the following values:
Cost Center: 510.
Product: 000
Intercompany: 000
48. Click OK.
49. Click Next.
Skip Exclude.
50. Click Next.
Enter Basis
51. Click the drop down arrow on Select an allocation method.
52. Select Allocate using a basis.
53. For AccountingPeriod, click inside the Select Value field.
54. Click the Actions icon.
55. Select Variable.
56. Change the Category to Database.
57. Select Variable of Accounting_Period.
58. Click OK.
You can define multiple Variables for each Dimension. You may want to use a different Accounting Period for the Basis than you use for the Source. In this example we will use the same Accounting Period for the Basis and Source, it will be specified as a Run Time Variable.
59. For Account, click inside the Select Value field.
60. Click the Actions icon.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 43
61. Select Member.
62. Expand Account and All Account Values.
63. Select 41000.
64. Click the Right Arrow icon and click OK.
65. Repeat steps 64-69 for the Cost Center, Intercompany, Scenario, Balance Amount, and Amount Type dimensions by specifying the following values:
Cost Center: Expand All Corporate Cost Center-V1, and select T.
Intercompany: 000
Scenario: Actual
Balance Amount: Ending Balance
Amount Type: PTD
66. Accept the other defaults.
67. Click Next.
Enter Basis - Options
68. Accept the defaults for the Basis-Options.
69. Click Next.
Enter Rounding
70. Accept the defaults for Rounding.
71. Click Save.
72. Click Finish.
73. Click File> Save to save the rule.
74. Click OK to the Information message.
Validate and Deploy
75. Click Actions > Validate > Essbase
76. Click Actions > Deploy.
Validate and Deploy can also be done using the last icon beneath the menus.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 44
77. Click OK on Information message The Deployment was successful.
Note: Successfully defining an allocation rule does not guarantee that allocation journals will be created when the rule is generated. The success depends on if there are balances in the accounts.
FYI
Viewing and Defining Variables
1. You can choose Tools> Variables.
2. In the Variable Navigator pane, expand Essbase.
3. Expand USChartofAccounts
4. Click on db, the Variables will appear in the right pane.
5. To View the Variable definition, select the Variable.
6. To add a new Variable, right click on db and select New.
Copy Allocations Activity
Background
We will make a copy of the “Allocation of Freight based on Product Rev” rule and rename with your initials for easier identification.
Activity Scope
Copy an allocation
Copy your allocations.
1. Find the “Allocation of Freight based on Product Rev” rule in the EPM Workspace.
2. Highlight the rule, right click, and select Copy To.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 45
3. In the window that opens, add your initials to the beginning of the name (i.e. XXAllocation of Freight based on Product Rev). Click OK.
4. Your allocation will appear in the list of allocation rules. Double-click on your allocation rule.
5. Click Actions > Validate.
6. Click Actions > Deploy.
Validate and Deploy can also be done using the last icon beneath the menus.
7. Click OK on Information message The Deployment was successful.
Note: Successfully defining an allocation rule does not guarantee that allocation journals will be created when the rule is generated. The success depends on if there are balances in the accounts.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 46
Generate Allocations Activity
Background
You have created an allocation rule and now you are ready to process it and create a General Ledger journal with the results.
Activity Scope
Generate an allocation
Verify Process completion
Review Journal
Generate your allocations.
1. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals
2. Click the Generate General Ledger Allocations link.
Use the Generate Allocations page to generate and post allocations.
3. Click the Rule or Rule Set list. Select the allocation rule you defined, XXAllocation of Freight based on Product Rev.
4. Click the Specify Accounting Period list. Select Period 01-14
Note: The Accounting Period is the Run Time Prompt you specified.
5. Clear the Post Allocations checkbox.
6. Click the Submit button.
7. Note the Request #.
8. Click the OK button.
Verify the Allocation Process completes
1. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals to check the status of the Processes.
The Journals work area has a Process Monitor region at the bottom.
2. In the Process Monitor widget, Select Status All and Time Range Last 1 hour.
3. You should see 3 sequential processes, beginning with the Request # you noted when submitting. Generate Allocations, Execute Allocations and Write Back Results, and Import Journals: Child. The status for each should be Succeeded. If the processes haven’t yet completed, use the refresh icon to refresh the search results.
Review Journal
1. Click the Manage Journals task.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 47
2. In the Search criteria, Journal Starts with XX (the initials you used to name your allocation). Source Equals Allocations. Click the Search button.
3. Your journal will appear in the search results. Click on the journal to open and review it.
You have successfully generated allocations.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 48
Practice 7-25: Creating a Revaluation
Overview
In this practice, you will define a revaluation.
Revalue your foreign currency balances that are still pending such as loan invoices from your third party systems that have not been paid but are entered in a foreign currency.
Tasks
1. Navigator > General Accounting > Period Close work area.
2. Click on Manage Currency Rates > Daily Rates.
3. Enter From Currency: USD and To Currency: XXULD.
4. Enter both Rate Dates of the last day of the current open accounting period.
5. Click Search.
6. Change the Rate to .75.
7. Save > Done.
8. Click the Revalue Balances link.
9. Use the Manage Revaluations page to generate reevaluations.
10. Click the Create icon.
11. Enter a Name and Description: XXRevaluation.
12. Select Chart of Accounts: US Chart of Accounts.
13. Select your Currency: XXULD.
14. Select your Conversion Rate Type: XXSPCORP.
15. Enter 10 Day to Roll Forward.
16. Enter 101.10.78630.000.000.000 in both the Unrealized Gain and Loss Accounts.
17. Leave PTD default on the Income Statement Accounts Basis.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 49
18. Check the Post Automatically.
19. In the Revaluation Accounts, click the Add Row icon.
20. Click on the filter Conditions Icon.
21. Click the Add Field button.
22. Add Account equals 22100 Accounts Payable.
23. Click the Save button.
24. Click the Generate button.
25. Enter your Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
26. Select Ledger or Ledger Set = US Primary Ledger.
27. Enter the latest Accounting Period (Same Period used in the Currency Conversion journal).
28. Enter the Rate Date: Last day of the current period.
29. Click Submit.
Verify the Journal Entry
30. Navigator > More… > Tools > Scheduled Processes.
31. Refresh until it finishes successfully.
32. Click on Revalue Balances process name.
33. Click on (1 more….) in Log and Output attachment.
34. Click on XXXXXX.txt and verify a journal was created.
35. Query the journal in the Manage Journal work area.
36. Open the journal and review the revaluation amounts.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 7: Configuring General Ledger Components
Chapter 7 - Page 50
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 8: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will perform the following activities:
Setting Up a new rule demonstration.
Viewing Intercompany Balancing Rules and Secondary and Clearing Company Balancing Options.
Creating an Intercompany batch.
Submitting and reviewing reconciliation reports.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 3
Practice 8-1: Setting Up a New Rule Demonstration
(This section has already been performed by the instructor in the training environment, so you only need to review.)
Overview
In this demonstration, the instructor will create a new intercompany balancing rule.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Implementation Projects > XXImplementation Project > Financials.
2. Expand Define and Maintain Intercompany Processing Rules.
3. Select Go to Task for Manage Intercompany Balancing Rules.
4. In the Search Results region, select the Primary Segment Rules tab.
5. Click the Create icon to create a new rule.
6. Complete the fields on the Create Primary Segment Balancing Rules page as shown in the following table:
Field Value
Source
Other
Category
Other
Transaction Type
None
From Ledger
US Primary Ledger
To Ledger
US Primary Ledger
From Legal Entity
US1 Legal Entity
To Legal Entity
Leave blank (All others are default later).
From Primary Segment Value
101
To Primary Segment Value
All Other
Receivables Account
101.10.12300.000.000.000
Payables Account
101.10.22270.000.000.000
Start Date
Date prior to today’s date, for ex. 1/1/2014
End Date
Null
7. Click Save and Close.
Turn off journal approval for the Manual source if it was not done earlier.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 4
8. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Search for Manage Journal Sources > Go to Task.
9. Search Name: Manual.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 5
10. Set Require Journal Approval unchecked for the journal source option Manual.
11. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 6
Practice 8-2: Viewing Intercompany Balancing Rules and Secondary and Clearing Company Balancing Options
Overview
In this practice, you will view intercompany balancing rules and secondary and clearing company balancing options and enter and post three journals showing different balancing scenarios.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to Setup and Maintenance > Implementation Projects > XXImplementation Project > Financials > Define and Maintain Intercompany Processing Rules > Manage Intercompany Balancing Rules > Go to Task.
2. Select From Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
3. Click Search.
4. In the Search Results region, click the Legal Entity Rules tab.
5. View the existing balancing rules.
6. Click the View icon in the Receivables Account column and the Payables Account
column to view the description of the segment values on one of the rules.
7. Click the Chart of Accounts Rules tab.
8. View the existing balancing rules.
9. Click Cancel.
10. Select Go to Task for Manage Secondary and Clearing Company Balancing Options.
11. Review the rules.
12. Click Cancel.
Enter and Post a GL Journal with Mixed Balancing Segment Value Assignments
13. Navigate to: General Accounting > Journals
14. Select Create Journal task.
15. Enter Journal Batch: XX1 Intercompany.
16. Select Accounting Period: Current period.
17. Enter Journal Name: XX1 Intercompany.
18. Enter Category: Adjustment.
19. Enter the following journal lines. 101 is assigned to a legal entity and 203 is assigned to the ledger.
Journal lines Debit Credit
203.10.59110.000.000.000
1,000.00
101.10.42000.000.000.000
1,000.00
20. Click Save. (Hint: tab out of the last line of the journal before clicking save.)
21. Click Post and note the request ID.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 7
22. Click Manage Journals in the Tasks pane. Search for your journal batch using your XX1%.
23. Click the Journal Name to drill down to view your posted journal.
24. View journal lines.
Notes
Intercompany balancing lines are generated to balance the journal between primary balancing segment values 101 and 203 and the appropriate trading partner value is populated into the intercompany segment of the balancing lines.
When balancing in this journal the Legal Entity Rule is used for both lines.
25. Click Cancel.
Perform the following tasks to enter and post a GL journal with balancing segment values assigned directly to a ledger:
26. Select the Create Journal task.
27. Enter Journal Batch and Journal Name: XX2 Intercompany with Category: Adjustment.
28. Select Accounting Period: Current period.
29. Enter the following journal lines. 204 and 251 are assigned to the ledger but not to any legal entities.
Journal lines Debit Credit
204.10.59210.000.000.000
1,000.00
251.90.42000.000.000.000
1,000.00
30. Click Save.
31. Click Post and note the request ID.
32. Click Manage Journals in the Tasks pane. Search for your journal batch using your XX2%.
33. Click the Journal Name to drill down to view your posted journal.
34. View journal lines.
Note:
The ledger balancing lines are generated using the Chart of Accounts Rule to balance the journal between primary balancing segment values 204 and 251.
Balancing segment 2 was also balanced between 10 and 90, while balancing the primary balancing segment values.
35. Click Cancel.
Perform the following tasks to enter and post a GL journal that balances by primary balancing segment but not by balancing segment 2:
36. Select Create Journal task.
37. Enter Journal Batch and Journal Name: XX3 Intercompany with Category: Adjustment.
38. Select Accounting Period: Current period.
39. Enter the following journal lines.
Journal lines Debit Credit
101.30.59110.000.000.000
1,000.00
101.10.42000.000.000.000
1,000.00
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 8
40. Click Save.
41. Click Post and note the request ID.
42. Click Manage Journals in the Tasks pane. Search for your journal batch using your XX3%.
43. Click the Journal Name to drill down to view your posted journal.
44. View journal lines.
As the journal balances by primary balancing segment balancing lines are generated to balance the journal between balancing segment 2 values 30 and 10. Secondary and Clearing Company Balancing Options for US Primary Ledger are used to build the accounts.
The intercompany segment for the balancing lines is not populated with the trading partner for balancing segment 2.
45. Click Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 9
Practice 8-3: Creating an Intercompany Batch
Overview
In this practice, you will:
Create an Intercompany Batch.
Review the Intercompany Balancing Rules.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Each student should only use the batch date assigned to them by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Intercompany Accounting > Transactions > Tasks Panel Tab > Create Transactions.
2. Select Provider: US1 I/C Org.
3. Enter Transaction Type Name: I/C Adjustment.
4. Accept the Batch Date and Accounting Date as today’s date.
5. From the Transactions section, click the Add Row icon.
6. Enter the following details:
Field Value
Receiver
US2 I/C Org
Debit (USD)
100
7. From the Transactions: Distributions section, click the Provider tab.
8. Click the Add Row icon and enter the following details:
Field Value
Account
101.10.41000.000.000.000
Credit (USD)
100
9. Click the Receiver tab.
10. Click the Add Row icon and enter the following details:
Field Value
Account
102.10.60110.000.000.000
Debit (USD)
100
11. Click Submit.
12. Click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 10
Review the transaction
13. Navigate to: Tasks Panel Tab > Manage Intercompany Inbound Transactions.
14. Enter your batch number and click Search.
15. Click the resultant row to display the View Inbound Transaction page.
Note: The transaction status is approved because the transaction type, I/C Adjustment,
does not require a manual approval.
16. Click the Receiver tab and review the details.
Note: An additional row is automatically added to the receiver distributions. This is the intercompany payables account that was generated based on the intercompany balancing rules.
17. Click the Provider tab and review the details.
Note: An additional row is automatically added to the Provider distributions. This is the intercompany receivables account that was generated based on the intercompany balancing rules.
18. Click Cancel.
Review the Intercompany Balancing Rules
19. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define and Maintain Intercompany Processing Rules > Manage Intercompany Balancing Rules
20. Select the following fields:
Field Value
From Ledger
US Primary Ledger
From Legal Entity
US1 Legal Entity
21. Click Search.
22. Click the Legal Entity Rules tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 10
23. Click the row with the following details:
Field Value
From Ledger
US Primary Ledger
From Legal Entity
US1 Legal Entity
To Legal Entity
US2 Legal Entity
Transaction Type
I/C Adjustment
24. Review the balancing rule and note the receivables account. This is used to generate the provider intercompany receivables line.
25. Click Cancel.
26. Select the following fields:
Field Value
From Ledger
US Primary Ledger
From Legal Entity
US2 Legal Entity
27. Click Search.
28. Click the Legal Entity Rules tab.
29. Click the row with the following details:
Field Value
From Ledger
US Primary Ledger
From Legal Entity
US2 Legal Entity
To Legal Entity
US1 Legal Entity
Transaction Type
All Other
30. Review the balancing rule and note the payables account. This is used to generate the receiver intercompany payables line.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 11
Transfer the Intercompany Transaction to General Ledger
31. Navigate to: Intercompany Accounting > Transactions >Transfer to General Ledger.
32. Enter the following details:
Field Value
From Accounting Date
Your assigned batch date
To Accounting Date
Your assigned batch date
From Intercompany Organization
US1 I/C Org
To Intercompany Organization
US1 I/C Org
33. Click Submit.
34. Note the Request ID.
35. Click OK.
Review and Post the Journal to the General Ledger
36. Navigate to: General Accounting > Journal > Journals > Manage Journals.
37. Enter your journal batch number and click Search.
38. Select the row and click the journal batch number.
Note: The journal only contains the accounting for the provider as the transfer was executed for just that intercompany organization.
39. Click Post to post the journal and note the request ID.
40. Click Cancel.
41. Click Search and verify that your batch status is posted.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 12
Practice 8-4: Submitting and Reviewing Reconciliation Reports
Overview
In this practice, you will:
Submit the Prepare Intercompany Reconciliation Reporting Information process.
Review the Intercompany Reconciliation report.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Submit the Prepare Intercompany Reconciliation Reporting Information Process Note: If another class participant already submitted the report, you can skip to the next section, Review the Intercompany Reconciliation Reports.
1. Navigate to: Intercompany Accounting > Reconciliation.
2. Click Actions > Run.
3. Enter Provider Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
4. Enter Provider Accounting Period: Current period. Leave all other fields blank.
5. Click Submit.
6. Note the Process ID.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Refresh.
Review the Intercompany Reconciliation Reports
9. Navigate to: Intercompany Accounting > Reconciliation.
10. If required, navigate to Actions > History and select the Instructor Request ID to view the report.
11. The Period Summary Report displays summary reconciliation data.
Note: The Receiver LE is displayed as UNASSIGNED if the primary balancing segment value on the balancing line is not assigned to a legal entity.
12. Click the Entered Amount Difference in Transaction Currency amount for the row where the Provider LE is US1 Legal Entity and the Receiver LE is US2 Legal Entity.
13. Review the Source by Summary Report.
14. Click the Amount in the Intercompany Receivables GL Balance.
15. Review the Journal Lines Report.
16. Click the Journal Name.
17. Review the journal lines and note that the provider side was posted. The difference is because the receiver side is not posted.
18. Click Done to return to the Journal Lines Report.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 08: Configuring Oracle Fusion Intercompany
Chapter 8 - Page 13
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 9: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Viewing a Financial Report from the Financial Reporting Center.
Creating a report with the Financial Reporting Studio:
Defining a grid.
Adding a formula for total expenses.
Defining a rolling 12-period column.
Defining the grid point of views for the dimensions.
Setting properties.
Adding a logo, title and chart.
Reviewing a report.
Using Infolets Demonstration.
Setting up the General Accounting Expense Infolet for All Users Demonstration.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 3
Practice 9-1: Viewing a Financial Report from the Financial Reporting Center
Overview
In this practice, you will be reviewing the Balance Sheet report in HTML and Excel formats from the Financial Reporting Center.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to Financial Reporting Center.
2. Click on the Search icon.
3. Enter Balance Sheet and click on the Search icon.
4. Select the Balance Sheet that is a Financial Report not a Dashboard.
5. Click the Go to Member Selection icon.
6. Expand Company > All Company Values.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 4
7. Select [All Company Values].[102] and move it to the Selected area by using the Arrow
icon.
8. Click OK twice.
Note: By default the report opens in HTML Preview.
9. Next to Page: 101-US 1 LE 1 BU 1, click on the dropdown to choose either Company or
102-LE US 1 LE 2.
Note: the data refreshes automatically.
10. Click on the List of Values next to HTML Preview and select Export to Excel.
11. Select Open with and then click OK.
Note: Each Company opens is a separate sheet.
12. Close Excel once you have viewed the report.
13. Back in Fusion click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 5
Practice 9-2: Creating a Financial Report: Defining a Grid
Overview
In this practice, you will be performing the basic tasks to begin creating your report grid in
Oracle Financial Reporting Studio.
Your company, Vision America Inc., requires a rolling twelve-month income statement report to show revenue and expenses for both of its companies.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks.
1. Navigate to: Financial Reporting Center.
2. Click on the Tasks panel tab icon at the far right of the page and then click the Open Workspace for Financial Reporting link.
3. In the Workspace URL, remove /workspace/index.jsp.
4. Copy the URL that remains, for instance: https://adc-fapXXXX-bi.oracledemos.com.
Where XXXX is the Instance unique for your class.
Note: You will use this in the Server URL when you login to the Financials Reporting Studio in step 7 below.
Tasks
Accessing the Financial Reporting Studio on your desktop.
5. Navigate to Start menu > Programs > Oracle > Financial Reporting Studio > Financial Reporting Studio.
6. Enter your FASXX.Student name and password.
7. Paste the copied URL into the Server URL, https://adc-fap
https://adc-fapXXXX-bi.oracledemos.com.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 6
8. Click OK.
Defining a new report and grid.
9. Click the New Report button (first icon on the tool bar) or File menu > New > Report.
10. From the top menu click on View > deselect Guidelines.
11. Click the New Grid button (first icon in the second set on the tool bar).
12. Draw a box on the pallet to create the grid for your report.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 7
13. Click the Database Connection list. Select USChartofAccounts.
14. Click OK.
Note: the Dimension Layout window that opens to arrange your dimensions in one of the three report levels: pages, columns, and rows.
Selecting the Point of View Dimensions for the Grid.
15. Drag and drop the following dimensions to the following grid sections:
Tip: Click the icon in front of the name to select for dragging.
Accounting Period > Columns
Account > Rows
Company > Pages
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 8
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 9
16. Click OK.
Selecting the Account Dimension Members.
17. Double-click Account.
Note: This opens the Select Members window. You will be selecting revenue accounts and expense accounts.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 10
18. In the Selected box on the right, click on Account and then click the Remove icon.
19. In the Available box, expand Account > All Corporate Accounts - V1 > [Account]@[T] > 95001.
20. Select 95011-Revenue.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 11
21. Click the Add icon.
22. Click OK.
Saving your report.
23. Click File > Save As.
24. Double click on My Folders.
25. Enter the name for the report: XXVision Income Statement.
26. Click Save.
Warning: Save often.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 12
Inserting a blank row and a data row for expenses.
27. Select the last row in the grid by clicking on the row header.
28. From the menu bar select Insert > Row > Text.
29. Right-click the row header on the row below row 2.
30. Select Insert > Row > Data.
31. Double-click account 95011 in line 3.
32. Remove the selected account 95011.
33. Expand Account > All Corporate Accounts - V1 > [Account]@[T] > 95001 > 95021 - Expenses.
34. Select all three accounts: 50000, 60000, and 70000.
35. Click the Add icon.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 13
36. Select the Place selections into separate rows check box at the bottom of the Selected
window.
37. Click OK.
38. Save. Leave the report open for the next practice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 14
Practice 9-3: Creating a Financial Report: Adding a Formula for Total Expenses
Overview
In this practice, you be adding a formula for total expenses.
Prerequisite:
Complete the following practice before beginning this one:
12-2: Creating a Report with the Financial Reporting Studio: Defining a Grid.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Right-click the row header of the last row.
2. Select Insert > Row > Formula.
3. Click in the blank cell on row 6.
4. In the Row 6 Properties sheet, select the Custom Heading radio button.
5. In the white box type Total Expenses.
6. Click in the formula cell at row 6 and column A.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 15
7. Click the Sum() button. The formula Sum() is entered into the Edit box.
8. Click between the brackets () and enter [3:5].
Note: If the rows are not contiguous (2 subtotal rows) then you can enter a formula like this:
Sum([1],[6])
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 16
9. Click the Accept button (green check mark in front of the Edit box).
Note: This action validates the syntax of the formula. The Reporting Studio does not give you a confirmation. You will only get an error window when the syntax does not validate.
10. Save. Leave the report open for the next practice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 17
Practice 9-4: Creating a Financial Report Defining a Rolling 12-Period Column
Overview
In this practice, you be creating a rolling 12-period column using the range function.
Prerequisite:
Complete the following practice before beginning this one:
12-3: Creating a Report with the Financial Reporting Studio: Adding a Formula for Total Expenses.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Double-click the AccountingPeriod cell (below Column A).
2. In the Selected box on the right, click on AccountingPeriod and then click the Remove
icon.
3. Click the Functions tab.
4. Select Range.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 18
5. Click the Add icon.
Note: The Edit Range Function window opens to add the range function start and end members.
6. If not selected, select the StartMember row.
7. Click in the Value field.
8. Click the Lookup button.
9. Select the Functions tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 19
10. Select RelativeMember.
11. Click the Add icon.
12. If not selected, select the Member row.
13. Click in the Value field.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 20
14. Click the Lookup button.
15. Select Current Point of View.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 21
16. Click the Add icon.
17. Click OK.
18. Select the Offset row.
Note: The Offset value determines how many periods to include from the current point of view. This will be a rolling 12-period report going 12 periods back from the last column.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 22
19. Enter -11 in the Value field.
20. Click OK twice.
21. In the Edit Range Function window, select the EndMember row.
22. Click in the Value field.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 23
23. Click the Lookup icon.
24. Select Current Point of View.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 24
25. Click the Add icon.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 25
26. Click OK three times until you return to your report grid.
Note: Column A should now be replaced by Range from Relative to Current Point of View offset by -11 to Current Point of View for AccountingPeriod.
27. Save. Leave the report open for the next practice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 26
Practice 9-5: Creating a Financial Report: Defining the Grid and User Point of View Dimensions
Overview
In this practice, you be defining the points of view for the report dimensions.
Prerequisite:
Complete the following practice before beginning this one:
12-4: Creating a Report with the Financial Reporting Studio: Defining a Rolling 12- Period Column.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Defining the Grid Point of View Dimension Values.
1. Click the Grid object (the intersection of rows and columns on the left margin).
Note: This activates the grid and opens the Grid Properties sheet.
2. Right-click the Grid object.
3. Select Grid Point of View.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 27
4. Click the Ledger: User Point of View for Ledger button.
5. Expand Ledger > All Ledgers > select US Primary Ledger.
6. Select the Scenario tab.
7. Expand Scenario > select Actual.
8. Select the Balance Amount tab.
9. Expand Balance Amount > select Period Activity.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 28
10. Select the Currency tab.
11. Expand Currency > select USD.
12. Click OK.
Setting up the Grid Point of View.
13. Right-click the Grid object.
14. Select Grid Point of View Setup.
15. Scroll down to find the Balance Amount dimension.
16. In the Report Viewers May Select column, select Nothing, Lock Member Selection.
17. Click OK.
Setting up a Prompt for a Point of View Dimension.
18. In the grid double-click on the word Pages.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 29
19. Remove Company from the Selected box.
20. In the Available box select Prompt for Company.
21. Click the Add icon.
22. Click OK.
23. In the Define Prompts window, replace the Enter Company title with Please select a Company.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 30
24. Click on the Default Member field, click the Lookup button.
25. Remove Company from the Selected box.
26. In the Available box expand Company > All Company Values.
27. Select 101 -US 1 LE 1 BU 1 and 102-US 1 LE 2.
28. Click the Add icon.
29. Click OK.
30. Click the Member Labels in Prompt Selection Dialog list button.
31. Select Alias.
32. Click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 31
Practice 9-6: Creating a Financial Report: Setting Properties
Overview
In this practice, you will be setting the grid, page and heading row properties.
Prerequisite:
Complete the following practice before beginning this one:
12-5: Creating a Report with the Financial Reporting Studio: Defining the Grid and User Point of View Dimensions.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Setting the Grid Properties.
1. Click the Grid object (the intersection of rows and columns on the left margin).
Note: This activates the grid and opens the Grid Properties sheet.
2. On the Grid Properties sheet select Suppression.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 32
3. In the Zero Values field enter 0.
4. On the Grid Properties sheet, select General.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 33
5. Select the Drill Through option. (Drag out the window to see the drill-through box on the very bottom of the window.)
Setting the Page Properties.
6. Click on the word Pages on the Grid.
Note: This opens the Page Properties sheet on the right side of the window. If it does not open, click View > Property Sheet.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 34
7. Select the Alias: Default radio button.
Setting the Heading Row Properties.
8. Click on the first cell on Row 1 on the Grid.
Note: This opens the Heading Row Properties sheet on the right side of the window.
9. Select the Alias: Default radio button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 35
10. Select the Allow Expansion radio button.
11. Repeat the Alias: Default and Allow Expansion settings for rows 3,4 and 5.
12. Save. Leave the report open for the next activity.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 36
Practice 9-7: Creating a Financial Report: Adding a Logo and Title
Overview
In this practice, you will perform the tasks to add your company logo and a title to your report in the Oracle Financial Reporting Studio.
Prerequisite:
Complete the following practice before beginning this one:
12-6: Creating a Report with the Financial Reporting Studio: Setting Properties.
Assumptions
Sign in as the FASXX.Student user assigned to you by the instructor.
Tasks
Inserting a logo into the report header:
1. Download a sample logo from here and save to your machine.
2. Click the Image button (third icon in the second set of icons on the tool bar).
3. Using your cursor, draw a box in the report pallet’s Header region to determine the length and width of the image.
4. Search for the logo you had downloaded in step 1.
5. Click the Open button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 37
6. Use your curser to size the image above the grid.
7. Save.
Using the Text button to insert text in the report.
8. Click the Text button (second icon in the second set of icons on the tool bar).
9. Using your cursor draw a box in the report pallet’s Header region to determine the length and width of the text box.
10. Enter Rolling 12 Month Income Statement.
11. Use the Format menu > Font to apply formatting options to the text. Select Bold as the Font Style and 14 as the Font Size.
12. Center the text with the Center Text icon on the tool bar.
13. Use the File menu > Page Setup option to set page setup options.
14. Select the Landscape option.
15. Click the OK button.
16. Save.
17. Save. Leave the report open for the next activity.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 38
Practice 9-8: Reviewing a Report
Overview
In this practice, you will be previewing the report in the Oracle Financial Reporting Studio and make edits that are necessary. Then, you will open the report in Workspace and drill down to detail balances.
You need to review your company Vision America Inc.'s rolling twelve-month income statement report to verify that it was created correctly.
Prerequisite:
Complete the following practice before beginning this one:
12-7: Creating a Report with the Financial Reporting Studio: Adding a Logo, Table and Chart.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Previewing the report in Financial Reporting Studio.
1. Ensure that the AccountingPeriod POV is set to 12-14. If not, click the
AccountingPeriod POV.
2. Expand AccountingPeriod > 12-14 > Qtr4-14 select 12-14 (or the period assigned by your instructor.)
3. Click OK.
4. Click File > PDF Preview.
5. Accept the default Companies in the prompt window.
6. Click OK.
7. Use the Next Page button to see all the columns.
8. Go back to your definition and adjust anything that does not look correct.
Note: Some of the values may show “Missing,” which is not an error but rather a lack of data due to the limited data in our database.
Opening the report from Workspace.
9. Sign in to the application.
10. Navigate to: Financial Reporting Center.
11. Click on the Tasks panel tab icon at the far right of the Overview page and then click Open Workspace for Financial Reports.
Note: This opens a new web page entitled Enterprise Performance Management System Workspace, Fusion Edition.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 39
12. Click on Navigate > Applications > BI Catalog.
13. Click on My Folders. Your XXVision Income Statement should be visible.
14. Click Open.
15. Accept the default Companies in the prompt window.
16. Click OK.
17. Click on the Revenue amount in column 2-14.
Note: the amounts on the screenshot may be different than yours due to changing data.
18. Select Drill to Detail Balances.
Note: You can drill down further by clicking on any amount in the Period Activity (USD)
Column.
19. Close the webpage tab that the drill down opened.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 40
20. Close the XXVision Income Statement tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 41
Practice 9-10: Setting up and Viewing the General Accounting Expense Infolet Demonstration
Overview
In this practice, you will set up an account group with 2 accounts that you will view on the General Accounting Expenses infolet.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: General Accounting > General Accounting Dashboard.
2. Ensure that the Data Access Set is US Primary Ledger.
3. In the Account Monitor area, click the View menu.
4. Select Account Group.
5. Select Create.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 42
6. Enter:
Field Value
Name
XXTravel Expenses
Description
For tracking airfare and meals
Display In
Expenses
Set as Default
Select
Time Option
Accounting Period
Comparison Option
Prior Year PTD
Access
Private
7. In the Accounts area, click the Add Row button.
8. Enter:
Field Value
Name
XXAirfare
Ledger
US Primary Ledger
Co
101
LoB
10
Acc
60512
CC
400
Prod
000
IC
000
Change
Always Display
9. In the Accounts area, click the Add Row button.
10. Enter:
Field Value
Name
XXMeals
Ledger
US Primary Ledger
Co
101
LoB
10
Acc
60521
CC
400
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 43
Field Value
Prod
000
IC
000
Change
Always Display
11. Select the Save drop-down list.
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click OK.
Viewing the Expense Infolet
Note: The account group may not show on the infolet immediately. Wait a few minutes before moving on. If the infolet does not work after 5 minutes, log out and then log back in.
1. Navigate to: Home icon > Page Control dot for General Accounting Infolets. .
2. Find the Expenses infolet.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 44
3. Click on the Expanded View icon.
4. Hover over the status bar graph to see the details.
Note: Infolets use the current open period as the basis for the comparison option so there may not be any values to hover over.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 45
Practice 9-11: Viewing an Account Group and Sunburst from the Financial Reporting Center Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, you will be:
Viewing your account group from the Financial Reporting Center
Viewing your account group as a Sunburst
Assumptions
Sign in as the FASXX.Student user assigned to you by the instructor.
Tasks
.
1. Navigate to: Financial Reporting Center.
2. Click the Search icon and enter XXT.
3. Click the Search icon.
4. Select your XXTravel Expense Sunburst.
5. From the Account Group drop down, select XXTravel Expenses.
Editing Account Group Segments.
6. Change the period to 11-15. The balances will be automatically updated.
7. Click the Show/Hide Segments button.
8. On the Account segment select Value and Description.
9. For the Product and Intercompany segments Unselect Value.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 46
10. Click Done.
Reviewing an Account Group as a Sunburst
11. Select View as Sunburst.
12. Click Show Description.
13. Hover over each ring to see the details of the changes.
14. Select any segment in the outer ring (cost center) and press the Zoom In button. This drills down from Total Sales parent cost center to child cost centers.
15. Select any segment in the middle ring (account) and press the Move Ring Away From Center arrow button to view expenses distributed first by cost center and then by account (expense type).
Note: You can also use the Segments section to the right of the sunburst to move the rings
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 47
away or towards the center.
16. Select another color for the rings.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 09: Configuring Financial Reporting
Chapter 9 - Page 48
17. Select Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 10: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Viewing Your Business Unit.
Viewing the Assigned Business Unit Functions.
Creating a Reference Data Set.
Managing Your Business Unit Set Assignment.
Provisioning Data Roles.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 3
Practice 10-1: Viewing Your Business Unit
Overview
In this practice, you be reviewing your assigned business unit functions that were created when you uploaded your spreadsheet.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Organization Structures > Manage Business Unit.
4. Select your XXBusiness Unit hyperlink.
5. View the details, including the Default Set.
6. Click the Cancel button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 4
Practice 10-2: Viewing the Assigned Business Unit Functions
Overview
In this practice, you will view the assigned business unit functions..
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Organization Structures.
4. Next to the Assign Business Unit Business Function task, click the Select…link under the Scope column.
5. The Select Scope window appears. With the Assign Business Unit Business Function
option selected, select Select and Add from the Business Unit drop-down list.
6. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
7. Search and select the row header for your XXBusiness Unit.
8. Click Save and Close.
9. View the Business Unit Functions and Financial Reporting.
10. Click the Cancel button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 5
Practice 10-3: Creating a Reference Data Set
Overview
In this practice, you be creating a reference data set to use with Payables Payment Terms.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Application Extensions > Show: All Tasks > Manage Reference Data Sets.
4. Click New and enter the following
Field Choices or Values
Set Code
XXREFDATA
Set Name
XXReference Data
Description
XXReference Data Set
5. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 6
Practice 10-4: Managing Your Business Unit Set Assignment
Overview
In this practice, you will be putting your reference data set on the Payables Payment Terms for your Business Unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Organization Structures > Manage Business Unit Set Assignment.
Note: If this task is not currently scoped to your XXBusiness Unit, you will need to scope it.
4. Scroll down to Payables Payment Terms and change the Reference Data Set Code to
XXREFDATA.
6. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 7
Practice 10-5: Provisioning Data Roles
Overview
In this practice your instructor will be generating data roles for all the Business Units and SetID’s.
In this practice, you will be:
Searching for your user in Oracle Identity Manager.
Assigning the data role for your business unit and SetID to your user.
Note: When a business unit is created, the data role for that business unit is automatically generated and assigned to the Application Implementation Consultant job role. Since your FASXX.Student user has this job role, you already have access to the business unit that you created earlier. The purpose of this practice is to show you how to assign a business unit data role if you want to restrict access to one business unit.
Prerequisites
You successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Your Instructor will generate the roles.
Note to the Instructor: You may not need to generate the roles. Before generating them, check the Summary > Valid Roles for each student’s XXBusiness Unit and XXREFDATA.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance.
2. In the Search field type Define Data Security for Financials and click Search
3. Click Manage Data Security for Financials > Manage Role Templates.
4. Locate and click the Search - Role Templates link in the Search and Create panel (located on the bottom right).
5. Click Search to search for all role templates.
6. Find the Financials Common Module Template for Business Unit Security template and click the template name.
7. Click Open.
8. Click the Summary tab.
9. Click Generate Roles.
10. Click OK.
11. Close the tab and click on the Search Role Templates tab.
12. Do the same for the Payables Template for Business Function Payables Invoicing and the Financials Common Module Template for SetID template.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson10: Configuring Business Units and Reference Data Sets
Chapter 10 - Page 8
Students begin here.
13. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
14. Click Setup.
15. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Enterprise Profile > Provision Roles to Implementation Users.
16. From Oracle Identity Manager, click the Administration link in the upper right-hand corner of the page.
17. Enter your FASXX.Student user in the User field.
18. Click Search.
19. Click the FASXX.Student link.
20. Click the Roles tab.
21. Click Assign.
22. Enter %XX in the Display Name field.
23. Select Search.
24. Highlight all the roles with your business unit and setID and click Add.
25. Close the Oracle Identity Manager tab on your browser.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 11: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will create two different tax configurations and test one of them. The practices are:
Viewing a Calculated Tax on a Payables Transaction Demonstration.
Creating a US Sales Tax Using the Tax Configuration Workbook.
Creating VAT Sales Tax Using the Tax Configuration Workbook (Optional).
Using the Tax Simulator to Test a Payables Transaction.
Enabling Your Tax for Transactions.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 3
Practice 11-1: Viewing a Calculated Tax on a Payables Transaction Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, you will view the calculated US sales tax on a Payables sales invoice.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
After setting up your tax configuration and verifying the transaction results through testing, you can enable the applicable tax or taxes for transactions. The tax determination process uses your tax configuration and the details on the transaction to determine which taxes apply to the transaction and how to calculate the tax amount for each tax that applies to the transaction.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Oracle Fusion Payables > Invoices work area.
2. Click on the Tasks panel > Invoices > Create Invoice.
3. Enter:
Field Value
Business Unit
US1 Business Unit
Supplier
Advanced Corp
Supplier Site
AC US1
Legal Entity
US1 Legal Entity
Number
APTest
Amount
1095.00
4. Accept all other defaults.
5. In the Lines section, enter:
Field Value
Amount
1000.00
Distribution Combination
101.10.60520.000.000.000
6. Click the Save button.
7. Click Invoice Actions > Calculate Tax.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 4
8. Expand the Taxes Section.
9. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 5
Practice 11-2: Creating a US Sales Tax Using the Tax Configuration Workbook
Overview
In this practice, you will create a US sales tax using the tax configuration workbook and subscribe you business unit to your tax regime.
The Tax Configuration Workbook is a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet template with five common tax setup worksheets:
Manage Tax Regimes
Manage Taxes
Manage Rates
Manage Tax Recovery Rates
Manage Tax Rules
Oracle Fusion Tax provides predefined tax regimes and taxes in the Tax Configuration Workbook to enable quick and easy setup.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > In the Search field, enter Rapid and click the
Search magnifying glass icon.
2. Click on the Define Common Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation task list and then select Manage Tax Regimes.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 6
3. In the Search Results region click the Rapid Setup Spreadsheets button. Select
Download Tax Configuration Workbook.
4. Click OK to open the spreadsheet using Microsoft Office Excel. If you get a message to accept the Spreadsheet, click Yes.
5. Right-click on the Tax Conf Workbook Instructions tab.
6. Click Unhide.
7. Select Manage Tax Regimes and click OK. Repeat for Manage Taxes.
8. Click the Manage Tax Regimes tab in the spreadsheet.
9. Delete all the existing Regimes.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 7
10. Enter the following:
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXUS Regime
Country
United States
Start Date
2001/01/01
11. Click on the Manage Taxes tab.
12. Delete all the existing Taxes.
13. Complete the fields, as shown in the following table:
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXUS Regime
Tax
COUNTRY
Tax Name
XXUS Sales Tax
Tax Geography Type
Country
Tax Currency
USD
Rounding Rule
Nearest
Recoverable
No
Default Place of Supply
Ship to use bill to if ship to is not found
Default Tax Registration
Bill-from party
Start Date
2001/01/01
14. Click on the Manage Rates tab.
15. Enter the following:
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXUS Regime
Tax
COUNTRY
Tax Status Code
STANDARD
Tax Jurisdiction Code
XXUS
Tax Jurisdiction Name
XXUnited States
Parent Geography Type
COUNTRY
Parent Geography Name
UNITED STATES
Geography Name
United States
Tax Rate Code
XXTAXRATE
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 8
Field Value
Tax Rate Name
XXTax Rate
Tax Rate
7
Set As Default Rate
Yes
Effective Start Date
2001/01/01
16. Click on the Instructions tab.
17. Click the Generate CSV File button. Save it to your Desktop.
Note: You may need to enable macros to use the Generate CSV File button.
18. Click OK.
19. Close Excel.
20. In the Search Results region click the Rapid Setup Spreadsheets button click Upload Tax Configuration Workbook.
21. Click Browse… and select your TaxConfigurationWorkbook.zip file.
22. Click Open.
23. Click Upload.
24. Click OK.
25. In the Manage Tax Regimes page for Transaction Tax, select the Monitor Upload and Download Processes tab. Click the Refresh icon until the Status is Succeeded.
Subscribing your Business Unit and the US1 Business Unit to your Tax Regime.
26. Search for your XXUS Regime.
27. Click on the XXUS Regime link.
28. Click Edit.
29. Scroll down to the Configuration Options tab.
30. Click Add Row.
31. Enter the following:
Field Value
Party Name
XXBusiness Unit
Party Type
Business unit owning tax content
Configuration for Taxes and Rules
Common Configuration
Effective Start Date
1/1/01
32. Repeat steps 30 and 31 for the US1 Business Unit.
33. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 9
34. Click Done.
Enabling a Tax for Simulation
Note: Tax is not enabled for simulation or transactions when it is created from a spreadsheet upload. You can enable a tax for simulation from the:
Create Tax page
Edit Tax page
Enable Taxes option in the Rapid Setup Spreadsheet list of values on the Manage Taxes page
Once you enable a tax for both simulation and transactions processing, you can’t modify the tax setup.
35. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > In the Search field, enter Rapid and click the
Search magnifying glass icon.
36. Click on the Define Common Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation task list and then select Manage Taxes.
37. Enter XXUS in the Tax Regime Code field and click Search.
38. Select the row with your tax and click the Edit icon.
39. Click the Tax Rule Defaults tab.
40. Scroll down to the bottom of the page. If the Tax Rate does not have a Default Value then click Create Default.
41. Accept all the defaults and enter:
Field Value
Tax Status Code
Standard
Tax Rate Code
XXTAXRATE1
Rate Percentage
7
42. Click Save and Close.
43. Select Enable tax for simulation.
Note: It is a best practice to use the Tax Simulator to test your configuration before you enable your tax for transactions.
44. Click the Save and Close button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 10
Practice 11-3: Creating a VAT Tax Using the Tax Configuration Workbook (Optional)
Overview
In this practice, you create a tax configuration for value-added tax (VAT) in the United Kingdom using the Tax Configuration Workbook.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Creating Tax Setup Data
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > In the Search field, enter Rapid and click the
Search magnifying glass icon.
2. Click on the Define Common Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation task list and then select Manage Tax Regimes.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 11
3. In the Search Results region click the Rapid Setup Spreadsheets button. Select
Download Tax Configuration Workbook.
4. Click OK to open the spreadsheet using Microsoft Office Excel. If you get a message to accept the Spreadsheet, click Yes.
5. Right-click on the Tax Conf Workbook Instructions tab.
6. Click Unhide.
7. Select Manage Tax Regimes and click OK. Repeat for Manage Taxes.
8. Click the Manage Tax Regimes tab in the spreadsheet.
9. Delete all the existing Regimes.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 12
10. Enter the following:
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXGB VAT
Country
United Kingdom
Start Date
2001/01/01
11. Click on the Manage Taxes tab.
12. Delete all the existing Taxes.
13. Complete the fields, as shown in the following table:
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXGB VAT
Tax
COUNTRY
Tax Name
XXGB VAT
Tax Geography Type
Country
Tax Currency
GBP
Rounding Rule
Nearest
Recoverable
No
Default Place of Supply
Ship to use bill to if ship to is not found
Default Tax Registration
Bill-from party
Start Date
2001/01/01
14. Click the Manage Rates tab in the spreadsheet.
Note: You need to create both a default nonjurisdiction-based tax rate and a default jurisdiction-based tax rate or rates for each type of transaction tax in a given country. The number of specific default jurisdiction-based tax rates you set up depends on the transaction tax regulations for that country. The default nonjurisdiction-based tax rate created for each tax is required to enable the tax for either simulation or simulation and transaction processing.
15. Complete the fields, as shown in this table, to set up a default nonjurisdiction-based tax rate for your XX GB VAT tax. For the tax regime and tax, you may have to scroll up in the window to select the value.
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXGB VAT
Tax
XX GB VAT
Tax Status Code
STANDARD
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 13
Field Value
Tax Jurisdiction Code
Blank
Tax Jurisdiction Name
Blank
Geography Name
Blank
Tax Rate Code
XX GB VAT DEFAULT
Tax Rate Name
XX GB VAT Default
Tax Rate
0
Set As Default Rate
Yes
Effective Start Date
2011/01/01
Note: The default nonjurisdiction-based tax rate is applied only in the absence of a valid tax rate rule or a default jurisdiction-based tax rate. It is a common tax rate that is applied when there is no specific tax rate defined for the jurisdiction associated with the transaction. The default nonjurisdiction-based tax rate can prevent potential transaction errors when a tax place of supply location on a transaction legally stops imposing a tax rate in accordance with newly enacted laws.
16. Complete the fields, as shown in this table, to set up a default jurisdiction-based tax rate. For the tax regime and tax, you may have to scroll up in the window to select the value.
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXGB VAT
Tax
XX GB VAT
Tax Status Code
STANDARD
Tax Jurisdiction Code
GB VAT
Tax Jurisdiction Name
GB VAT
Geography Name
United Kingdom
Tax Rate Code
XX GB VAT STANDARD
Tax Rate Name
XX GB VAT Standard
Tax Rate
20
Set As Default Rate
Yes
Effective Start Date
2011/01/01
Note: The default jurisdiction-based tax rates:
Ensures that the calculated transaction tax amounts are based on the rates enforced by the tax authority for a particular jurisdiction.
Allows correct downstream reporting of transaction tax amounts on a periodic basis to the proper local tax authorities.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 14
Without the creation of valid default jurisdiction-based tax rates, filing of tax reports and returns cannot be completed. The jurisdiction information is required for the calculated transaction tax amounts to appear on the tax reports and returns for filing with the specific local tax authorities.
17. Click the Manage Tax Recovery Rates tab in the spreadsheet.
18. Complete the fields, as shown in this table for the tax recovery rate. For the tax regime and tax, you may have to scroll up in the window to select the value.
Field Value
Tax Regime Code
XXGB VAT
Tax
XX GB VAT
Tax Recovery Rate Code
XX GB VAT STANDARD REC RATE
Tax Rate
100
Set As Default Rate
Yes
Effective Start Date
2011/01/01
19. Save the spreadsheet tax data in a zip file that contains CSV formatted data by using the Generate CSV File macro button on the Instructions tab of the spreadsheet. You may need to enable macros to use the Generate CSV File button.
Save your spreadsheet zip file with a unique name by adding _XX to the file name.
20. On the Manage Tax Regimes page for Transaction Tax, click Upload Tax Configuration Workbook in the Rapid Setup Spreadsheets list of values in the Search Results region.
21. In the Upload Tax Configuration Workbook dialog box, select your file and click Upload.
22. Click OK to acknowledge that your process was submitted.
23. On the Manage Tax Regimes page for Transaction Tax, select the Monitor Upload and Download Processes tab.
24. Note the status of your process.
If the status of the upload process is Succeeded and there are no validation errors in the log file, you can view your tax regime using the search criteria on this page.
If the status of the process is Paused, wait for the sub-processes to complete and then click the Refresh icon.
If the upload failed, check the details in your upload file, correct any errors, and upload the file again.
Enabling a Tax for Simulation
Tax is not enabled for simulation or transactions when it is created from a spreadsheet upload. You can enable a tax for simulation from the:
Create Tax page
Edit Tax page
Enable Taxes option in the Rapid Setup Spreadsheet list of values on the Manage Taxes page
Note: The Enable Taxes option in the Rapid Setup Spreadsheet list of values on the
Manage Taxes page automatically enables a tax for both simulation and transactions
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 15
processing. The best practice is to first enable a tax or collection of taxes for simulation only using the Create Tax page or the Edit Tax page. Use the Oracle Fusion Tax Simulator to thoroughly test all tax setups for accuracy before enabling the tax or collection of taxes for transactions processing. Once you enable a tax for both simulation and transactions processing, you can’t modify the tax setup.
25. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Taxes.
26. On the Manage Taxes page for Transaction Tax, enter XX GB VAT in the Tax field and click Search.
27. Select the row with your tax and click the Edit icon.
28. On the Edit Tax page, select the Enable tax for simulation option. You can use the Tax Simulator to test your configuration before you enable your tax for transactions.
29. Click the Save and Close button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 16
Practice 11-4: Using the Tax Simulator to Test a Payables Transaction
Overview
In this practice, you will use the Tax Simulator to test your US Sales Tax on a Payables transaction. After setting up your tax configuration and verifying the transaction results through testing, you can enable the applicable tax or taxes for transactions. The tax determination process uses your tax configuration and the details on the transaction to determine which taxes apply to the transaction and how to calculate the tax amount for each tax that applies to the transaction.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Simulator Transactions.
Note: Use the Manage Tax Simulator Transactions page to test your tax configuration with existing transactions, as well as newly created transactions, without impacting active data.
Entering a Payables Transaction to Test Your Tax Setup
Note: You must use the US1 Legal Entity and the US1 Business Unit for the simulation because your Business Unit does not have a Supplier Assignment.
2. Click the Create button.
3. Complete the fields, as shown in the following table:
Field Value
Document Event Class
Purchase invoice
Legal Entity
US1 Legal Entity
Business Unit
US1 Business Unit
Document Number
XXAP
4. In the Supplier region, click the Name search icon.
5. Enter Advanced Corp in the Name field.
6. Click the Search button.
7. Select the row.
8. Click the OK button.
9. Select AC US1 in the Site field.
10. Enter line information for line number 1.
11. Enter Hardware in the Line Description field.
12. Enter 3000.00 in the Amount field.
13. Click the Save button.
Viewing Tax Lines
14. Click the View Tax Lines button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 17
15. Use the Tax Line Details page to view additional details about the tax calculation that applies to a specific detail tax line.
16. Use the header region to view attributes that drive tax determination or tax calculation.
17. Use the tax line details table to view the calculated tax lines with the corresponding tax configuration details for each transaction line.
18. Use the Rule Results region to view the processing and evaluation of the rules associated with a rule type. For each tax rule listed in the tax rules process results table, you can drill down to the associated rule conditions to view the condition details. For this tax line no rules were evaluated. The default values for the rule types were used in tax determination, so no rule conditions are displayed.
19. Click the Done button.
20. Click the Save and Close button.
Information: For further information about setting up your minimum tax configuration, refer to the Help Portal to view the demonstrations on:
Configuring Taxes for Transactions Part 4: Verifying Tax Configuration.
Configuring Tax Rules Part 2: Verifying Tax Applicability Rules.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Tax
Chapter 11 - Page 18
Practice 11-5: Enabling Your Tax for Transactions
Overview
In this practice, you will enable your tax for transactions.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > In the Search field, enter Rapid and click the
Search magnifying glass icon.
2. Click on the Define Common Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation task list and then select Manage Taxes.
3. Enter XXUS in the Tax Regime Code field and click Search.
4. Select the row with your tax and click the Edit icon.
5. Select Enable tax for transactions.
6. Click Save and Close.
7. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 12: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will do the following practices:
Creating Three Account Rules.
Creating a Description Rule.
Creating Two Journal Line Rules.
Creating a Journal Entry Rule Set.
Duplicating and Modifying an Accounting Method.
Assigning an Accounting Method to a Ledger.
Reviewing Accounting for a Payables Invoice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 3
The goal of these practices is create a new Accounting Method for your secondary ledger. Your company requires the secondary ledger to have more detailed accounting for the Payables liability account than the standard accrual method allows.
Below is an example of the accounting that will be on the invoice and ultimately in the primary ledger. Also below is the accounting that your new SL Accrual accounting method will produce for the same invoice. The SL Accrual method will put the departments used on the distribution accounts on the liability account.
Ledger Accounting Method Account Combination DR CR
Primary
Standard Accrual
01-110-5620-01
400.00
01-120-5620-01
600.00
01-000-2210-01
1000.00
Secondary
SL Accrual
01-110-5620-01
400.00
01-120-5620-01
600.00
01-110-2210-01
400.00
01-120-2210-01
600.00
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 4
Practice 12-1: Creating Three Account Rules
Overview
In this practice, you will be defining three Account rules for the Payables subledger for the secondary ledger to use. Account rules will be used to determine the accounts for subledger journal entry lines.
The three account rules will be:
An account combination rule using a constant for the liability account for the credits: 01-000-2210-00.
A segment rule using the department value from the distribution account.
A source rule using the distribution account for the debits.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Creating Rules for Your Standard Invoice.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables > Manage Account Rules.
Note: You may need to first change the Show list of values to All Tasks.
4. Select Create.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXLiability Account
Short Name
XXLIAB_ACCT
Description
Using a constant.
Chart of Accounts
XXLedger
Rule Type
Account Combination
6. In the Rules region, click Add Row.
7. Enter the following:
Field Value
Priority
1
Value Type
Constant
Value
01-000-2210-01
Adding a Condition.
8. Place your cursor in the Rule 1: Conditions region text box, and remove any existing text.
9. Select Source.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 5
10. Search Name: Invoice Type.
11. Click the Search arrow.
12. Select Payables: Invoice Type.
13. Click OK.
14. Place the cursor after ).
15. Select Operator: Equal To (=).
16. Enter STANDARD.
17. Select Validate.
18. An Information window appears: Validation is complete.
Note: The validation step validates the Condition, not the rule.
19. Select OK.
20. If the rule status is not active, go to the Actions menu and select Change Status > Activate.
21. Select Save and Create Another.
Creating a Second Rule for the Department Segment.
22. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXDepartment
Short Name
XXDEPT
Description
Department value for the liability account.
Chart of Accounts
XXLedger
Rule Type
Segment
Segment
XXDepartment
23. In the Rules region, click Add Row.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 6
24. Enter the following:
Field Value
Priority
1
Value Type
Source
Value
Invoice Distribution Account Payables Standard
Segment
XXDepartment
25. Click OK.
26. Click Save and Create Another.
Creating a Third Rule for the Distribution Account.
27. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXExpense Account
Short Name
XXEXP_ACCT
Description
Expense Account
Chart of Accounts
XXLedger
Rule Type
Account Combination
28. In the Rules region, click Add Row.
29. Enter the following:
Field Value
Priority
1
Value Type
Source
Value
Invoice Distribution Account Payables Standard
30. Click Save and Close.
31. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 7
Practice 12-2: Creating a Description Rule
Overview
In this practice, you will define a description rule for Payables invoices.
Description rules are used to build the descriptions for subledger journal entry headers and lines.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables > Manage Description Rules.
4. Select Create in the Search Results table.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXDescription
Short Name
XXDESC
Description
Description for Invoices.
6. In the Rules region, click Create.
7. Enter the text Supplier:
8. Click the Source button.
9. In the Search dropdown, select: Name and enter Supplier Name.
10. Click the arrow pointing right.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 8
11. Select Supplier Name for Subledger Application: Payables.
12. Click OK.
13. Enter the text (including the comma): , Supplier Number: .
14. Click the Source button.
15. In the Search drop-down list, select Name and enter Invoice Supplier Number.
16. Click the arrow pointing right.
17. Select Invoice Supplier Number for the Payables Subledger.
18. Click OK.
19. Enter the text (including the comma): , Invoice Number: .
20. Click the Source button.
21. In the Search drop-down list, select Name and enter Invoice Number.
22. Click the arrow pointing right.
23. Select Invoice Number for the Payables Subledger.
24. Click OK.
25. Select Save and Close twice.
26. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 9
Practice 12-3: Creating Two Journal Line Rules
Overview
In this practice, you will create two journal line rules, one for the credit and one for the debit of the journal.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables > Manage Journal Line Rules.
4. Select Create in the Search Results table.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXCredit Line
Short Name
XXCREDIT
Description
Line rule for the credit.
Event Class
Invoices
Side
Credit
Accounting Class
Liability
Merge Matching Lines
No
6. Click Save and Create Another.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 10
7. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXDebit Line
Short Name
XXDEBIT
Description
Line rule for the debit.
Event Class
Invoices
Side
Debit
Accounting Class
Expense
Merge Matching Lines
No
8. Click Save and Close.
9. Click Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 10
Practice 12-4: Creating a Journal Entry Rule Set
Overview
In this practice, you will create a new Journal Entry Rule Set. The journal entry rule set is a collection of rules. These rules are used to create balanced journal entries for a given event type.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables > Manage Subledger Journal Entry Rule Sets.
4. Select Create in the Search Results table.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXJERS
Short Name
XXJERS
Description
Invoice rule set.
Event Class
Invoices
Event Type
All
Chart of Accounts
XXLedger
Assign Your Account Combination Rule
6. In the Journal Entry region, select Description Rule: XXDescription.
7. In the Journal Lines region, click Add Row.
8. Enter the following:
Field Value
Line Type
Credit
Journal Line Rule
XXCredit Line
Account Combination Rule
XXLiability
XXDepartment
XXDepartment
9. In the Journal Lines region, click Add Row.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 11
10. Enter the following:
Field Value
Line Type
Debit
Journal Line Rule
XXDebit Line
Account Combination Rule
XXExpense Account
11. Click Save and Close.
12. Select the row header for XXJERS.
13. Select Actions > Change Status > Activate.
14. Click Yes
15. Verify that the Status of the XXJERS is Active.
16. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 12
Practice 12-5: Duplicating and Modifying an Accounting Method
Overview
In this practice, you will duplicate the Standard Accrual method and replace the Payables invoice Journal entry rules set with your journal entry rule set. You should then attach your new accounting method to your secondary ledger.
Since you have not defined a secondary ledger yet you can practice attaching your new accounting method to your primary ledger. Attaching an accounting method to a secondary ledger is done in the same way.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables > Manage Accounting Methods.
4. Highlight the Standard Accrual row.
5. Click Actions > Duplicate.
6. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXSL Accrual
Short Name
XXSL_ACCRUAL
Chart of Accounts
XXLedger
7. Click Save and Close.
8. On the Invoices row, enter the Effective End Date = Yesterday’s date.
9. Click Save.
10. In the Journal Entry Rule set Assignments region, click Add Row.
11. Enter the following:
Field Value
Event Class
Invoices
Event Type
All
Rule Set
XXJERS
Effective Start Date
Today’s date
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 13
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Highlight your XXSL Accrual row and click Edit.
14. Click the Activate button.
15. Click Yes.
16. Click OK.
17. Click Save and Close.
18. Click Done.
Attaching Your New Accounting Method to Your Ledger.
19. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance.
20. Select the Financials Offering.
21. Click Setup in the Administration area.
22. Click on General Ledger from the Functional Areas list.
23. Next to the first Specify Ledger Options task click on the hyperlink in the Scope column.
24. Select the Specify Ledger Options radio button.
25. In the Secondary Ledger field, select Select and Add.
26. Click Apply and Go to Task.
27. Select your XXLedger US from the list.
28. Scroll to the bottom and click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 14
29. In the Subledger Accounting area, select XXSL Accrual for the Accounting Method.
30. Click Save and Close.
Note: We will test your new accounting method in another lesson.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 15
Practice 12-6: Reviewing Accounting for a Payables Invoice
Please skip this practice. The training environment is not set up to support it.
-_-_-_-_-_- INSTRUCTOR NOTE -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-
In preparation for this course instructor should have created a custom Subledger Accounting Method and attached it to the US IFRS Secondary Ledger, following the same steps as in practices 12-1 to 12-5, just using the US Chart of Accounts instead of Chart of Accounts: XXLedger.
The instructor will also have entered and accounted a sample AP invoice.
Participants can review the resulting subledger accounting entries and general ledger journals.
-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_- _-_-_-_-_-_-
Overview
In this practice, you will:
Review an AP invoice.
Review the resulting subledger accounting entries and general ledger journals.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Creating an AP invoice. This step has been performed by the instructor in advance. You can review the invoice.
1. Navigate to: Payables > Invoices > Create. Field Value
Business Unit
US1 Business Unit
Supplier
Advanced Corp
Number
GR_STDINV_004
Amount
1,000.00 USD
2. Create two lines: Field Value
Line 1
Amount
400.00
Distribution Combination
101.10.15160.110.000.000
Line 2
Amount
600.00
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 16
Distribution Combination
101.10.15160.120.000.000
3. Expand Taxes, click on Edit Taxes and overwrite tax amounts to 0.00
4. Validate and Account in Draft.
Submitting the Create Accounting Process in Final / Post. (This has already been performed by the instructor in advance, so you can simply review the accounting for the invoice.)
1. Navigate to: Payables > Invoices.
2. Click on the Tasks panel tab: Accounting > Create Accounting.
3. Enter or accept the following:
Field Value
Subledger Application
Payables
Ledger
US Primary Ledger
Process Category
Invoices
End Date
Today
Accounting Mode
Final
Process Events
All
Report Style
Detail
Transfer to General Ledger
Yes
Post in General Ledger
Yes
Journal Batch
Lesson 12
Include User Transaction Identifiers
No
4. Click Submit.
5. Select OK.
Viewing the results of the Create Accounting run. This has already been performed by the instructor in advance.
6. Navigate to: More…Tools > Scheduled Processes.
7. Click Refresh until the Create Accounting Execution Report, Status: Succeeded.
8. Select the row header for the Search Results: Name: Create Accounting Execution Report: status row.
9. The Create Accounting Execution Report, #####: Details region will appear below.
10. Scroll to the bottom of the page and select the Output Name: Default Document link.
11. A PDF report display appears. Click the Download icon and Save to your desktop. The file name is outputDocument.pdf.
12. Open the file from the desktop to view the report results.
Note: Notice that the secondary ledger has represented the accounting differently than the primary ledger. The secondary ledger’s liability department is the same as the distribution accounts.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 17
Reviewing the AP invoice
13. Navigate to: Payables > Invoices.
14. Click on the Tasks panel tab: Invoices > Manage Invoices
15. Search for Invoice Number: GR_STDINV_004
16. Click on the invoice number in the search results to open the Manage Invoice page
Note: You can review the invoice accounting entries for both the primary and the secondary ledger by clicking on the Accounting Status: Final hyperlink in the Invoice Summary panel.
Reviewing the Subledger Journal Entry.
17. Navigate to: Payables > Invoices.
18. Click on the Tasks panel tab and click Accounting > Review Journal Entries.
19. Enter Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
20. Optionally enter Transaction Number Equals: GR_STDINV_004
21. Click Search.
22. Click View Journal Entry.
23. Click View Transaction.
24. Click Done three times.
Viewing the General Ledger Journals.
1. Navigate to: General Accounting > Journals.
2. Change your Data Access Set to US Corp Ledger Set.
3. Click on the Tasks panel tab: Journals > Manage Journals
4. Enter Journal Batch: Starts with: Lesson 12.
5. Click Search.
6. Click on the Journal Batch name link on the US Primary Ledger row. Note: You are now viewing the General Ledger journal.
7. Click on the Credit amount link.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 12: Configuring Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting
Chapter 12 - Page 18
8. Click View Journal Entry.
Note: You are now in Subledger Accounting not General Ledger.
9. Click Done twice.
10. Click Cancel.
11. Go back to the Search Results and click on the Journal Batch name link on the US IFRS Secondary Ledger row. Note: You are now viewing the General Ledger journal.
12. Click on a Credit amount link.
13. Click View Journal Entry.
Note: You are now in Subledger Accounting not General Ledger.
14. Click Done twice.
15. Click Cancel.
16. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 13: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Defining Your User as a Procurement Agent.
Creating a Payment Term.
Managing Common Options for Payables and Procurement
Managing Invoice Options
Managing Payment Options
Managing Distribution Sets.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 3
Practice 13-1: Defining Your User as a Procurement Agent
Overview
In this practice, you will be defining your user as a procurement agent.
Prerequisites
You successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Provisioning a Data Role
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables.
4. Next to the Manage Procurement Agents task, click the Selected Scope link.
5. The Select Scope window appears. With the Manage Procurement Agents option selected, select Select and Add from the Business Unit drop-down list.
6. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
7. Search and select the row header for your XXBusiness Unit.
8. Click Save and Close. The Manage Procurement Agents page opens.
9. Click Create.
10. Enter the following:
Field Value
Procurement BU
XXBusiness Unit
Agent
Student, FASXX
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 4
11. Accept all the defaults under Agent Access.
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click OK.
14. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 5
Practice 13-2: Creating a Payment Term
Overview
In this practice, you will be:
Setting the scope for your business unit.
The installments and discounts for the new payment term are:
First installment: 40 percent due in 10 days, with a discount of 5 percent if paid in 7 days.
Second installment: 35 percent due in 20 days, with a discount of 3 percent if paid in 15 days.
Third installment: 25 percent due in 30 days, with a discount of 2 percent if paid in 25 days.
Assigning your XXREFSET set to the payment term.
Prerequisites
You successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Provisioning a Data Role
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables.
4. Next to the Manage Payment Terms task, click the Selected Scope link.
5. The Select Scope window appears. With the Manage Payment Terms option selected, select Select and Add from the Business Unit drop-down list.
6. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
7. Search and select the row header for your XXBusiness Unit.
8. Click Save and Close. The Manage Payment Terms page opens.
9. Click Create.
10. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXPayment Term
Description
Multiple installments with discounts.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 6
11. In the Installments section Click Add Row.
12. Enter the following:
Field Value
Due (%)
40
Days
10
First Discount (%)
5
Days
7
13. In the Installments section Click Add Row.
14. Enter the following:
Field Value
Due (%)
35
Days
20
First Discount (%)
3
Days
15
15. In the Installments section Click Add Row.
16. Enter the following:
Field Value
Due (%)
25
Days
30
First Discount (%)
2
Days
25
17. Click Save.
18. In the Set Assignments section Click Add Row.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 7
19. Click the Set Code list and select XXREFSET and COMMON.
20. Click Save and Close.
Add your Reference Data Set to the Immediate Payment Term.
Note: The first time that you save the Manage Common Options for Payables and Procurement page for a business unit, a default record for the Manage Invoice Options task is automatically created. The Payment Terms field on the Manage Invoice Options page is a required field and the invoice options record is saved using the predefined payment term of Immediate. If your Reference Data Set is not added to the Immediate Payment Term you cannot complete the next practice.
21. Click on the Immediate payment term link.
22. In the Set Assignments region, click Add Row.
23. In the Set Code field enter: XXREFDATA.
24. Click Save and Close.
25. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 8
Practice 13-3: Managing Common Options for Payables and Procurement
Overview
In this practice, you will be:
Verifying that the scope is set for your business unit.
Reviewing default distribution combinations for your business unit.
Prerequisites
You successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Provisioning a Data Role
Creating a Payment Term
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables.
4. Ensure that the Manage Common Options for Payables and Procurement task is scoped for your XXBusiness Unit.
5. Click Manage Common Options for Payables and Procurement.
6. Review the following and enter if necessary. For accounting, review these values and make thoughtful changes id necessary, based upon the previous setup you have accomplished:
Field Value
Liability
01-000-2210-01
Prepayment
01-000-1350-01
Conversion Rate Variance Gain
01-400-7890-01
Conversion Rate Variance Loss
01-400-7890-01
Discount Taken
01-400-7790-01
Miscellaneous
01-400-6120-01
Realized Gain Distribution
01-400-8220-01
Realized Loss Distribution
01-400-8220-01
Conversion Rate Type
Corporate
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 9
7. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 10
Practice 13-4: Managing Invoice Options
Overview
In this practice, you will be:
Setting the scope for your business unit.
Configuring invoice options for your business unit.
Prerequisites
You successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Provisioning a Data Role
Creating a Payment Term
Manage Common Options for Payables and Procurement
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables.
4. Next to the Manage Invoice Options task, click the Selected Scope link.
5. The Select Scope window appears. With the Manage Invoice Options option selected, select Select and Add from the Business Unit drop-down list.
6. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
7. Search and select the row header for your XXBusiness Unit.
8. Click Save and Close. The Manage Invoice Option page opens.
9. Accept or enter.
Section Field Value
Invoice Entry
Recalculate invoice installments
Enable
Invoice Currency
USD
Payment Currency
USD
Pay Group
Standard
Payment Terms
XXPayment Term
Discount
Always take discount
Enable
Payment Request
Pay Group
Standard
Self-Service Invoices
Allow Unit Price Change for Quantity-Based Matches
Price decrease only
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 11
10. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 12
Practice 13-5: Managing Payment Options
Overview
In this practice, you will be:
Verifying that the scope is set for your business unit.
Reviewing the default payment option settings.
Prerequisites
You successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Provisioning a Data Role
Creating a Payment Term
Managing Common Options for Payables and Procurement
Managing Invoice Options
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables.
4. Next to the Manage Invoice Options task, click the Selected Scope link.
5. The Select Scope window appears. With the Manage Payment Options option selected, select Select and Add from the Business Unit drop-down list.
6. Click Apply and Go to Task button.
7. Search and select the row header for your XXBusiness Unit.
8. Click Save and Close. The Manage Payment Option page opens.
9. Review and accept the default payment options.
10. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 13
Practice 13-6: Managing Distribution Sets
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a distribution set for miscellaneous expenses.
Prerequisites
You must have successfully completed the following practices:
Entering Data in Rapid Implementation Spreadsheet
Uploading Chart of Accounts File
Deploying a Chart of Accounts Demonstration
Uploading Ledger, Legal Entity, and Business Unit File
Provisioning a Data Role
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
For accounting, review the recommended values and make thoughtful changes based on the previous setup you have accomplished. You may create a distribution set for department or cost center or another segment, based on your chart of account setups you have previously setup.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payables.
4. In the Show field drop down select All Tasks.
5. Click on Manage Distribution Sets.
6. Click Create.
7. Enter the following:
Field Value
Business Unit
XXBusiness Unit
Name
XXMiscellaneous Expenses
Description
Distribute miscellaneous expenses to departments 110 and 120
Distribution Percentage
100
8. In the Distribution Set Details region, click Add Row.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson13: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payables
Chapter 13 - Page 14
9. Enter the following and click Add Row again for Line 2:
Note: There might be a bug. Enter the Distribution Combination first, otherwise you will need to enter some of the information twice.
Column Line 1 Line2
Distribution (%)
50
50
Description
Administration Department
Sales Department
Distribution Combination (or one that fits your setups)
01-110-5620-01
01-120-5620-01
10. Click Save and Close.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Creating Banks, Branches, and Accounts Using a Spreadsheet.
Creating a Payment Document for a Bank Account.
Creating a Disbursement Payment File Format.
Creating the Transmission Configuration.
Creating a Payment System.
Creating a Payment Method.
Creating a Payment Process Profile.
Submitting a Payment Process Request.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 3
Practice 14-1: Creating Banks, Branches, and Accounts Using a Spreadsheet
Overview
In this practice you will be creating a bank, a branch, and an account using a spreadsheet.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > In the Search field, enter Rapid and click the
Search magnifying glass icon.
2. Click on the Define Common Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation task list and then select Create Banks, Branches and Accounts in Spreadsheet.
3. Click OK.
Note: Two tabs are displayed at the bottom of the spreadsheet Instructions and Bank Account.
4. Click the Bank Account tab.
Entering Data
5. Enter your bank, branch, and account information, using the tables below:
Bank Information
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Country
United States
Bank Name
XXBank of America
Branch Information
6. Enter the required branch information: name, optionally add the number, BIC code, and alternate name.
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Branch Name
XXMain Branch
Account Information
7. Enter the required account information: name, number, currency, legal entity, and type. Oracle recommends that you add the cash and clearing account for end of period accounting. For accounting, review the recommended values and make thoughtful changes based on the previous setup you have accomplished.
Required Spreadsheet Column
Value
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 4
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Account Name
XXDisbursements
Account Number
XX123456
Currency
USD
Legal Entity
XXVision America
Account Type
Checking
Cash Account
01-000-1110-01
Cash Clearing Account
01-000-1120-01
8. After preparing the data in the spreadsheet, click the Generate Banks, Branches, and Accounts File button.
9. Save the generated XML file with a unique name,
XX_CE_RAPID_IMPLEMENTATION.xml to your desktop.
Loading the File into Cash Management
10. From Functional Setup Manager select Upload Banks, Branches, and Accounts task.
11. Use the Data File: Browse button to find your XXCE_RAPID_IMPLEMENTATION.xml file.
12. Click Open.
13. Click Submit.
14. Click OK.
15. If you are not taken immediately to the Manage Scheduled Processes page then Navigate to: More…Tools > Scheduled Processes.
16. Verify that the process completed without errors or warnings. The Status should be
Succeeded.
Reviewing the Bank, Branch, and Account Created.
17. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
18. Click Setup.
19. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking > Manage Banks.
20. Highlight your XXBank of America.
21. Click View Branches and View Accounts.
22. Click Done until you are back to the Functional Setup Manager.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 5
Practice 14-2: Creating a Payment Document for a Bank Account
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a payment document for a bank account.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking > Manage Bank Accounts.
4. On the Manage Bank Accounts page, enter XXDisbursements in the Account Name
field.
5. Click Search.
6. In the Search Results region, click on the XXDisbursements link.
7. Click the Edit button at the top of the page.
8. Click Create icon in the Payment Documents region.
9. Enter the following:
Field Value
Payment Document
XXCheck
Paper Stock Type
Blank Stock
First Available Document Number
5001
Format
Laser Check
10. Click OK.
11. Click Save and Close.
12. Click OK.
13. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 6
Practice 14-3: Creating a Disbursement Payment File Format
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a Disbursement Payment File Format using the Standard Check BI Publisher Template.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payments > Manage Formats.
4. In the Search Results region select Disbursement Payment File Formats from the
Select Type field drop down.
Note: The Select Type list is in the middle of the page, not in the upper right.
5. Click the Create button.
6. In the Name field on the Create Format page, enter XXElectronic format.
7. In the Code field, enter XXELECTRONIC.
8. In the BI Publisher Template field, enter CE_ISO20022 if available.
9. Click the Save and Close button.
10. Click the OK button.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 7
Practice 14-4: Creating the Transmission Configuration
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating the transmission configuration.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Selecting the Protocol for the Transmission Configuration
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payments > Manage Transmission Configurations.
4. In the Search Results region select File Transfer Protocol for Static File Names from the Select Protocol field drop down.
5. Click the Create button.
Creating the Transmission Configuration
6. In the Configuration field enter XXTransmission Configuration.
Enter the following:
Name Value
*FTP Server IP Address
payments.training.oracle.com
*FTP Account User Name
FASXX
*FTP Account Password
XX123
*Remote File Directory
/tmp
7. Click Save and Close.
8. Click OK.
9. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 8
Practice 14-5: Creating a Payment System
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a payment system.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payments > Manage Payment Systems.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the Following:
Section Field Value
Header
Name
XXPayments
Code
XXPS
Processing Model
Processor
Bank
XXBank of America
Disbursement
Electronic funds transfer and positive pay
Select
Formats (Click Add)
Name
XXElectronic Format
Transmission Protocols
Name
File Transfer Protocol for Static File Names
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 9
6. Click Save and Add Accounts.
7. Click OK.
Creating a Payment System Account
8. Click the Add Row icon and enter XXPayments Account in the Name field.
9. Click Save and Close.
10. Click OK.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 10
Practice 14-6: Creating a Payment Method
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a payment method.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payments > Manage Payment Methods.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the Following:
Tab or Section Field Value
Header
Name
XXPayment Method
Code
XXPM
Usage Rules
Automatically assign payment method to all payees
Select
Payables
Enable for use in Payables
Select
Business Units (select Specific)
XXBusiness Unit
Payment Process Transaction Types (select Specific)
Payables Document
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 11
6. Accept all other defaults.
7. Click Save and Close.
8. Click OK.
9. Click Done.
Changing the Payment Method on Your Invoices only if you have done the additional activities and have a Supplier and Invoice Available.
10. Navigate to: Payables > Invoices > Tasks panel tab > Manage Invoices.
11. Search for your invoices based on you XXIBM Corp. supplier. If you did not setup any suppliers, you can do this for any invoice you see that has an unpaid amount equal to the invoice amount.
12. Click on the first Invoice Number link.
13. Click on the Installments tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 12
14. Change the Payment Method on each row to XXPayment Method.
15. Click Save and Close.
16. Repeat steps 12 – 15 for you second invoice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 13
Practice 14-7: Creating a Payment Process Profile
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a payment process profile.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Payments > Manage Payment Process Profiles.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the Following:
Tab or Section Field Value
Header
Name
XXPayment Process Profile
Code
XXPPP
Payment File Format
Laser Check Format
Processing Type
Printed
Default Payment Document
XXCheck XX Disbursement
Payment File
Send to Printer
Usage Rules
Payment Methods
Specify: XXPayment Method
Disbursement Bank Accounts
Specify: XXDisbursements
Business Units
Specify: XXBusiness Unit
Currencies
All
Reporting
Allow multiple copies for payment file
Select
Condition
All payments
6. Click Save and Close.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 14
Practice 14-8: Submitting a Payment Process Request
Overview
In this practice, you will be submitting a payment process request.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
You have performed the additional activities for creating supplier and invoices.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Payables > Payments > Tasks panel tab > Submit Payment Process Request.
2. Enter or accept the Following:
Tab or Section Field Value
Header
Name
XXPayment Request
Selection Criteria (tab)
Pay Through Date
1 Month from today
From Payment Priority
1
To Payment Priority
99
Date Basis
Pay date
Supplier or Party
XXIBM Corp.( or use same supplier you used in step 11 in Lesson 14-6)
Payment Method
XXPayment Method
Payment and Processing Options (tab): Payment Attributes
Payment Date
Today
Disbursement Bank Account
XXDisbursement
Payment Document
XXCheck
Payment Process Profile
XXPayment Process Profile
Payment Conversion Rate Type
Corporate
Processing Options
Create payment files immediately
Select
Validation Failure Handling
Leave the defaults.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 15
3. Click Submit.
4. Click OK.
5. Scroll down to the bottom of the page and under the Schedule Requests region, click
Refresh until the Format Payment Files has Succeeded.
6. Click on the View Output icon.
7. Click on the ESS_O_XXXXXXX link.
8. Open with: Adobe Acrobat Reader (default).
9. Close all windows until you are back to the payments Overview page.
Printing the Payment.
10. Scroll up to the top region. You may need to click on the refresh icon in the region to update it.
11. Expand your XXPayment Process row.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 14: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Payables
Chapter 14 - Page 16
12. Click on the Action icon arrow.
13. Click Print.
14. Click OK.
15. Click Refresh until the Status is Submitted for Printing.
16. Click Action.
17. Click Record Print Status. If you get an error when doing this, click on the reference number link then click on the Record Print Status button.
18. Click Submit.
19. Click Record the Print Status.
20. Click OK.
21. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 15: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will:
Reviewing Receivables System Options.
Reviewing AutoAccounting Rules.
Reviewing Remit-to Addresses.
Reviewing Receivables Activities.
Reviewing Statement Cycles.
Creating a Customer Profile Class
Creating a Customer
Defining a Transaction Type
Creating Banks, Branches, and Accounts Using a Spreadsheet.
Creating a Receipt Class and Receipt Method
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 3
Practice 15-1: Reviewing Receivables System Options
Overview
In this practice you will be reviewing and setting required system options to configure the Receivables environment. This practice can only be done once. If a setting has been completed when your spreadsheet uploaded, review the settings. If the setting is not set or different, enter the correct value.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Receivables > Manage Receivables System Options.
4. In the Search field select your XXBusiness Unit and click Search.
5. Click on the XXBusiness Unit link.
6. Click the Billing and Revenue tab if it is not already selected.
7. For accounting, review these values and make thoughtful changes if necessary, based upon the previous setup you have accomplished:
Section Field Value
General Information
Split Amount
2,500
Days in days Sales Outstanding Calculation
30
Print remit to address
Selected
Print home country
Selected
Application Rule Set
Line And Tax Prorate
Discount Basis
Invoice Amount
Accounting
Tax Account
01-000-2230-01
Cross Currency Rounding Account
01-400-7990-01
Realized Gains Account
01-400-4430-01
Realized losses Account
01-400-4430-01
Automatic journal import
Selected
Days per Posting Cycle
15
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 4
Section Field Value
Transactions
Tax Invoice Printing Options
Itemize and Sum
Document Number Generation Level
When completed
Customers
Grouping Rule
DEFAULT
AutoInvoice
Purge interface tables
Selected
Maximum Memory in Bytes
3,145,728
Log File Message Level
0
8. Click the Cash Processing tab at the top.
9. Enter these values, for accounting, review these values and make thoughtful changes if necessary, based upon the previous setup you have accomplished:
Section Field Value
General Information
AutoCash Rule Set
Oldest transaction first
Match Receipts By 1
Transaction Number
Chargeback Due Date
Open invoice due date
Accounting
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 5
Section Field Value
Realized Gains Account
01-000-4430-01
Realized losses Account
01-000-4430-01
Cross Currency Rounding Account
01-400-7990-01
Automatic Receipts
Invoices per Commit
500
Receipts per Commit
500
10. Click Save and Close.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 6
Practice 15-2: Reviewing AutoAccounting Rules
Overview
In this practice you will be reviewing the AutoAccounting Rules for your business unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Customer Billing > Manage AutoAccounting Rules.
4. In the Search field select your XXBusiness Unit and click Search.
5. Click on each row to see the Constant Values used on each rule.
6. Click Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 7
Practice 15-3: Reviewing Remit-to Addresses.
Overview
In this practice you will be reviewing the Remit-to Address for your business unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Customer Billing > Manage Remit-to Addresses.
4. Leave the Search field blank and click Search.
5. Click on the Site Number link next to your XX Main Street address.
6. Click Cancel.
7. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 8
Practice 15-4: Reviewing Receivables Activities
Overview
In this practice you will be reviewing the Receivables Activities for your business unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Receivables > Manage Receivables Activities.
4. In the Search field select your XXBusiness Unit and click Search.
5. Click on a Name link to view the details.
6. Click Cancel twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 9
Practice 15-5: Reviewing Statement Cycles
Overview
In this practice you will be reviewing the Receivables Activities for your business unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Receivables > Manage Statement Cycles.
4. In the Interval Search field select Quarterly and click Search.
5. Click Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 10
Practice 15-6: Creating a Customer Profile Class
Overview
In this practice you be defining a customer profile class.
Assumptions
Sign in as the FASXX.Student user assigned to you by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Customer > Show: All Tasks > Manage Receivables Customer Profile Classes..
4. Click the Create icon.
5. Enter Profile Class Name as XXModerate Risk.
6. Enter following information on Profile Class tab:
Section Field Value
Credit and Collections
Collector
Jim Jones
Credit Classification
Moderate Risk
Credit Limit
USD 100000
Conversion Rate Type
Corporate
Terms
Payment Terms
30 Net
Receipt Matching
Match Receipts By
Transaction Number
Invoicing
Grouping Rule
DEFAULT
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 11
7. Accept all other defaults.
8. On Late Charges tab Click Add Row in Currency Settings Region
9. Enter following:
Field Value
Currency
USD – US Dollar
Conversion Rate Type
Corporate
Minimum Receipt Amount
15.00
Minimum Statement Amount
100
Minimum Dunning Amount
100
Minimum Dunning Invoice Amount
15.00
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 12
10. Click Save and Close.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 13
Practice 15-7: Creating a Customer
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a customer with a bill-to site.
Assumptions
Sign in as the FASXX.Student user assigned to you by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Receivables > Billing > Tasks panel tab > Customers > Create Customer.
2. Enter following details:
Section Field Value
Organization Information
Name
XXIBM Corporation
Account Information
Account Description
XXIBM Corporation
Account Type
External
Account Established Date
Six Months Ago (Important for Advanced Collections)
Account Address
Account Address Set
XXREFDATA
(or CUSTSITE)
From Date
Six Months Ago (Important for Advanced Collections)
Address
Site Name
XXNew York
Address Line 1
XX Main Street
City
New York
State
NY
Postal Code
10022
3. Click Save and Close
4. Click Done
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 14
Practice 15-8: Defining a Transaction Type
Overview
In this practice, you define a transaction type for your business unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Customer Billing > Manage Transaction Types.
4. Click the Create icon.
5. Enter these values in the header section:
Field Value
Transaction Type Set
COMMON
Legal Entity
XXVision America
Name
XXInvoices
Transaction Class
Invoice
Transaction Status
Open
From Date
Six months ago (Important for Advanced Collections)
Creation Sign
Positive Sign
Generate Bill
Yes
Credit Memo Type
Credit Memo
Open Receivable
Selected
Allow Freight
Select
Post to GL
Selected
Natural application only
Selected
6. Under Reference Accounts, click Create.
7. In the Business Unit field, select XXBusiness Unit. All the Accounts should default in.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 15
8. Click OK.
9. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 16
Practice 15-9: Defining a Transaction Source
Overview
In this practice, you will define a transaction source for your legal entity.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Customer Billing > > Show: All Tasks Manage Transaction Sources.
4. Click the Create icon.
5. Enter these values in the header section:
Field Value
Transaction Type Set
COMMON
Legal Entity
XXVision America
Name
XXManual
Description
XXManual
Type
Manual
From Date
Six months ago
Automatic transaction numbering
Selected
Last Transaction Number
1000
Standard Transaction Type
Invoice
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 17
6. Click Save and Close.
7. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 18
Practice 15-10: Creating Banks, Branches, and Accounts Using a Spreadsheet
Overview
In this practice you will be creating a bank, a branch and an account using a spreadsheet to use for Customer receipts.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > In the Search field, enter Rapid and click the
Search magnifying glass icon.
2. Click on the Define Common Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation task list and then select Create Banks, Branches and Accounts in Spreadsheet.
Note: Two tabs are displayed at the bottom of the spreadsheet Instructions and Bank Account.
3. Click the Bank Account tab.
Entering Data
4. Enter your bank, branch, and account information, using the tables below:
Bank Information
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Country
United States
Bank Name
XXBank of America
Branch Information
5. Enter the required branch information: name, optionally add the number, BIC code, and alternate name.
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Branch Name
XXMain Branch
Account Information
6. Enter the required account information: name, number, currency, legal entity, and type. Oracle recommends that you add the cash and clearing account for end of period accounting.
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Account Name
XXDeposit
Account Number
XX123456
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 19
Required Spreadsheet Column Value
Currency
USD
Legal Entity
XXVision America
Account Type
Checking
Cash Account
01-000-1110-01
Cash Clearing Account
01-000-1120-01
7. After preparing the data in the spreadsheet, click the Generate Banks, Branches, and Accounts File button.
8. Save the generated XML file with a unique name,
XX_CE_RAPID_IMPLEMENTATION.xml to your desktop.
Loading the File into Cash Management
9. From Functional Setup Manager select Upload Banks, Branches, and Accounts task.
10. Use the Data File: Browse button to find your XXCE_RAPID_IMPLEMENTATION.xml file.
11. Click Open.
12. Click Submit.
13. Click OK.
14. If you are not taken immediately to the Manage Scheduled Processes page then Navigate to: More…Tools > Scheduled Processes.
15. Verify that the process completed without errors or warnings. The Status should be
Succeeded.
Reviewing the bank, branch, and account created.
16. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
17. Click Setup.
18. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking > Manage Banks.
19. Highlight your XXBank of America.
20. Click View Branches and View Accounts.
21. Click Done until you are back to the Functional Setup Manager.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 20
Practice 15-11: Creating a Receipt Class and Receipt Method
Overview
In this practice, you will create a manual receipt class, a check method, and attach your bank account to the method.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Customer Payments > Manage Receipt Classes and Methods.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter:
Field Value
Name
XXManual
Creation Method
Manual
Remittance Method
No Remittance
Clearance Method
By Matching
6. Under Receipt Methods click Create.
7. Enter:
Field Value
Name
XXCheck
Printed Name
XXCheck (defaults)
Effective Start Date
Yesterday
8. In the Remittance Bank Accounts tab click Create.
9. Enter the following, for accounting, review these values and make thoughtful changes if necessary based upon the previous setup you have accomplished:
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 15: Configuring Oracle Fusion Receivables
Chapter 15 - Page 21
Section Field Value
Remittance Bank Accounts
Business Unit
XXBusiness Unit
Bank
XXBank of America
Branch
XXMain Branch
Account
XXDeposit
Primary
Selected
Effective Start Date
Yesterday
GL Accounts
Cash
01-000-1110-01 (defaults)
Remittance
01-000-1270-01 (defaults)
Unapplied Receipts
01-000-1310-01 (defaults)
Unidentified Receipts
01-000-1310-01 (defaults)
On-Account Receipts
01-000-1280-01 (defaults)
Unearned Discounts
Unearned Discounts
Earned Discounts
Earned Discounts
10. Click Save and Close twice.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 16: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Receivables
Chapter 16 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 16: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Receivables
Chapter 16
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 16: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments: Receivables
Chapter 16 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 16
There are no practices for this lesson.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 17: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Managing Bank Statement Transaction Codes.
Managing Bank Statement Transaction Creation Rules.
Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Tolerance Rules.
Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Matching Rules.
Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Rule Sets.
Assigning a Rule Set to your Bank Account.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 3
Practice 17-1: Managing Bank Statement Transaction Codes
Overview
In this practice you be creating transaction codes for check disbursements and for bank fees.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Creating a Transaction Code for EFT Disbursements
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking >Manage Bank Statement Transaction Codes.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Transaction Code
0XX
Description
XXChecks
Transaction Type
Check
Domain
Payments
6. Click Save and Close.
Creating a Transaction Code for Bank Charges.
7. Click Create.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 4
8. Enter the following:
Field Value
Transaction Code
7XX
Description
XXBank Charges
Transaction Type
Fee
9. Click Save and Close.
10. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 5
Practice 17-2: Managing Bank Statement Transaction Creation Rules
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating bank statement transaction creation rules for bank fees.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
GL Chart of account setups for needed accounts has been done.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking > Show: All Tasks > Manage Bank Statement Transaction Creation Rules.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the following (for accounting, review these values and make thoughtful changes if necessary, based upon the previous setup you have accomplished):
Field Value
Name
XXBank Charges
Legal Entity
XXVision America
Type
Fee
Transaction Code
7XX
Type
Fee
Business Unit
XXBusiness Unit
Cash Account
01-000-1110-01
Offset Account
01-000-5620-01
6. Click Save and Close.
7. Click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 6
8. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 7
Practice 17-3: Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Matching Rules
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a bank statement reconciliation matching rule.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking >Show: All Tasks > Manage Bank Statement Reconciliation Matching Rules.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXOne to One
Description
One to one matching rule for Payables.
Transaction Source
Payables
Matching Type
One to One
Matching Criteria
Amount (Defaults)
6. Click Save and Close.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 8
Practice 17-4: Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Tolerance Rules
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a bank statement reconciliation tolerance rule.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking >Show: All Tasks > Manage Bank Statement Reconciliation Tolerance Rules.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXDate and Amount
Description
Date and Amount tolerance for Payables.
Date Tolerance
Enable
Days Before
3
Days After
3
Amount Tolerance
Enable
Amount Below
2
Amount Above
2
6. Click Save and Close.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 9
Practice 17-5: Managing Bank Statement Reconciliation Rule Sets
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a bank statement reconciliation rule set.
Assumptions Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking >Show: All Tasks > Manage Bank Statement Reconciliation Rule Sets.
4. Click Create.
5. Enter the following:
Field Value
Name
XXRule Set
Description
XXRule set for Payables.
6. In the Reconciliation Rules section, click Create.
7. Enter the following:
Field Value
Matching Rule
XXOne to One
Tolerance Rule
XXDate and Amount
8. Click OK.
9. Click Save and Close.
10. Click OK.
11. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 10
Practice 17-6: Assigning a Rule Set to a Bank Account
Overview
In this practice, you will be assigning a rule set to your bank account.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance. Click on the Financials offering.
2. Click Setup.
3. In the Functional Areas panel, click on Cash Management and Banking > Manage Bank Accounts.
4. Search for your account by entering XX in the Account Name field and click Search.
5. Click on the XXDisbursements link.
6. Click on the Controls tab.
7. Click the Edit button.
8. In the Manual Reconciliation Tolerance Rule field enter XXDate and Amount.
9. In the Automatic Reconciliation Rule Set field enter XXRule Set.
10. In the Bank Statement Transaction Creation Rules, click Add.
11. In the Rule field enter XXBank Charges.
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click OK.
14. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 17: Configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management
Chapter 17 - Page 11
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 18: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be creating various setups for Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections. Some of these practices are required and others depending on your collection method are optional. The following practices are:
Getting Started with Advanced Collections Demonstration
Creating an Aging Method
Creating a Collector
Reviewing the Dunning Templates: Instructor Demonstration
Creating a Strategy Task
Creating a Strategy
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 3
Practice 18-1: Getting Started with Advanced Collections Demonstration.
Overview
In this instructor led demonstration, you will be
Viewing Collections Customer Work Area
Viewing the Collections Dashboard
Assumptions
Sign in a Jim.Jones and the same password assigned to your user.
Tasks
View Collections Customer Work Area
1. Sign in a Jim.Jones and the same password assigned to your user.
2. Navigate to: Collections > Customer.
3. Under the Search Customers section, click the Customer List of Values (LOV). Change the value to Account.
4. Enter 10060. Click Search.
5. The Collections Customer work area defaults to the Profile tab. The Profile tab displays the customers: Collector, Business Level view, whether or not to send Dunning Letters and Statements, contact method, payment terms, statement cycle, and discount grace days. This profile is directly linked to the customer profile class in Oracle Fusion
Accounts Receivables.
6. Click the Transactions tab. The customer delinquent invoices are displayed. You can filter by transaction class, due date, include current, or closed transactions. You can take the action of paying, disputing, or adjusting a customer's transaction.
7. Scroll down to the Details section. The details of the transaction selected above are displayed.
8. In the Details Section Click the Activity tab. This tab show information for each particular line selected in the transactions tab.
9. Click the Aging tab to display the customers aging method and details. You can recalculate by changing the Business Unit and Aging Method.
10. Click the Contact tab. The Contact tab displays the details of the primary and secondary contacts for the customer.
11. Click the History tab. The History tab displays the history of correspondence and the transactions included in that correspondence.
12. Click the Communication tab. The Communications tab displays the phone numbers, e- mail, and addresses for the customer.
13. Click the Activities tab. The Activities tab displays action taken on the specific transaction, such as partial payment, a submitted dispute, or adjustment.
14. You can take Notes regarding specific transactions or for the whole account. Click the
Create button and enter your notes in the form that displays. Click the Cancel button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 4
View Collections Dashboard
15. Navigate to: Collections > Collections Dashboard link. The delinquent customers that belong to the collector Jim Jones are displayed.
16. Scroll down to and expand the Activities region. Use the Activities region to create tasks for follow-up action with the customer assigned to the collector. Collectors must be created as Resources in the Customer Relationship Management application to create activities.
17. Expand the Customer Search region. You can filter the list of customers and access the
Collections Customer work area from the Customer Search region.
18. Clicking on any of the links displayed in the Search region takes you to the Collections Customer work area for that specific customer.
Viewing Metrics
19. Navigate to: Collections > Collections Dashboard.
20. Click on the Metrics tab.
21. Search on the Business Unit: US1 Business Unit.
22. Sign out as user Jim.Jones.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 5
Practice 18-2: Creating an Aging Method.
Overview
In this practice you will be creating an aging method because your company requires a unique aging method that is not a Collections predefined aging method.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Select the Financials offering > Setup > Collections > Manage Aging Methods.
2. Click Add Row.
Aging Method Section
3. Enter:
Field Value
Aging Method Name
XX 1 to 120 Aging
Aging Type
7 Bucket
Enable
Yes
Aging Method Set
Common Set
Aging Method Description
Current to 120 Day Aging method.
4. Click Save.
Aging Method Details Section
5. Click Add Row four times.
6. Enter:
Sequence Bucket Type Aging Days From Aging Days To Aging Bucket Heading
0
Current
-9999
0
Current
1
Past Due
1
45
45 Past Due
2
Past Due
46
60
60 Past Due
3
Past Due
61
90
90 Past Due
4
Past Due
91
120
120 Past Due
5
Past Due
121
9999
121+ Past Due
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 6
7. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 7
Practice 18-3: Creating a Collector and a Resource
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating yourself as a collector. Once you have created yourself as a new collector you can assign the collector to customers under the Profile tab on the Customer work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Select the Financials offering > Setup > Collections > Manage Collectors.
2. Click Add Row.
3. Enter your name as Collector Name.
4. Select Employee from the Type list of values.
5. Select your user name (Assigned by the instructor) from the list of values in Employee or Group field.
6. Select Yes to enable the collector.
7. Select US1 BU Set from the Collector Set list of values.
8. Click Save and Close.
Creating a Resource
9. Navigate to Resources > Show: All Tasks > Manage Resources.
10. Click Create.
11. Search for your FAS01.Student from the Person Name field and Employee from the
Usage field.
12. Highlight your row and click Add as Resource.
13. Click OK.
14. Select Collector from the Role drop down.
15. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 8
16. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 9
Practice 18-4: Reviewing Dunning Templates Demonstration
Overview
In this instructor led demonstration, you will be reviewing dunning templates.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: More…Tools > Click the Reports and Analytics link.
2. Expand Shared Folders > Financials > Collections > Correspondence.
3. Click on Collections Send Dunning Letters and then the Edit link.
4. Click the Edit link on one of the templates to open the files to view the contents of the template letter. Close the letter.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 10
Practice 18-5: Creating a Strategy Task
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a manual task.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Select the Financials offering > Setup > Collections > Manage Strategy Tasks.
2. Click Add Row.
3. Enter the following information using the table below:
Field Value
Enabled
Selected
Name
XXFriendly phone call
Description
Customer is slightly past due, make friendly call
Type
Manual
Category
Phone Call
How long will strategy wait until it executes this task
0 days
How long will strategy wait after it executes this task
0 days
Optional
Y
4. Click Save and Close twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 11
Practice 18-6: Creating a Strategy
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating a strategy, assign tasks, and assign them sequentially.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Select the Financials offering > Setup > Collections > Show: All Tasks > Manage Collections Strategies.
Creating a Strategy Template Group
2. Click Create.
3. Enter:
Field Value
Group Name
XX US Customers
Strategy Level
Account
Change Strategy per Tolerance
No
Enabled
Yes
Start Date
Select today’s date from the pick list
End Date
Blank
Customer Segment Section
4. Enter the following information:
Field Values
View Name
IEX F_ACCOUNTS_V
Identifier
CUST_ACCOUNT_ID
Strategies Section
5. Click Add Row.
Field Values
Method Name
XXUSA Strategy Good
Lowest Applicable Score
50
6. Click the Add Row icon.
Field Values
Method Name
XXUSA Strategy Bad
Lowest Applicable Score
0
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 18: Configuring Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections
Chapter 18 - Page 12
Tasks Section:
7. Select the XXUSA Good Strategy. Click Add Row for each new row.
Field Value
Order
10
Name
XXFriendly Phone Call
Order
20
Name
XXFriendly Phone Call
Order
30
Name
XXFriendly Phone Call
8. Select the XXUSA Bad Strategy. Click Add Row for each new row.
Field Value
Order
10
Name
Friendly Phone Call
Order
20
Name
Hard Customer Call
9. Click Save and Close twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 19: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Updating an Existing Assets Configuration
Review Asset Key Flexfield Demonstration
Review Asset System Control Options Demonstration
Define Values for Major and Minor Category
Define Values for Asset Clearing and CIP Clearing Accounts
Managing Fiscal Years
Managing Asset Books
Managing Asset Categories
Provisioning Data Roles to the User Account
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 3
Practice 19-1: Updating an Existing Assets Configuration
Overview
In this practice, you will:
Open an Update spreadsheet.
Update an existing Assets configuration.
Validate your data.
Generate a configuration file.
Upload your data.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
To use the spreadsheet, ADF Desktop Integrator (DI) must be installed first.
Note: In the classroom, ADFdi is already installed so skip to step.5.
1. In the application, navigate to: Tools > Download ADF Desktop Integrator.
2. Click on the file that opens.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 4
3. Click setup.exe.
4. Follow the prompts.
Tasks
5. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Update Fixed Assets Configuration in Spreadsheet.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Yes.
8. Reenter your login credentials.
9. On the Update Fixed Assets Configuration spreadsheet, click the Categories tab.
10. Click the Download button.
11. Count down the list to find an asset category that matches your number. For example if your 03, count down 3.
Change the Description by adding your XX or if there are more students than assets, click on the Locations tab.
12. Click the Download button.
13.
14. Add a new location by copying any existing location.In the BUILDING column, enter XX500 where XX is the number your instructor assigned you.
15. Return to the Rapid Setup Instructions tab.
16. Click Validate Data.
17. Ensure that your validation report contains no errors and return to the Rapid Setup Instructions tab.
18. Click Generate Configuration File.
19. Save the file to your computer.
To upload your data:
20. Navigate to: Tools > File Import and Export.
21. On the File Import and Export page, click the Create icon.
22. Select your saved zip file and the account fin/assets/import.
23. Click Save and Close. Your file now appears in the Search Results section.
24. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Upload Fixed Assets Configuration in Spreadsheet.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 5
25. On the Upload Fixed Assets Configuration page, select your data file as a zip file and click Submit.
26. On the Confirmation window, note your process ID and click OK.
27. Navigate to: Tools > Scheduled Processes.
28. On the Scheduled Processes page, search for your process ID.
29. If it is still running, wait a moment and click the Refresh icon until the Status shows that the upload has finished successfully.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 6
Practice 19-2: Review Asset Key Flexfields Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, the instructor will review the Asset Key Flexfields.
Assumptions
The instructor will sign in with their user.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields.
2. On the Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields page, click on the Search button.
3. Click Category Flexfield.
4. Click Manage Structures.
5. Click Search.
6. Place Cursor on the Asset Category Flexfield.
7. Click Edit.
8. Select the segment Major Category and click Edit.
9. Review Attributes for the Major Category Segment.
10. Click Cancel twice.
11. Click Done.
12. Select the Location Flexfield.
13. Click Manage Structures.
14. Click Search.
15. Place the cursor on the Asset Location Flexfield.
16. Click the Edit icon.
17. Select segment State/County and Click the Edit icon.
18. Click Cancel twice.
19. Click Done twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 7
Practice 19-3: Define Values for Major and Minor Category
Overview
In this practice, you create a major and minor category value by using the Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields page from the Setup and Maintenance work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
In this practice, you are the asset accounting manager at your company and your manager has requested that you add a category for Office Supplies with a minor category of Printer.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields.
2. Click Search.
3. Select Category Flexfield.
4. Click Manage Structure Instances.
5. Click Search.
6. Select the name Category and click the Edit icon.
7. To add a major category value, click FA_MAJOR_CATEGORY.
8. On the Manage Value Sets page, click Manage Values.
9. On the Manage Values page, click Search to view a list of the major category values that have already been defined in the Search Results section. Note that XXOFFICE SUPPLIES is not currently in the list.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 8
10. Click the Create icon.
11. On the Create Value page, enter Value: XXOFFICE SUPPLIES.
12. Enter Description: XXOffice Supplies.
13. Click Save and Close. Note that XXOFFICE SUPPLIES now appears in the Search Results.
14. Click Save.
15. You will now create a minor category value.
16. On the Manage Value Sets page, click the Cancel button.
17. On the Edit Key Flexfield Structure Instance page, click FA_MINOR_CATEGORY.
18. Click Manage Values.
19. Click the Create icon.
20. Enter Value: XXPRINTER.
21. Enter Description: XXPrinter.
22. Select XXOFFICE SUPPLIES in the Independent Value field.
23. Click Save and Close. XX PRINTER now appears in the Search Results.
24. On the Manage Values page, click Done.
25. On the Manage Value Sets page, click Cancel.
26. On the Edit Key Flexfield Structure Instance, click Cancel.
27. On the Manage Key Flexfield Structure Instances, click Done.
28. On the Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields page, click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 9
Practice 19-4: Define Values for Asset Clearing and CIP Clearing Accounts
Overview
In this practice, you will create asset clearing accounts that you will use for your asset categories.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Key Flexfields.
2. On the Manage Key Flexfields page click Search.
3. Place your cursor on the Accounting Flexfield and click Manage Structure Instances.
4. Click Search on the Manage Structure Instances Page.
5. Place your cursor on US Chart of Accounts and click on the Edit icon.
6. Place your Cursor on Account segment and click on the Corporate Account Value Set Code link.
7. Click Manage Values.
8. Click Search on the Manage Values page.
9. Click on the Create icon.
30. Define Values based on the following table (15910 + XX/15930 + XX where XX is the number your instructor assigned you)
10. :
Student Number
Value
Description
Account Type
01
15911/15931
01_Asset Clearing/01_CIP Clearing
Asset
02
15912/15932
02_Asset Clearing/02_CIP Clearing
Asset
03
15913/15933
03_Asset Clearing/03_CIP Clearing
Asset
04
15914/15934
04_Asset Clearing/04_CIP Clearing
Asset
05
15915/15935
05_Asset Clearing/05_CIP Clearing
Asset
06
15916/15936
06_Asset Clearing/06_CIP Clearing
Asset
07
15917/15937
07_Asset Clearing/07_CIP Clearing
Asset
08
15918/15938
08_Asset Clearing/08_CIP Clearing
Asset
09
15919/15939
09_Asset Clearing/09_CIP Clearing
Asset
10
15920/15940
10_Asset Clearing/10_CIP Clearing
Asset
11
15921/15941
11_Asset Clearing/11_CIP Clearing
Asset
12
15922/15942
12_Asset Clearing/12_CIP Clearing
Asset
13
15923/15943
13_Asset Clearing/13_CIP Clearing
Asset
14
15924/15944
14_Asset Clearing/14_CIP Clearing
Asset
15
15925/15945
15_Asset Clearing/15_CIP Clearing
Asset
16
15926/15946
16_Asset Clearing/16_CIP Clearing
Asset
17
15927/15947
17_Asset Clearing/17_CIP Clearing
Asset
11. Click Save and Close.
12. Click Done.
13. Click Cancel twice.
14. Click Done twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 10
Practice 19-5: Review Asset System Control Options
Overview
In this demonstration, the instructor will review the Asset System Control options.
Assumptions
The instructor will sign in with their user.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage System Controls.
2. Review the Manage System Controls Options.
3. Click Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 11
Practice 19-6: Define Values for Asset Clearing and CIP Clearing Accounts
Overview
In this practice, you will create asset clearing accounts that you will use for your asset categories.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields.
2. On the Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields page click Search.
3. Place your cursor on the Accounting Flexfield and click Manage Structure Instances.
4. Click Search on the Manage Structure Instances Page.
5. Place your cursor on US Chart of Accounts and click on the Edit icon.
6. Place your Cursor on Account segment and click on the Corporate Account Value Set Code link.
7. Click Manage Values.
8. Click Search on the Manage Values page.
9. Click on the Create icon.
10. Define Values based on the following table:
Student Number
Value
Description
Account Type
01
15911/15931
01_Asset Clearing/01_CIP Clearing
Asset
02
15912/15932
02_Asset Clearing/02_CIP Clearing
Asset
03
15913/15933
03_Asset Clearing/03_CIP Clearing
Asset
04
15914/15934
04_Asset Clearing/04_CIP Clearing
Asset
05
15915/15935
05_Asset Clearing/05_CIP Clearing
Asset
06
15916/15936
06_Asset Clearing/06_CIP Clearing
Asset
07
15917/15937
07_Asset Clearing/07_CIP Clearing
Asset
08
15918/15938
08_Asset Clearing/08_CIP Clearing
Asset
09
15919/15939
09_Asset Clearing/09_CIP Clearing
Asset
10
15920/15940
10_Asset Clearing/10_CIP Clearing
Asset
11
15921/15941
11_Asset Clearing/11_CIP Clearing
Asset
12
15922/15942
12_Asset Clearing/12_CIP Clearing
Asset
13
15923/15943
13_Asset Clearing/13_CIP Clearing
Asset
14
15924/15944
14_Asset Clearing/14_CIP Clearing
Asset
15
15925/15945
15_Asset Clearing/15_CIP Clearing
Asset
16
15926/15946
16_Asset Clearing/16_CIP Clearing
Asset
17
15927/15947
17_Asset Clearing/17_CIP Clearing
Asset
11. Click Save and Close.
12. Click Done.
13. Click Cancel twice.
14. Click Done twice.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 12
Practice 19-7: Managing Fiscal Years
Overview
In this practice, you will create a fiscal year by using the Manage Fiscal Years page from the Setup and Maintenance work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
In this practice, you are an asset accounting manager at your company and need to define a new fiscal year according to your company's reporting and tax regulations.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Fiscal Years.
4. Click the Create icon.
5. Enter a unique Name: XXFIS YR.
6. Enter a unique Description: XXFiscal Year.
7. Click the Add Row icon.
8. Enter a Fiscal Year: (enter the current year).
9. Enter a Start Date: 01/01/XX.
10. Enter an End Date: 12/31/XX.
11. Enter a Mid Year Start Date: 7/1/XX.
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 13
Practice 19-8: Managing Asset Calendars
Overview
In this Practice, you will create a monthly calendar by using the Manage Calendars page from the Setup and Maintenance work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
As the asset accounting manager, you have defined a fiscal year and now need to define a new calendar using the fiscal year you just defined.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Asset Calendars.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter a unique Name: XXMTH CAL.
4. Enter a unique Description: XXMonthly Calendar.
5. Select the Fiscal Year Name: Select the fiscal year you created earlier.
6. Enter the Periods per Year: 12
7. Select the Period Suffix: Calendar.
8. Click the Add Row icon.
9. Enter the first period:
Period Name: JAN-YY (YY is the current year).
Period Number: 1 Start Date: 1/1/YY End Date: 1/31/YY
10. Click the Add Row icon to enter another period. Note that the values for Period Number, Start Date, and End Date have been entered automatically. You only need to enter the first three letter of the month in the Period Name field: FEB.
11. Continue adding periods until you have entered all 12 periods.
12. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 14
13. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 15
Practice 19-9: Managing Prorate Conventions
Overview
In this Practice, you will create a Prorate Convention by using the Manage Prorate Conventions page from the Setup and Maintenance work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
As the asset accounting manager, you have defined a fiscal year and now need to define a new prorate convention using the fiscal year you just defined.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Prorate Conventions.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter a unique Name: XXPRO CON.
4. Enter a unique Description: XXMonthly Prorate Convention.
5. Select the Fiscal Year Name: Select the fiscal year you created earlier.
6. Enable Depreciate when placed in service option.
7. Select Reference Data Set as US1 BU Set.
8. Click the Add Row icon.
9. Enter the following details:
Start Date: Accept Default Value
End Date: 1/31/YY
Prorate Date: 01/01/YY
10. Click the Add Row icon to update the values for remaining periods. Note that the values for
Start Date, End Date and Prorate Date have been entered automatically.
11. Continue adding periods until you have entered all 12 periods.
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 16
Practice 19-10: Managing Asset Books
Overview
In this Practice you will create a corporate depreciation book by using the Manage Books page from the Setup and Maintenance work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
In this practice, you are an asset accounting manager for your company and need to define a new corporate book for your company. The corporate book will store all of your company's asset information in accordance with statutory requirements and your company's corporate policy.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Asset Books.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter a unique Name: XXUS CORP (replacing XX with your initials).
Note: XX cannot be numeric.
4. Enter a unique Description: XX US Corporate Book.
5. Select a Book Class: Corporate
Note: When you define a corporate book, the name of the corporate book you are defining is populated automatically into the Associated Corporate Book field.
6. Select a Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
7. Select a Depreciation Calendar: XX MTH CAL (select the calendar you created earlier).
Note: The Fiscal Year Name is populated automatically.
8. Select a Prorate Calendar: XX MTH CAL (select the calendar you created earlier).
9. Select the Current Period: Enter the current month and year.
10. Select how to Divide Depreciation: Evenly
11. Check the following check boxes: Depreciate if retire in the first year Allow amortized changes
Allow cost sign changes Allow ledger posting
Accounts Region
Enter the following account information:
Field Value
Account Defaults
101.10.78990.000.000.000
Net Book Value Retired Gain
78530
Net Book Value Retired Loss
78540
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 17
Proceeds of Sale Gain
78510
Proceeds of Sale Loss
78520
Proceeds of Sale Clearing
15930
Cost of Removal Gain
78530
Cost of Removal Loss
78540
Cost of Removal Clearing
24220
Deferred Depreciation Expense
68800
Deferred Depreciation Reserve
16800
Rules section: Reference Data Groups tab
Accept the default Reference Data Set Code for all reference data objects except for Asset Prorate Conventions. Enter US1 BU Set for Asset Prorate convention
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click Done
14. Navigate to Setup and Maintenance > Manage Fixed Asset Lookups Search for Lookup Type: ORA_FA; Click on ORA_FA_ALLOW_GROUP.
15. Add your book name as your lookup Code.Search for your book XXUS CORP (replacing XX with your initials)
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 18
16. Navigate to Setup and Maintenance > Manage Asset Books
17. Go to Advanced Rules tab and select all check boxes. Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 19
Practice 19-11: Managing Asset Categories
Overview
In this Practice you will create a corporate depreciation book by using the Manage Books page from the Setup and Maintenance work area.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
You are an asset accounting manager for your company. You created category values and now need to define a category with a major category of Office Supplies and a minor category of Printer.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Asset Categories.
2. Click Create.
3. Select a Major Category: XXOFFICE SUPPLIES (this is the major category value you created earlier).
4. Select a Minor Category: XXPRINTER (this is the minor category value you created earlier).
5. Enter a Description: Printer
6. Accept the default Category Type: Non-lease
7. Accept the default Ownership: Owned
8. Select the Property Type: Personal
9. Select the Property Class: 1245 property
10. Check the following check boxes:
Capitalized Enabled
In physical inventory
11. In the Books section, click the Add Row icon.
12. Select a Book: XXUS CORP
13. On the Accounts tab, enter the following account information: Please note that the XX_ACCOUNT for Asset Clearing should be 15910 + XX (where XX is the number assigned by your instructor). Please note that the XX_ACCOUNT for CIP Clearing should be 15930 + XX (where XX is the number assigned by your instructor).
Account Value
Asset Cost
101.10.15170.000.000.000
Asset Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Depreciation Expense
101.10.68170.121.000.000
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 20
Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16170.000.000.000
Bonus
101.10.68170.121.000.000
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 21
Depreciation Expense
Bonus Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16170.000.000.000
CIP Cost
101.10.15400.000.000.000
CIP Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Unplanned Depreciation Expense
101.10.68170.121.000.000
14. Select Default Depreciation Expense Combination.
15. On the Default Rules tab, click the Add Row icon.
16. Select a Method: STL
17. Select the Life in Years: 5
18. Select the Life in Months: 0
19. Select a Prorate Convention: XXPRO CON
20. Select a Retirement Convention: XXPRO CON
21. Click Save and Close.
22. Place your Cursor on Major Category-Vehicle and Minor Category-Standard Row.
23. Click on Edit Icon
24. In the Books section, click the Add Row icon.
25. Select a Book: XXUS CORP
26. On the Accounts tab, enter the following account information:
Account Value
Asset Cost
101.10.15150.000.000.000
Asset Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Depreciation Expense
101.10.68150.121.000.000
Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16150.000.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Expense
101.10.68150.121.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16150.000.000.000
CIP Cost
101.10.15400.000.000.000
CIP Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Unplanned Depreciation Expense
101.10.68170.121.000.000
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 20
27. Select Default depreciation expense combination.
28. On the Default Rules tab, click the Add Row icon.
29. Select a Method: STL
30. Select the Life in Years: 4
31. Select the Life in Months: 0
32. Select a Prorate Convention: XX PRO CON
33. Select a Retirement Convention: XX PRO CON
34. Click Save and Close.
35. Place your Cursor on Major Category-Vehicle and Minor Category-Heavy row.
36. Click the Edit icon.
37. In the Books region, click the Add Row icon.
38. Select a Book: XXUS CORP
39. On the Accounts tab, enter the following account information:
Account Value
Asset Cost
101.10.15150.000.000.000
Asset Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Depreciation Expense
101.10.68150.121.000.000
Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16150.000.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Expense
101.10.68150.121.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16150.000.000.000
CIP Cost
101.10.15400.000.000.000
CIP Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Unplanned Depreciation Expense
101.10.68170.121.000.000
40. Select Default depreciation expense combination.
41. On the Default Rules tab, click the Add Row icon.
42. Select a Method: STL
43. Select the Life in Years: 4
44. Select the Life in Months: 0
45. Select a Prorate Convention: XX PRO CON
46. Select a Retirement Convention: XX PRO CON
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 21
47. Click Save and Close.
48. Place your Cursor on the Major Category-Building and Minor Category-Office row.
49. Click on the Edit Icon.
50. In the Books section, click the Add Row icon.
51. Select a Book: XXUS CORP
52. On the Accounts tab, enter the following account information:
Account Value
Asset Cost
101.10.15120.000.000.000
Asset Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Depreciation Expense
101.10.68120.121.000.000
Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16120.000.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Expense
101.10.68120.121.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16120.000.000.000
CIP Cost
101.10.15400.000.000.000
CIP Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Unplanned Depreciation Expense
101.10.68170.121.000.000
53. Select the Default depreciation expense combination.
54. On the Default Rules tab, click the Add Row icon.
55. Select a Method: STL
56. Select the Life in Years: 30
57. Select the Life in Months: 0
58. Select a Prorate Convention: XXPRO CON
59. Select a Retirement Convention: XXPRO CON
60. Click Save and Close.
61. Place your Cursor on Major Category-Computer and Minor Category-Hardware row.
62. Click the Edit Icon.
63. In the Books section, click the Add Row icon.
64. Select a Book: XXUS CORP
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 22
65. On the Accounts tab, enter the following account information:
Account Value
Asset Cost
101.10.15160.000.000.000
Asset Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Depreciation Expense
101.10.68160.121.000.000
Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16160.000.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Expense
101.10.68160.121.000.000
Bonus Depreciation Reserve
101.10.16160.000.000.000
CIP Cost
101.10.15400.000.000.000
CIP Clearing
101.10.XX_ACCOUNT.000.000.000
Unplanned Depreciation Expense
101.10.68170.121.000.000
66. Select the Default depreciation expense combination.
67. On the Default Rules tab, click the Add Row icon.
68. Select a Method: STL
69. Select the Life in Years: 4
70. Select the Life in Months: 0
71. Select a Prorate Convention: XXPRO CON
72. Select a Retirement Convention: XXPRO CON
73. Click Save and Close.
74. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 23
Practice 19-12: Provisioning Data Roles to the User Account
Overview
In this Practice you will learn to provision data roles for the Asset Book to your User Account.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Background
In this Practice you are an asset accounting manager at your company and need to assign the Data Role for the Asset Book to your User Account.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Provision Roles to Implementation Users for Asset Books.
2. On the Oracle Identity Manager page, Click Administration.
3. On the Welcome page, click on the Advanced Search-Users link in the Users section.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 24
4. Enter your user name assigned by the instructor in the User Login field and click on
Search.
1.
5. Click on Your User Name in the Display Name Field.
6. Click on Roles to search and assign the Data Role related to your Asset Book.
7. Click Assign to search and assign roles to your User Account.
8. Enter %XX% in the Display Name Field and click Search.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 25
9. Select the Roles related to your Asset Book and click Add to assign the roles.
10. Close Oracle Identity Manager tab from the Browser.
11. Log out from the Instance and Log in again.
12. Navigate to: Fixed Assets > Assets > Tasks.
13. From the Tasks pane, click Add Asset.
15. On the Book list, verify that your Asset Book appears in the list.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 19: Configuring Assets
Chapter 19 - Page 26
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 1
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 2
Practices for Lesson 20: Overview
Practices Overview
In these practices, you will be:
Reviewing the Expenses System Options.
Creating an expense report template.
Setting warning and error limits on a conversion rate demonstration.
Viewing a conversion rate policy warning and error.
Setting Up a Car Rental Policy.
Setting Up an Airfare Policy.
Setting Up a Miscellaneous Expense Policy.
Setting Up a Meals Expense Policy.
Setting Up a Mileage Expense Policy.
Setting Up an Accommodations Expense Policy.
Setting up a Corporate Credit Card
Creating a Corporate Card Program
Setting Up a Corporate Card Usage Policy Warning (Demonstration)
Creating Receipt and Notification Rules.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 3
Practice 20-1: Reviewing the Expenses System Options
Overview
In this practice, you will review the Expenses System Options.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense System Options.
2. On the Manage Expenses System Options page you can define system options for all business units or set options for a specific business unit.
3. Review the three sections in the Manage Expense System Options page:
User Options for Expense Report
Corporate Options for Expense Report
Processing Options for Expense Report
Specific Business Units
4. Click the Reset to Default Options button on the right-hand side of the page and notice how some of the options return to the default setting.
5. In the User Options for Expense Report section, change the Allow choice of reimbursement currency during expense entry to so you can choose a reimbursement currency when creating expense entries.
6. In the Corporate Options for Expense Report section, select the Enable Terms and Agreement check box to enforce expense terms and agreements for all business units. This controls whether employees are required to select the I have read the company policies before submitting expense reports check box.
7. Select a value from the Printable Expense Report Format list.
8. In the Processing Options for Expense Report section, select Third Party in the Pay Expense Reports Through choice list. This allows your expense reports to be paid through a third-party legacy application within your company or an outside supplier.13.
9. In the Specific Business Units section, select a business unit, Japan for example, and click the Edit button.
If you business unit doesn’t exist in the Specific Business Units section, click Create and select an applicable Business Unit from the Create System Options: Specific Business Unit page.
10. Review the choices in the Edit Expenses System Options:
11. Scroll down to the Processing Options for Expense Report section.
12. In the Employee Liability Account section, select the Define value specific to business unit.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 4
13. Open the box and change the LoB to a different LoB.
14. Select OK.
15. Notice how the LoB number changes in your Employee Liability Account.
16. Select Cancel.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 5
Practice 20-2: Creating an Expense Report Template
Overview
In this practice, you will be creating expense types that are applicable to each business unit. You will complete the following tasks:
Creating an expense report template.
Creating four expense types.
Defining the expense types permitted to be itemized for the itemization-required expense type of Hotel.
Specifying Expense Requirements.
Confirming that created expense types appear in the expense report template.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Creating an Expense Report Template
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Templates.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter Name: XXTemplate.
4. Accept the default effective start date.
5. Select US1 Business Unit.
6. Click Save.
Creating an Expense Type for Domestic Airfare
7. Select the Expense Types tab.
8. Click the Create icon.
9. Enter Name: Domestic Airfare.
10. Select Category: Airfare.
11. Enter Account: 60512.
12. From the Save and Close drop down, click Save and Create Another.
Creating an Expense Type for Room Charge
13. Click the Receipt Requirement tab.
14. Enter Name: Room Charge.
15. Select Category: Accommodations.
16. Enter Account: 60530.
17. Select the This expense type used in itemization only check box.
Note: This expense type is now available only for an expense type that is required to be itemized.
18. Click Save and Create Another.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 6
Creating an Expense Type for Internet
19. Enter Name: Internet.
20. Select Category: Miscellaneous.
21. Enter Account: 60540.
22. Select the This expense type used in itemization only check box.
Note: This expense type is now available only for an expense type that is required to be itemized.
23. Click Save and Create Another.
Creating an Expense Type for Hotel
24. Enter Name: Hotel.
25. Select Category: Accommodations.
26. Enter Account: 60530.
27. Select the Itemization tab.
28. Select Enabled.
29. Select the Include check boxes for both the Room Charge and the Internet expense types.
Note: These two expense types are now available as itemizable expense types.
30. Click Save and Close.
31. Click Yes.
Specifying Receipt Requirements
32. Select the Receipt Requirement tab.
33. Select the Require receipts for cash expense lines above specified amount check box.
34. Enter 0.00 in the USD field.
35. Select the Require receipts for corporate card expense lines above specified amount
check box.
36. Enter 0.00 in the USD field.
37. Click Save and Close.
38. Click Yes.
39. Click Done.
Confirming that Created Expense Types Appear in the Created Expense Report Template
40. Navigate to: About Me > Expenses.
41. Click Create Expense Report.
42. Click the Create icon.
43. Accept the default date.
44. Select your Expense Report Template.
45. Select Hotel. Notice that the Itemize button is now enabled because you specified that the Hotel expense type is required to be itemized.
46. Enter Amount of $200.00.
47. Click the Itemize button.
48. Select Room Charge.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 7
49. Change the Amount field to 150.00.
50. Click Add Line.
51. From the Expense Type list, select Internet.
52. Change the Amount to 50.00.
53. Click Save and Close.
54. Click Save and Close.
55. Click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 8
Practice 20-3: Modifying Approval Rules Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, the instructor will demonstrate that you can create or modify approval rules to implement your expense report policies.
Instructor: In this instructor-led demonstration, modify the following two predefined approval rules that represent the company policy.
Expense reports with report total = < $1,000 is automatically approved.
Expense reports with report total > = $1,000 requires one level of supervisory approval.
You will modify the preceding predefined rules to reflect the following changes:
Expense reports with report total = < $1,000 is automatically approved.
Expense reports with report total > $1,000 and < = $2,000 requires one level of supervisory approval.
Expense reports with report total > $2,000 requires two levels of supervisory approval.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Approval Rules > Oracle BPM Worklist application.
2. Modifying an Existing Approval Rule to Add a New Condition That Requires a Single Level of Supervisory Approval for a Report Total Greater Than $1,000 and Equal to or Less Than
$2,000
3. From the Tasks to be configured pane, select the FinExmWorkflowExpenseApproval task.
4. To define and modify rules, click the Rules tab.
5. Click the Edit (pencil) icon on the icon tool bar to make the rules editable.
6. Expand the two predefined rules. There are no changes to the ExpenseReportAutoApprovalRule.
7. Collapse the ExpenseReportAutoApprovalRule.
8. In the IF region for the ExpenseReportManagerApprovalRule, click the Add Rule button (Insert Test). This adds a new blank condition.
9. In the left-most field of the new condition, click the LOV search icon to select the report attribute.
10. Expand the Task folder.
11. Expand the payload folder.
12. Expand the getExpenseReportVOResponse folder.
13. Expand the result folder.
14. Select the expenseReportTotal folder.
15. Click the OK button.
16. In the middle field, select same or less than from the choice list.
17. In the right-most field, enter 2000. Now you have modified the existing rule by adding a condition that requires a single level of supervisory approval for expense reports with a report total > $1000 and < = $2,000.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 9
18. Collapse the rule you just modified.
19. Adding a New Approval Rule That Requires Two Levels of Supervisory Approval for a Report Total Greater Than $2,000
20. From the Create icon choice list to the right of the View choice list, select Add Rule.
21. Expand the new rule. It has blank IF and THEN regions.
22. In the rule name field, enter Report Total over 2000.
23. In the IF region, click the LOV search icon in the left-most field.
24. Expand the Task folder.
25. Expand the payload folder.
26. Expand the getExpenseReportVOResponse folder.
27. Expand the result folder.
28. Select the expenseReportTotal folder.
29. Click the OK button.
30. From the middle list, select more than.
31. In the far-most right field, enter 2000. You have now defined the condition for expense reports over $2,000.
32. In the THEN region, from the List Builder list, select Supervisory and click the Create Action button. Now you can add levels to the hierarchy.
33. For the Response Type, select the Required radio button.
34. In the Number of Levels field, enter 2.
35. Click the LOV search icon for the Starting Participant field. The Add Variable dialog box appears.
36. Select the Get Manager radio button.
37. From the List Builder list, select Supervisory.
38. In the Reference User field, enter Task.creator. NOTE: Task.creator means the expense report submitter.
39. Click the OK button.
40. Click the LOV search icon for the Top Participant. The Add Variable dialog box appears.
41. Select the Get User radio button.
42. In the Reference User field, enter "Samuel.Mabry" as the name of the highest person in the supervisory hierarchy.
43. Click the OK button. You have completed the approval hierarchy definition for reports over
$2,000.
44. Click the Save icon in the icon toolbar.
45. Click the OK button.
46. Click the Commit icon in the icon toolbar.
47. Reviewing the Approver List to Confirm Changes to the Approval Rules
48. Login: Use your username.
49. You will create two expense reports, one with a report total of 1,500 USD and another with a report total of 2,500 USD and submit for approval.
Creating an Expense Report with an Expense Item of $1,500
50. Navigator menu > My Information menu > Expenses link > Expenses work area.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 10
51. In the Expenses work area, click the Create Report button. The Create Expense Report page appears.
52. In the Purpose field, enter report total equals 1500.
53. Select the I have read and accept the corporate travel and expense policies check box.
54. Click the Create Expense Item button. The Create Expense Item dialog box appears.
55. From the Expense Type choice list, select Car Rental.
56. From the Amount choice list, select USD - US Dollar.
57. To the right of the Amount choice list, enter 1500.
58. In the Merchant Name field, enter Hertz.
59. Click the Save and Close button.
60. Click the Submit button.
61. Click the OK button.
62. Confirming the Modified Approval Rule for Expense Reports Greater Than $1,000 and Equal to or Less Than $2,000
63. Click the Pending Approval tab.
64. Click the Expense Report Number link for the expense report number that you noted above. TIP: The most recent expense report link is always the one at the bottom of the table.
65. Alternatively, you can copy the expense report number from the message and paste it into the Query by Example (QBE) field for the expense report. To enable the QBE functionality, click the QBE icon and a row of fields display above the table.
66. Click the Approver List link. The Approver List hierarchy displays.
67. Note the approver listed in the Expense Report Approval Stage.
68. Click the OK button.
69. Click the Done button.
Creating an Expense Report with an Expense Item of $2,500
70. Navigator menu > My Information menu > Expenses link > Expenses work area.
71. In the Expenses work area, click the Create Report button. The Create Expense Report page appears.
72. In the Purpose field, enter report total equals 2500.
73. Select the I have read and accept the corporate travel and expense policies check box.
74. Click the Create Expense Item button. The Create Expense Item dialog box appears.
75. From the Expense Type choice list, select Car Rental.
76. From the Amount choice list, select USD - Dollar.
77. To the right of the Amount choice list, enter 2500.
78. In the Merchant Name field, enter Hertz.
79. Click the Save and Close button.
80. Click the Submit button.
81. Note the confirmation expense report number.
82. Click the OK button.
83. Confirming the New Approval Rule for Expense Reports Greater Than $2,000
84. Click the Pending Approval tab.
85. Click the Expense Report link of the expense report number that you noted above. TIP: The most recent expense report link is always the one at the bottom of the table.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 11
86. Alternatively, you can copy the expense report number from the message and paste it into the Query by Example (QBE) field for the expense report. To enable the QBE functionality, click the QBE icon and a row of fields display above the table.
87. Click the Approver List link. The Approver List hierarchy displays.
88. Note the approver listed in the Expense Report Approval Stage.
89. Click the OK button.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 12
Practice 20-4: Setting Warning and Error Limits on a Conversion Rate Demonstration
Demonstration Overview
In this demonstration you will be:
Set a warning and error limits on a conversion rate
Note: This demonstration can be done only once in the instance. If it has already been completed, just review the setup with the class.
You are setting a warning limit on the conversion rate. If users enter a conversion rate that is 5-10% higher than the default conversion rate, they will see a Warning.
You are setting an error limit on the conversion rate. If users enter a conversion rate that is 10-15% higher than the default conversion rate, they will see an Error.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Financials > Define Expense Policies and Rules
> Manage Conversion Rates and Policies page > US1 Business
The Edit Conversion Rates and Policies: US1 Business Unit dialog opens.
3. Select the Default conversion rate check box.
4. Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 5.
5. Select the Display warning to user check box.
6. Enter Error Tolerance Percentage: 10.
7. In the Individual Currency Exceptions region, click the Add Row icon.
8. Select Currency: AUD – Australian Dollar.
9. Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 10.
10. Select the Display Warning to User check box.
11. Enter Error Tolerance Percentage: 15.
12. Click Save and Close.
13. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 13
Practice 20-5: Viewing a Conversion Rate Policy Warning and Error
Overview
In this practice, you show that during your business trip to the UK, you took a taxi ride and paid for it by using your personal Visa credit card. After returning, you are entering your expenses. You notice that a different conversion rate was applied to the taxi expense by Visa than the one used by your company. You will complete the following tasks:
This practice covers:
View a conversion rate warning.
View a conversion rate error.
Review the Expense System Options.
Select options for a specific business unit.
Enable a printable expense report and then assign it to a specific business unit.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Viewing a Warning for a Conversion Rate Used in an Expense Report
1. Navigate to: About Me > Expenses.
3. Click Create Expense Report.
4. In the Expenses Items region, click the Create icon. The Create Expense Item dialog opens.
5. Accept the default date.
6. Select Expense Template: Expenses US1.
7. Select Expense Type: Taxi.
8. Select Amount: GBP - Pound Sterling and enter 100.00.
Note: GBP may be near the top of the choice list, rather than in alphabetical order.
9. In the Conversion Rate field, change the conversion rate from 1.52975371 to 1.62.
10. Select Expense Location: San Francisco, San Francisco, CA, United States.
Note: You will see a yellow warning that surrounds the Conversion Rate field, which indicates that the conversion rate you entered of 1.62 is 5% or more above the allowable limit of 1.52975371. For entering the conversion rate of 1.62, which resulted in a warning, enter a justification.
11. Enter Justification: Conversion rate applied by Visa.
12. Click Save and Create Another.
Viewing an Error for a Conversion Rate Used in an Expense Report
13. In Create Expense Item dialog, accept the default date.
14. Select Expense Type: Lunch.
15. Select Amount: GBP - Pound Sterling and enter 100.00.
16. Change the conversion rate to 1.88.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 14
17. Confirm that the Expense Location list shows San Francisco, San Francisco, CA, United States.
Note: You will receive a red error that surrounds the Conversion Rate field, which indicates that the conversion rate you entered of 1.88 is 10% or more above the allowable limit of 1.52975371.
18. Click Save and Close.
Tip: If you do not see the error message, click the Save and Close button and then submit the expense report. You will then see a message that indicates that you cannot submit an expense report with errors. You will note a red error icon on the line. Click the expense item link and then you will see the error that was not showing previously.
19. Select “I have read and accept the corporate travel and expense policies”.
20. Click Save and Close.
21. Click OK.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 15
Practice 20-6: Setting Up a Car Rental Policy
Overview
In these practices, you will be following all of the procedures to set up a car rental policy in Expenses.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Setting Up a Car Rental Policy
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category.
2. Select Create Policy: Car Rental.
3. Specify a Policy Name: XXCar Rental.
4. In the Rate Definition region:
a. a. Select the Single Currency radio button.
b. b. Select Currency: USD US Dollar.
1. Note: If a currency rate conversion is necessary to verify a policy rate limit, you must define a conversion rate in Oracle Fusion General Ledger.
5. In the Rate Determinants section:
c. a. Select the Role check box.
d. b. Select Role Type: Job.
Setting Up Car Rental Policy Violations
6. Select the Policy violation warning check box.
7. Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 10.
8. Select the Display warning to user check box.
9. Select the Prevent report submission check box.
10. Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 20.
11. Click Save.
The following table describes what employees see when you set up warning and error policy violations, as well as the calculation used to derive the policy violation:
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 16
Completing the Car Rental Rate Spreadsheet
12. On the Create Car Rental Policy page, click Create Car Rental Rates.
13. Download the predefined spreadsheet to your local drive for completion.
TIP: If you select rate determinants in the Rate Determinants area, you complete the predefined spreadsheet. If you don't select any rate determinants, you create car rental rates in the Create Rates dialog.
14. On the Create Car Rental Rates spreadsheet, complete the fields as shown in the following table.
15. Click Upload Rates.
16. On the Manage Policies by Expense Category page, click Save.
Activating the Car Rental Policy
17. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category task > Go to Task > Manage Policies by Expense Category page.
18. Select the car rental policy that you created and click Activate.
19. Assign the car rental policy to an expense type.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 17
Assigning the Car Rental Policy to an Expense Type
20. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Templates.
The Manage Expense Report Templates page opens.
21. Select an applicable template for a business unit or click Create.
22. On the Create Expense Report Template page, create a template for Car Rental expenses.
23. On the Expense Types tab, click the Create icon to open the Create Expense Type
dialog.
24. In the Create Expense Type dialog, select Category: Car Rental.
25. On the Policies tab, select the Car Rental policy you created, specify the start date, and optionally specify an end date.
26. Click Save and Close.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 18
Practice 20-7: Setting Up an Airfare Policy
Overview
In this practice, you will be following all of the procedures to set up an airfare policy in Expenses.
To setup an airfare policy, you will:
Entering General Information
Setting Up Airfare Policy Violations
Creating a Flight Class policy
Activating the Airfare Policy
Assigning the Airfare Policy to an Expense Type
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Enter General Information
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category.
2. Select Create Policy: Airfare.
3. Enter Policy Name: 35AirFare.
4. In the Flight Class Determinant section:
e. a. The Role check box is already selected by default.
f. b. Select Role Type: Job.
Setting Up Airfare Policy Violations
5. In the Policy Enforcement section, accept the following defaults:
Policy violation warning radio button
Display warning to user check box
6. Click Save and Close.
The following table describes what employees see when you set up warning and error policy violations for an airfare policy.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 19
Creating a Flight Class Policy
7. Review the following example of a flight class policy:
Vice Presidents and above who fly longer than 8 hours for an international flight can purchase a first class ticket.
Vice Presidents and below who fly less than 8 hours for a domestic flight must purchase economy class ticket.
Activating the Airfare Policy
8. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category.
9. Select the airfare expense policy that you created and click Activate.
Assigning the Airfare Policy
10. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Templates.
11. Select an applicable template for a business unit or click the Create icon.
12. On the Create Expense Report Template page, create a template for airfare expenses, or an applicable template for a business unit.
13. On the Expense Types tab, click the Create icon to open the Create Expense Type
dialog.
14. Select Category: Airfare.
15. On the Policies tab, select the airfare policy you created, specify the start date, and optionally specify an end date.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 20
Practice 20-8: Setting Up a Miscellaneous Expense Policy
Overview
In this practice you will be setting up a miscellaneous expense policy and completing the miscellaneous rate spreadsheet for uploading to the application.
The policy is set up with a single instance rate in US dollars, by job, and is enforced by a warning and an error
This practice covers the following aspects of setting up a miscellaneous expense policy:
Setting Up a Miscellaneous Expense Policy
Setting Up Policy Violations
Completing the Miscellaneous Rate Spreadsheet
Associating the Miscellaneous Expense Policy with an Expense Type
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Setting Up a Miscellaneous Expense Policy
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category.
2. Select Create Policy: Miscellaneous.
3. In the Miscellaneous Eligibility Rule section, do the following:
g. a. Select the Minimum number of days for miscellaneous expense reimbursement check box.
h. b. Enter Days: 5.
4. In the Rate Type section, select the Rate limit radio button.
5. In the Rate Definition section, do the following:
i. a. Select the Single instance limit check box.
j. b. Select the Single currency radio button.
k. c. Select Currency: USD US Dollar.
Note: If a currency rate conversion is necessary to verify a policy rate limit, you must define a conversion rate in Oracle Fusion General Ledger.
6. In the Rate Determinants section, do the following:
l. a. Select the Role check box.
m. b. Select Role Type: Job.
7. In the Policy Enforcements section, do the following:
n. a. Select the Policy violation warning check box.
o. b. Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 10.
p. c. Select Display warning check box.
q. d. Select the Prevent report submission check box.
r. e. Enter Error Tolerance Percentage: 20.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 21
Setting up Policy Violations
8. To set up a policy violation for a miscellaneous expense policy, use the data shown previously in the set policy violations for accommodations expense.
Completing the Miscellaneous Rate Spreadsheet
9. On the Create Miscellaneous Policy page, click Create Rates.
10. Download the predefined spreadsheet to your local drive for completion.
Note: If you select rate determinants in the Rate Determinants section, you complete the predefined spreadsheet. If you don't select any rate determinants, you create miscellaneous rates in the Create Rates dialog.
11. On the Create Miscellaneous Rates spreadsheet, complete the fields as shown in the following table.
12. Click Upload.
When rates are successfully uploaded, the policy status is valid. To use the miscellaneous rate policy for calculation of miscellaneous expenses, you must:
13. Activate the miscellaneous expense policy.
14. On the Manage Policies by Expense Category page, select the miscellaneous expense policy that you created and click Activate.
15. Assign the accommodations expense policy to an expense type.
Assigning the Miscellaneous Expense Policy to an Expense Type
16. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Templates.
17. Click the Create icon or select an applicable template for a business unit.
18. Create a template for miscellaneous expenses.
19. On the Expense Types tab, click the Create icon to open the Create Expense Type
dialog.
20. Select Category: Miscellaneous.
21. On the Policies tab, select the miscellaneous expense policy you created, specify the start date, and optionally specify an end date.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 22
Practice 20-9: Setting Up a Meals Expense Policy
Overview
In this practice, you will be setting up a miscellaneous expense policy including:
Setting Up a Meals Expense Policy
Setting Up Policy Violations
Completing the Meals Rate Spreadsheet
Associating the Meals Expense Policy with an Expense Type
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Setting Up a Meals Expense Policy
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category.
2. Select Create Policy: Meals.
3. In the Rate Definition section, do the following:
s. a. Select the Select the Single instance limit check box.
t. b. Select the Single currency radio button.
u. c. Select Currency: USD US Dollar.
Note: If a currency rate conversion is necessary to verify a policy rate limit, you must define a conversion rate in Oracle Fusion General Ledger.
4. In the Policy Enforcements section, do the following:
v. a. Select the Policy violation warning check box.
w. b. Select Warning Tolerance Percentage: 10.
x. c. Select the Display warning to user check box.
y. d. Select the Prevent report submission check box.
z. e. Enter Error Tolerance Percentage: 20.
5. Click Save.
Setting up Policy Violations
To set up a policy violation for a meals expense policy, use the data shown previously in the set
policy violations for accommodations expense.
Completing the Meals Rate Spreadsheet
6. On the Create Meals Policy page, click the Create Rates button.
7. Download the predefined spreadsheet to your local drive for completion.
Note: If you select rate determinants in the Rate Determinants section, you complete the predefined spreadsheet. If you don't select any rate determinants, you create meals rates in the Create Rates dialog.
8. On the Create Meals Rates spreadsheet, complete the fields as shown in the table.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 23
9. Click the Upload.
10. When rates are successfully uploaded, the policy status is valid. To use the rates spreadsheet for calculation of meal expenses, you must:
aa. a. Activate the miscellaneous expense policy.
bb. b. On the Manage Policies by Expense Category page, select the meals expense policy that you created and click the Activate button.
11. Assign the meals expense policy to an expense type.
Assigning the Meals Expense Policy to an Expense Type
Follow these steps to assign the meals expense policy to an expense type:
12. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Templates.
13. Click the Create icon or select an applicable template for a business unit.
14. Create a template for meals expenses.
15. On the Expense Types tab, click the Create icon to open the Create Expense Type
dialog.
16. Select Category: Meals.
17. On the Policies tab, select the meals expense policy you created, specify the start date, and optionally specify an end date.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 24
Practice 20-10: Setting Up a Mileage Expense Policy
Overview
In this practice, you will be setting up a mileage expense policy to allow employees to claim mileage reimbursement for travel expenses incurred by using their personal vehicles for business activities. In most countries, mileage reimbursement rates are determined by the central government.
Based on government mileage regulations and your company policy, you can set up a mileage expense policy by defining:
Mileage eligibility rules
Mileage rate determinants
Mileage add-on rates
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Mileage Eligibility Rules
1. Navigator to: Setup and Maintenance > Tasks pane: Manage Policies by Expense Category.
2. Select Create Policy: Mileage.
3. In the Mileage Eligibility Rules section, specify the rules that determine whether employees can claim mileage reimbursement for using their personal or company provided vehicles. The table lists the eligibility rules and their descriptions.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 25
Mileage Rate Determinants
4. In the Mileage Rate Determinants section, specify the determinants on which the mileage reimbursement policy is based. The table lists selected rate determinants and their descriptions
Mileage Add-On Rates
5. In the Mileage Add-On Rates section, you can add passenger rates and company-specific rates for inclusion in the mileage reimbursement policy. The table lists additional rate types and their descriptions.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 26
6. Once you finish setting up the mileage expense policy, you must:
Complete the mileage rate spreadsheet and load the spreadsheet to the application, or complete the Create Rates dialog box, depending on the complexity of the policy.
Activate the mileage reimbursement policy.
Set up cumulative mileage determinants when applicable.
Assign the mileage reimbursement policy to expense types.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 27
Practice 20-11: Setting Up an Accommodations Expense Policy
Overview
In this practice, you will be following all of the procedures for setting up an accommodations expense policy.
To setup an accommodations expense policy, you perform the following steps:
Setting Up an Accommodations Policy
Setting Up Policy Violations
Completing the Accommodations Rate Spreadsheet
Associating the Accommodations Expense Policy with an Expense Type
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Setting Up an Accommodations Policy
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Policies by Expense Category.
2. Select Create Policy: Accommodations.
The Create Accommodations Expense Policy page opens.
3. In the Rate Definition section, do the following: cc.a. Select Single currency.
dd. b. Select Currency: USD.
Note: If a currency rate conversion is necessary to verify a policy rate limit, you must define a conversion rate in Oracle Fusion General Ledger.
4. In the Rate Determinants section, do the following: ee. a. Select the Roles check box.
ff. b. Select the Locations check box. gg. c. Select Role Type: Job.
hh. d. Select the Geographical locations check box.
5. In the Policy Enforcements section, do the following:
ii. a. Select the Policy violation warning check box. jj. b. Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 10. kk.c. Select the Display warning check box.
ll. d. Select the Prevent report submission check box. mm. e. Enter Error Tolerance Percentage: 20.
Setting up Policy Violations
To set policy violations for accommodations expense use the information shown in the following table.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 28
Completing the Accommodations Rate Spreadsheet
6. Click Create Rates.
7. Download the predefined spreadsheet to your local drive for completion.
Note: If you select rate determinants in the Rate Determinants section, you complete the predefined spreadsheet. If you don't select any rate determinants, you create accommodations rates in the Create Rates dialog.
8. On the Create Accommodations Rates spreadsheet, complete the fields as shown in the table.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 29
9. Click Upload.
10. On the Create Accommodations Expense Policy page, click Save and Close.
When rates are successfully uploaded, the policy status becomes valid. To use this rate policy for calculation of accommodations expenses, you must:
11. Activate the accommodations expense policy.
nn. a. On the Manage Policies by Expense Category page, select the accommodations expense policy you created and click Activate.
12. Assign the accommodations expense policy to an expense type.
Assign the Accommodations Expense Policy to an Expense Type.
13. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Templates.
14. Click the Create icon or select an applicable template for a business unit.
15. Create a template for accommodations expenses.
16. On the Expense Types tab, click the Create icon to open the Create Expense Type
dialog.
17. Select Category: Accommodations.
18. On the Policies tab in the Create Expense Type dialog, select the accommodations expense policy you created, specify the start date, and optionally specify an end date.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 30
Practice 20-12: Setting Up a Corporate Card Program
Overview
In this practice you will:
Set up a Cash Advance
Enter Values in the Create Transfer Parameters page.
Set Up the HTTPS Server.
Configure the Corporate Cards Program Setup.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Set Up a Cash Advance
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Corporate Card Program.
2. Click Create.
3. Enter Name: XXVision Card Program.
4. Enter Card Type: Procurement.
5. Enter Brand: American Express.
6. Select File Format: American Express #1025
7. Select the Transfer Parameters tab in the Create Corporate Card Program page.
8. Click the Create Transfer Parameter dialog box.
Before you can download transaction files from American Express servers, you must set up a Secure File Transfer (SFT) account with American Express and obtain the user name and password that identifies your customer account on the SFT server.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 31
Enter Values in the Transfer Parameters page.
9. Enter the values displayed in the table below in the Create Transfer Parameters page.
10. Click Save and Close.
After you complete the tasks for corporate card transaction download, you can use the Upload Corporate Card Transaction File program with the profile name as a download parameter to download corporate card transaction files from American Express.
Note: American Express places one or multiple transaction files at a time in a folder called Outbox in your customer account, but the Upload Corporate Card Transaction File program processes only one file at a time. The process picks up the oldest file each time. To pick up multiple files, you must schedule the Upload Corporate Card Transaction File process to run multiple times.
Before you can process VISA, MasterCard, and Diner's Club corporate card transaction files, you must set up an HTTPS server, configure the corporate card programs setup, and verify the HTTPS server setup.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 32
Practice 20-13: Creating a Corporate Card Program
Overview
In this practice, you show that your company has chosen American Express as your corporate card issuer. You are ready to start processing corporate card transaction files. To enable the processing, you will set up the applicable entities. You will complete the following tasks:
Define a corporate card mapping rule.
Create a corporate card program and company account number with American Express.
Assign the mapping rule to the corporate card program to enable the upload process to derive corporate card expense types for the corporate card transactions.
Create a Corporate Card Mapping Rule
A corporate card mapping rule enables you to assign a corporate card expense type to the transactions based on the transaction codes in the corporate card transaction file. Once the corporate card expense type is derived using the mapping rule, the corporate card expense type is converted to an expense type. This expense type is derived using the corporate card expense type mapping in the default expense template.
Note: Only those corporate card transactions with associated expense types are displayed in the Expenses work area
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Define a Corporate Card Mapping Rule
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Corporate Card Expense Type Mapping Rules.
2. Click the Create icon.
The Create Corporate Card Expense Type Mapping Rule dialog appears.
3. In the Name field, enter XXMapping Rule.
4. Select Source Lookup Type: MIS Industry Codes.
MIS Industry Codes is a lookup that contains the American Express corporate card transaction codes that describe the type of transactions in the corporate card transaction file.
5. Select Default Card Expense Type: Miscellaneous.
6. Map the Source Lookup Codes to the following corporate card expense types:
7. Select Source Lookup Code 01: Air.
8. Select Source Lookup Code 03: Hotel.
9. Select Source Lookup Code 05: Meal.
10. Select Source Lookup Code 08: Miscellaneous.
11. Click Save and Close.
12. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 33
Creating a Corporate Card Program and Company Account Number with American Express
A corporate card program represents your agreement with the card issuer, your organization setup within the card issuer system, and the payment liability.
13. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Corporate Card Programs.
14. Click the Create icon.
The Create Corporate Card Program page opens.
15. Enter Name: XXAMEX.
16. Enter Description: XXAmerican Express Travel Card.
17. Select Card Type: Travel.
18. Select Card Brand: American Express.
19. Click the Upload Rules tab.
20. Select File Format: American Express KR1025.
21. Select Employee Matching Rule for New Cards: Employee number.
22. In the Card Expense Type Mapping section, select Transaction Summary Mapping Rule: XXMapping Rule. This is the mapping rule that you created previously.
23. Select Transaction Summary Source Column: MIS industry code.
24. In the Company Accounts section, click the Create icon. The Create Company Account dialog opens.
25. Enter Company Account Name: XXCompany Account Name.
26. Enter Company Account Number: XX1000.
27. Enter Market Code: 001.
28. Enter Requesting Control Account Number: XX2000.
29. Select Card Issuer: American Express.
30. Select Card Issuer Site: UK - London.
31. Select Payables Business Unit: US1 Business Unit.
32. Select Payment Currency: USD – US Dollar.
33. Select Payment Terms: Immediate.
34. Select Payment Option: Both.
35. Enter Expense Clearing Account: 101.10.22190.000.000.000.
Note: If you receive an error message, click the Expense Clearing Account icon and search for any missing segments in the Expense Clearing Account dialog box.
36. Click Save and Close.
37. To exit the page, click Save and Close.
38. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 34
Practice 20-14: Setting Up a Corporate Card Usage Policy Warning Demonstration
Overview
In this demonstration, your instructor will set up a warning to enforce corporate card usage.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Corporate Card Usage Policy Warning
If the Airfare category has been adjusted already, select another expense category and add parameters.
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Define Credit Card Data.
2. Click the US1 Business Unit link.
3. For Airfare, do the following:
Enter Cash Limit: 100.00.
Enter Warning Tolerance Percentage: 0.00.
Select the Display Warning to User check box.
4. Click Save and Close.
5. Click Done.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 35
Practice 20-15: Creating Receipt and Notification Rules
Overview
In this practice you will be creating an Expense Report Receipt and Notification Rule.
Assumptions
Sign in as your FASXX.Student user as assigned by the instructor.
Tasks
Create Expense Report Receipt and Notification Rule
1. Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Receipt and Notification Rule.
2. Specify the type of receipt your company requires for expense report submission in the header of the Create Receipt and Notification Rule page:
3. Specify the stage when imaged receipts must be attached to the expense report by the employee.
4. Specify when missing and overdue expense report receipts are considered overdue.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 36
5. Specify when expense report payments should be placed on hold due to pending receipts.
6. Specify the level on which you want to define receipt rules. You can specify receipt rules at all, any, or none of the following levels:
Organization Level
Template Level
Expense Level
7. For the Organization Level:
Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Receipt and Notification Rules > Create.
8. For the Template Level:
Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Template > Create > Receipt Requirement tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 37
9. For the Expense Level:
Navigate to: Setup and Maintenance > Manage Expense Report Template > Create > Expense Types tab.
Copyright © 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Practices for Lesson 20: Configuring Oracle Expenses with Rapid Implementation
Chapter 20 - Page 38
much appreciated man
ReplyDelete